P632 EN M R-11-C 310 650 Volume 1

MiCOM P632
Transformer Differential Protection Device

P632/EN M/R-11-C
Version P632 -310 -409/410 -650
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual
All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).
Warning!
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in
certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect
use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause
personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the P632 must be isolated. Where
stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be
employed.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faul ty and SFMON: Warni ng (LED)
(permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM) can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the P632. Schneider
Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this P632 must be in accordance with the manual. If any
other modification is made without the express permission of Schneider
Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this P632 depends on appropriate shipping and
handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful
operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this P632.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/4LM/J11 or later version), with the warnings in Chapter 5, (p. 5-1),
Chapter 10, (p. 10-1), Chapter 11, (p. 11-1) and Chapter 12, (p. 12-1)
and with the content of Chapter 14, (p. 14-1), before working on the
equipment. If the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and
may render the product unsafe.
Installation of the DHMI:
A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm (US: AWG14 or
thicker) must be connected to the DHMI protective conductor terminal to link
the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.
To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be
in contact with hazardous live parts.
The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside high-
voltage cables or connections. Currents can be induced in the cable which
may result in electromagnetic interference.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the P632
and of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety
engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize
equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with
safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
This operating manual gives instructions for installation, commissioning and
operation of the P632. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office of Schneider Electric
and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on
the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely
from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of
the operating manual.
Changes after going to press
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 APPLICATION AND SCOPE ................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overview - P632 ..........................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Including Function Groups in the Configuration .......................................................... 1-4
1.3 Overview of Function Groups - Part 1 ......................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Overview of Function Groups - Part 2 ......................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Control Functions ........................................................................................................ 1-9
1.6 Design .......................................................................................................................1-10
1.7 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 1-11
1.8 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 1-12
1.9 Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-13
1.10 Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-14
2 TECHNICAL DATA ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Routine Tests .................................................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2-9
2.5 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.3 IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.4 Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.5.6 Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.7 Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-13
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-13
2.6 Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.6.1 Local Control Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.6.2 PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-14
2.6.4 IEC Communication Interface ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.6.5 IRIGB Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.7 Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.8 Settings Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-17
2.8.1 Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.8.2 Differential Protection ..................................................................................................................................2-17
2.8.3 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-17
2.8.4 Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.8.5 Overfluxing Protection .................................................................................................................................2-17
2.9 Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-20
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-21
2.10.1 Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-21
2.10.2 Currents .......................................................................................................................................................2-21

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1
2.10.3 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.11 Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-22
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-22
2.12 Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-24
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-25
2.13.1 Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-25
2.13.2 General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-26
2.13.3 Transformer Differential Protection ............................................................................................................. 2-27
3 OPERATION ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, Selection of the
Control Point (Function Group LOC) ............................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 Bay Panel .......................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.3 Fault Panel .....................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.4 Overload Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.5 Selection of the Control Point ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.3.6 Configurable Clear Key .................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.4 Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 3-10
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-21
3.4.4 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE) .......................................... 3-23
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-39
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-40
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-42
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-44
3.8.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-45
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer .................................................................................... 3-48
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-50
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-53
3.10.1 General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-53
3.10.2 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-55
3.10.3 Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.10.4 Output of External Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-64
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-65
3.11.1 Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.11.2 Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-65
3.11.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-66
3.12 Main Functions of the P632 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-68
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values .......................................................................................................... 3-68
3.12.2 Phase Reversal Function ..............................................................................................................................3-72
3.12.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored ...................................................................................... 3-73
3.12.4 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-75
3.12.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-84
3.12.6 Activation of Dynamic Parameters ........................................................................................................... 3-86
3.12.7 Function Blockings .......................................................................................................................................3-86
3.12.8 Multiple Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.12.9 Blocked/Faulty ............................................................................................................................................. 3-89
P632
Table of Contents
2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals ...................................................................... 3-89
3.12.11 Multiple Signaling ........................................................................................................................................ 3-91
3.12.12 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function ................................................................. 3-92
3.12.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ............................................................................................................. 3-92
3.12.14 Communication Error ...................................................................................................................................3-96
3.12.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................... 3-96
3.12.16 Resetting Actions .........................................................................................................................................3-98
3.12.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-101
3.12.18 Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-102
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-103
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-105
3.14.1 Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-105
3.14.2 Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-105
3.14.3 Signals .......................................................................................................................................................3-105
3.14.4 Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.14.5 Monitoring Signal Memory ......................................................................................................................... 3-107
3.14.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-107
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-108
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-109
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-110
3.17.1 Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-110
3.17.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-111
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-112
3.18.1 Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-112
3.18.2 Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-112
3.18.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-112
3.18.4 Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-113
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-114
3.19.1 Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-114
3.19.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-114
3.19.3 Acquisition of the Fault Currents ............................................................................................................... 3-116
3.19.4 Acquisition of the Differential and Restraining Currents ............................................................................3-117
3.19.5 Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................ 3-119
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-120
3.20.1 Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-120
3.20.2 Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-121
3.20.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-121
3.20.4 Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-122
3.20.5 Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-123
3.21 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF) ......................................................... 3-125
3.21.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection ............................................................................................. 3-125
3.21.2 Amplitude Matching ...................................................................................................................................3-126
3.21.3 Vector Group Matching ..............................................................................................................................3-129
3.21.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering ................................................................................................................3-129
3.21.5 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-131
3.21.6 Rapid (high-set) Differential Protection ..................................................................................................... 3-133
3.21.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................. 3-134
3.21.8 Saturation Discriminator ............................................................................................................................3-135
3.21.9 Overfluxing Stabilization ........................................................................................................................... 3-136
3.21.10 Measured Operating Data of Differential Protection ..................................................................................3-137
3.22 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 and REF_2) ....................... 3-139
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Ground Differential Protection ................................................................................ 3-139
3.22.2 Blocking ground differential protection ..................................................................................................... 3-139
3.22.3 Amplitude Matching ...................................................................................................................................3-140
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3
3.22.4 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-142
3.22.5 Idiff>>> Threshold ....................................................................................................................................3-146
3.22.6 Applying Current Transformer Supervision ................................................................................................3-146
3.22.7 Measured Operating Data of Ground Differential Protection ..................................................................... 3-146
3.22.8 Protection of Autotransformers ................................................................................................................. 3-147
3.23 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOC1 and DTOC2) ......... 3-150
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-150
3.23.2 Phase Current Stages ................................................................................................................................ 3-151
3.23.3 Negative-Sequence Current Stages ...........................................................................................................3-153
3.23.4 Residual Current Stages ............................................................................................................................ 3-154
3.23.5 General Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 3-156
3.23.6 Counters of the DTOC Protection Function ................................................................................................ 3-157
3.24 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2) ............ 3-158
3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling IDMT Protection .......................................................................................................3-158
3.24.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-160
3.24.3 Phase Current Stage ..................................................................................................................................3-163
3.24.4 Negative-Sequence Current Stage ............................................................................................................ 3-165
3.24.5 Residual Current Stage ..............................................................................................................................3-167
3.24.6 Hold Time .................................................................................................................................................. 3-169
3.24.7 General Starting ........................................................................................................................................ 3-171
3.24.8 Counters of the IDMT Protection Function ................................................................................................. 3-171
3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1) .......................................... 3-172
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling Thermal Overload Protection .................................................................................. 3-172
3.25.2 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-173
3.25.3 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-173
3.25.4 Coolant Temperature Acquisition .............................................................................................................. 3-174
3.25.5 Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-175
3.26 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ..................................................... 3-178
3.26.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-178
3.26.2 V<> Protection Readiness .........................................................................................................................3-178
3.26.3 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-178
3.27 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-181
3.27.1 Disabling or Enabling Over/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-181
3.27.2 Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time ............................................................................................. 3-182
3.27.3 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-182
3.27.4 Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-182
3.27.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-183
3.27.6 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (f/t) ................................ 3-183
3.27.7 f
min
/f
max
Measurement ...............................................................................................................................3-186
3.28 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f) ........................................................... 3-187
3.28.1 Enabling or Disabling Overfluxing Protection ............................................................................................ 3-187
3.28.2 Conditioning the Measured Value ..............................................................................................................3-187
3.28.3 Fixed-time Warning Stage ......................................................................................................................... 3-188
3.28.4 Fixed-time Tripping Stage ......................................................................................................................... 3-188
3.28.5 Variable-time Tripping Stage ..................................................................................................................... 3-189
3.29 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS) ......................................... 3-194
3.29.1 Hardware requirement .............................................................................................................................. 3-194
3.29.2 Enabling or Disabling the CTS Function ..................................................................................................... 3-194
3.29.3 Blocking CTS ..............................................................................................................................................3-194
3.29.4 Monitoring Condition ................................................................................................................................. 3-195
3.29.5 Signaling and Indication ............................................................................................................................ 3-196
3.29.6 Reset ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-197
3.29.7 Multiple Signaling from the CTS Function .................................................................................................. 3-197
3.30 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 and MCM_2) ..................... 3-199
P632
Table of Contents
4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling Measuring-Circuit Monitoring .................................................................................. 3-199
3.30.2 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring .....................................................................................................................3-199
3.30.3 Multiple Signaling from the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring Function .......................................................... 3-200
3.31 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 and CBF_2) ..................3-201
3.31.1 Assigning Transformer Ends ...................................................................................................................... 3-201
3.31.2 Assigning Circuit Breakers .........................................................................................................................3-201
3.31.3 Assigning the Trip Command .....................................................................................................................3-201
3.31.4 Enabling or Disabling the CBF Function .....................................................................................................3-201
3.31.5 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-202
3.31.6 Detecting a CB Tripping .............................................................................................................................3-203
3.31.7 Current flow monitoring .............................................................................................................................3-203
3.31.8 Evaluation of CB Status Signals .................................................................................................................3-204
3.31.9 Startup Criteria ..........................................................................................................................................3-205
3.31.10 Trip Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-207
3.31.11 Starting Trigger ......................................................................................................................................... 3-207
3.31.12 Fault Behind CB Protection ........................................................................................................................ 3-208
3.31.13 CB Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................................................ 3-208
3.32 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-210
3.32.1 Enabling or Disabling the Limit Value Monitoring Function ....................................................................... 3-210
3.32.2 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-210
3.32.3 Monitoring the Measured Temperature Value ........................................................................................... 3-211
3.33 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 and LIM_2) .................................... 3-213
3.33.1 Monitoring Minimum and Maximum Phase Currents ................................................................................. 3-213
3.34 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-215
3.35 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) ... 3-223
3.35.1 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions ................................................................. 3-223
3.35.2 Designation of External Devices ................................................................................................................3-225
3.35.3 Bay Type Selection .................................................................................................................................... 3-225
3.35.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type .........................................................................................................................3-226
3.35.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units ....................................................... 3-227
3.35.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units ............................................................................ 3-229
3.36 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) ..............................................................3-239
3.36.1 IEC 61850 Reporting ..................................................................................................................................3-240
3.37 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) ....................................................3-241
3.38 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) ............................................................ 3-242
3.38.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control ....................................................................................................3-243
4 DESIGN ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-5
4.2.3 Detachable HMI ............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-8
5 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION .......................................................................5-1
5.1 Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-2
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-3
5.3 Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-4
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-4
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5
5.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-11
5.6 Connection ................................................................................................................5-12
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-12
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIGB Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-18
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P632409/410 ................................................................................................................5-18
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P632409/410 ............................................................................................ 5-18
6 LOCAL CONTROL (HMI) ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Text Display ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.4 Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-5
6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.5 Display Panels .............................................................................................................6-7
6.6 Menu Tree and Data Points ......................................................................................... 6-8
6.7 List Data Points ........................................................................................................... 6-9
6.8 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ....................................................... 6-10
6.9 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 6-11
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx ................................................................................................ 6-12
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys ....................................................................................................... 6-14
6.10 Changing Between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-15
6.11 Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-16
6.11.1 Bay Panel .....................................................................................................................................................6-16
6.12 Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-21
6.12.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.12.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-22
6.12.3 Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-23
6.12.4 Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-26
6.12.5 List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.12.6 Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.12.7 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-33
6.12.8 Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-34
6.12.9 Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-36
7 SETTINGS ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Devi ce I dent i f i cat i on ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.2 Conf i gur at i on Par amet er s .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.1.3 Funct i on Par amet er s ............................................................................................................................ 7-88
8 INFORMATION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 8-1
8.1 Operati on ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Cycl i c Val ues ............................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 Cont r ol and Test i ng ............................................................................................................................8-106
8.1.3 Oper at i ng Dat a Recor di ng ................................................................................................................8-116
P632
Table of Contents
6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
8.2 Events ................................................................................................................... 8-117
8.2.1 Event Count er s .................................................................................................................................... 8-117
8.2.2 Measur ed Event Dat a .........................................................................................................................8-120
8.2.3 Event Recor di ng .................................................................................................................................. 8-126
9 IEC 61850 SETTINGS VIA IED CONFIGURATOR ....................................................9-1
9.1 Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.4.1 General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.2 External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.4.3 External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-5
9.5 Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-6
9.6 GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-7
9.6.1 System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-7
9.7 GOOSE Subscribing .....................................................................................................9-9
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................9-9
9.8 Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-12
9.8.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-12
9.9 Controls .....................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.1 Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-13
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-13
9.10 Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-15
9.11 Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-16
9.11.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-16
10 COMMISSIONING ............................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-3
10.2.1 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-3
10.2.2 Testing .........................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.3 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-5
10.2.4 Checking the Output Relays ........................................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.5 Checking the Protection Function ................................................................................................................10-6
10.2.6 Checking Control Functions ......................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.7 Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-10
11 TROUBLESHOOTING ..........................................................................................11-1
12 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2
12.2 Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-3
12.3 Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-4
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-5
12.5 Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-6
12.6 Serial Interfaces ........................................................................................................ 12-7
13 STORAGE .......................................................................................................... 13-1
14 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ..................................................................... 14-1
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7
15 ORDER INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 15-1
A1 FUNCTION GROUPS ...........................................................................................A1-1
A2 INTERNAL SIGNALS ........................................................................................... A2-1
A3 GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................ A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4 TELECONTROL INTERFACES ..............................................................................A4-1
A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
.................................................................................................................................. A4-1
A4.1.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9
A4.2.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
A5 KEY TO THE LIST OF BAY TYPES ........................................................................A5-1
A6 LIST OF BAY TYPES ........................................................................................... A6-1
A6.1 Bay type No. 2 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ............................................... A6-1
A6.3 Bay type No. 546 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control .................A6-3
A6.7 Bay type No. 523 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ........................................... A6-7
A6.10 Bay type No. 544 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ......................................... A6-10
A6.14 Bay type No. 7 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .......................................A6-14
A6.17 Bay type No. 10 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .....................................A6-17
A6.19 Bay type No. 12 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ....................... A6-19
A6.24 Bay type No. 17 Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar ...................................A6-24
A6.25 Bay type No. 504 Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar .................................A6-25
P632
Table of Contents
8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
A6.38 Bay type No. 27 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar, direct motor control .......... A6-38
A6.41 Bay type No. 30 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar, direct motor control .......... A6-41
A6.46 Bay type No. 35 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-46
A6.49 Bay type No. 38 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-49
A6.53 Bay type No. 503 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ..................... A6-53
A6.54 Bay type No. 507 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar ..................... A6-54
A6.55 Bay type No. 220 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control ...............A6-55
A6.60 Bay type No. 45 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............... A6-60
A6.61 Bay type No. 46 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......................................... A6-61
A6.64 Bay type No. 49 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............... A6-64
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9
A6.69 Bay type No. 526 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ........................................ A6-70
A6.70 Bay type No. 54 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .........A6-71
A6.71 Bay type No. 55 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ....................................A6-72
A6.74 Bay type No. 58 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .........A6-75
A6.79 Bay type No. 63 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-81
A6.80 Bay type No. 64 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar ...................... A6-82
A6.83 Bay type No. 67 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor control
................................................................................................................................ A6-85
A6.95 Bay type No. 79 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ..................................A6-101
A6.102 Bay type No. 86 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ............. A6-111
P632
Table of Contents
10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
A6.116 Bay type No. 100 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar, direct motor control .....A6-126
A6.117 Bay type No. 101 Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar ................................A6-127
A6.130 Bay type No. 114 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-141
A6.131 Bay type No. 115 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar .................. A6-142
A6.133 Bay type No. 117 Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-144
A6.137 Bay type No. 222 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ........... A6-148
A6.141 Bay type No. 123 Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ...................................... A6-154
A6.149 Bay type No. 133 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar ...........................A6-165
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11
A6.157 Bay type No. 547 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar, direct motor control
.............................................................................................................................. A6-173
.............................................................................................................................. A6-178
.............................................................................................................................. A6-179
.............................................................................................................................. A6-185
.............................................................................................................................. A6-186
A6.175 Bay type No. 148 Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar .................... A6-193
.............................................................................................................................. A6-196
.............................................................................................................................. A6-198
A6.183 Bay type No. 154 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control
.............................................................................................................................. A6-204
.............................................................................................................................. A6-206
A6.185 Bay type No. 156 Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ..........................A6-208
P632
Table of Contents
12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
A6.195 Bay type No. 554 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-220
control .....................................................................................................................A6-221
A6.197 Bay type No. 164 Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar ................. A6-222
control .....................................................................................................................A6-223
control .....................................................................................................................A6-224
control .....................................................................................................................A6-225
.............................................................................................................................. A6-226
.............................................................................................................................. A6-228
.............................................................................................................................. A6-230
.............................................................................................................................. A6-232
A6.211 Bay type No. 505 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar ................................ A6-242
A6.212 Bay type No. 197 Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar, direct motor control ..... A6-243
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 13
A6.243 Bay type No. 218 Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......... A6-284
A6.244 Bay type No. 219 Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar .......... A6-285
A6.245 Bay type No. 171 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar ............................ A6-287
A6.248 Bay type No. 173 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar ............ A6-290
A6.250 Bay type No. 175 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar, direct motor control . A6-292
A6.254 Bay type No. 232 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-296
A6.255 Bay type No. 178 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-297
A6.258 Bay type No. 180 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar ........................... A6-300
A6.262 Bay type No. 184 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar ........... A6-304
A6.268 Bay type No. 190 Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar, direct motor control
.............................................................................................................................. A6-310
P632
Table of Contents
14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
A6.273 Bay type No. 509 Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-315
control .....................................................................................................................A6-316
control .....................................................................................................................A6-318
control .....................................................................................................................A6-319
control .....................................................................................................................A6-321
control .....................................................................................................................A6-322
A6.283 Bay type No. 129 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-325
A6.284 Bay type No. 130 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar ................. A6-326
A6.285 Bay type No. 131 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar, direct motor
control .....................................................................................................................A6-327
A6.286 Bay type No. 132 Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar ................ A6-328
A6.287 Bay type No. 1 Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar ............................ A6-329
A6.288 Bay type No. 980 Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar ........................ A6-330
A7 P632 VERSION HISTORY ................................................................................... A7-1
Table of Contents
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 15
P632
Table of Contents
16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1 APPLICATION AND SCOPE
1.1 Overview - P632
The P632 differential protection device is intended for the fast and selective
short-circuit protection of transformers, motors, generators and other
installations with 2 windings.
Fig. 1-1: P632 in an 84 TE sized case.
Fig. 1-2: P632 in a 40 TE sized case.
The P632 provides high-speed three-system differential protection using a triple-
slope characteristic and two high-set differential elements in combination with
transformer inrush restraint, overfluxing restraint and through-stabilization.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-1
Amplitude and vector group matching is done just by entering the nominal values
of transformer windings and associated current transformers. An (optional)
overreaching current measuring circuit monitoring function will prevent
unwanted tripping by differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary
circuit.
Phase swapping allows motor / generator protection applications with enlarged
protection zones.
In addition many supplementary protective functions are incorporated in the
devices. These can be individually configured and cancelled.
The relevant protection parameters can be stored in four independent parameter
subsets in order to adapt the protection device to different operating and power
system management conditions.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to three electrically
operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the
bay of a medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic
topology). The P632 has almost 300 predefined Bay Types stored for selection
and it is also possible to load user-defined bay templates.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the
integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and
versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This
simplifies the handling of switch bay protection and control technology from
planning to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device
parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-
permissible switching operations.
These features give the user the means to adapt the P632 to the protection and
control capacity required in a specific application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes
it possible to accommodate special applications.
P632
1 Application and Scope
1-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
24
V/f
27/59
V<>
81
f<>
I
Y,b
I
Y,a
V
I
P,a
I
P,b
87
DIFF
49
THRM1
51
IDMT1
51
IDMT2
50
DTOC2
87G
REF_1
Metering
LIM_1
Overload rec.
Self Monitoring
LIM_2
Fault rec.
LGC
ILOCK
Communication
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem...
via RS485 or Fiber optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
resp.
via RJ 45 or Fiber optics using IEC 61850
16S
COMM1
16S
COMM2
16E
IEC
52
DEV
CLK
IRIGB
CMD_1 SIG_1
26
MEASI MEASO
Transformer Differential Protection
P632
Always available Optional
LIMIT
50
DTOC1
87G
REF_2
50/62BF
CBF_2
50/62BF
CBF_1
MCM_2 MCM_1
CTS
Control and
Monitoring
of up to 3
switchgear units
Recording and
Data Acquisition

LGC
LOGIC / LOG2

Fig. 1-3: Function diagram.
For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-3
1.2 Including Function Groups in the Configuration
Functions listed in the tables in Section 1.3, (p. 1-5) are self-contained
function groups and can be individually configured or de-configured according to
the specific application requirements by using the MiCOM S1 operating program.
Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user, thus simplifying the
menu of the MiCOM S1.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand, simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions can be included in or excluded
from the configuration.
Example
For example, the current transformer supervision (function group CTS)
can be included in the configuration by setting
CTS: Functi on group CTS to With
can be excluded from the configuration by setting
CTS: Functi on group CTS to Without
P632
1-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1.3 Overview of Function Groups - Part 1
The following tables list the function groups that can be included in or excluded
from the configuration of the P632.
= Standard; () = Ordering option.
Protection functions
P632 ANSI IEC 61850 Function group
Abbrev. Description
87T PhsPDIF1 DIFF Differential protection, phase selective 2 wind.

PHAR1 Inrush stabilization (functionality that is part of the
DIFF function group)

87N

REF_x Restricted earth-fault protection 2
50TD
P/ Q/ N
DtpPhs- /
DtpEft- /
DtpNgsPTCO
x
DTOCx Definite-time overcurrent protection, 3 stages,
phase-, negative-sequence-, residual/starpoint-
overcurrent
2
51 P/
Q/ N
ItpPhs- /
ItpEft- /
ItpNgsPTCOx
IDMTx Inverse-time overcurrent protection, one stage,
phase-, negative-sequence-, residual/starpoint-
overcurrent
2
49 ThmPTTR1 THRM1 Thermal overload protection 1
27/ 59
P/ Q/ N
VtpPhs- /
VtpNgs- /
VtpPss- /
VtpRefPTyVx
V<> Time-voltage Protection 1
81 FrqPTyFx f<> Over / Underfrequency protection 1
24

V/f Overfluxing protection 1
50 BF RBRFx CBF_x Circuit breaker failure protection 2

CTS Current transformer supervision 1
30/ 74 AlmGGIO1 MCM_x Measuring-circuit monitoring 2

LIMIT
LIM_x
Limit value monitoring 2
LGC PloGGIOx LOGIC /
LOG_2
Programmable logic
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-5
Control functions
Abbrev. Description
52 XCBRx /
XSWIx /
CSWIx
DEV01 to
DEV03
Control and monitoring of up to three switchgear
units
(3)

CtlGGIO2 CMD_1 Single-pole commands (12)

CtlGGIO1 SIG_1 Single-pole signals (12)
LGC

ILOCK Interlocking logic ()
Communication functions
Abbrev. Description
16S

COMM1,
COMM2
2 communication interfaces serial, RS 422 / 485 or
fiber optic
()
CLK

IRIGB Time synchronization IRIG-B ()
16E

IEC Communication interface Ethernet ()
16E GosGGIOx GOOSE IEC 61850 ()
Measured value functions
Abbrev. Description
26 RtdGGIO1
IdcGGIO1
MEASI
MEASO
Analog inputs and outputs
RTD input
1 Measuring data input 20 mA
2 Measuring data output 20 mA
()
()
()
()
P632
1-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1.4 Overview of Function Groups - Part 2
The following tables list the function groups that are generally available for the
P632, and which cannot be excluded from the configuration.
= Standard; () = Ordering option.
Inputs and outputs
Abbrev. Description

Measuring inputs
Phase currents
Residual current or star-point current
Voltage

23
2
1

INP
INP
OUTP
Binary inputs and outputs
Optical coupler inputs
Add. optical coupler inputs
Output relays

4 10
24
8 22
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-7
General functions
Abbrev. Description

DVICE Device

LOC Local control panel

PC PC link

F_KEY 6 configurable function keys

LED LED indicators

MAIN Main function

LLN0.SGCB PSS Parameter subset selection

SFMON Comprehensive self-monitoring

OP_RC Operating data recording (time-tagged event
logging)

MT_RC Monitoring Signal Recording

OL_DA Overload Data Acquisition

OL_RC Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)

FT_DA Fault data acquisition for a particular, settable point
in time during a fault

PTRCx /
RDRE1
FT_RC Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together
with fault value recording of the three phase
currents, the residual current as well as the three
phase-to-ground voltages and the neutral-point
displacement voltage)
P632
1-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1.5 Control Functions
Control functions are designed for the control of up to 3 electrically operated
switchgear units equipped with electrical check-back signaling.
For the control of switchgear units either the binary inputs or the optional
communication interface or the function keys of the local control panel can be
used.
Up to 12 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they
are processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each
binary signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can
have the debouncing and chatter suppression from three groups assigned, for
which the debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
For the acquisition of binary counters, up to four binary inputs may be
configured. The contents of these counters are transmitted cyclically via the
serial link. The counter values are stored so that they are not lost if the supply
voltage should fail. Counting continues from the stored value as the initial value
when the P632 restarts.
The P632 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and
validity to carry out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of
the switchgear units. If the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has
failed, it will signal this information (e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P632 checks
if this new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The
interlocking logic is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station
interlocking, for each Bay Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions
can be adapted to the actual bay and station topology. Interlocking display and
operation correspond to the programmable logic.
When the P632 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can
easily be integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the P632 is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is
issued. If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then
the issuing of such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary
outputs can be freely utilized for other purposes.
Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by
persistent commands.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-9
1.6 Design
The P632 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
P632
1-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1.7 Configurable Function Keys
To the right of the text display, there are six freely configurable function keys
available. These may be used for easy control operation access.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-11
1.8 Inputs and Outputs
The nominal current and voltage values of the measuring inputs on the P632 can
be set with the function parameters.
The nominal voltage range of the optical coupler inputs is 24 to 250 V DC. As an
option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. A 24
to 60 V DC version is also available.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input is lead-compensated, balanced and linearized for
PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751 / DIN EN 60751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured values (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
via 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured value can be output
in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P632
1-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1.9 Control and Display
Local control panel with an LC display containing 4 20 alphanumeric
characters.
23 LED indicators, 18 of which allow freely configurable function
assignment for the colors red and green. Furthermore there are various
operating modes and flashing functions available.
PC interface.
One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation
control system (optional).
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 1-13
1.10 Information Interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first channel of the communication interfaces (COMM1), the P632 can
be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system. This
channel is optionally available with a switchable protocol (per IEC 608705103,
IEC 8705101, DNP 3.0, MODBUS or Courier).
The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per
IEC 608705103 only) is designed for remote control.
As an order option, there is an Ethernet interface for communication per
IEC 61850 available instead of channel 1.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished via one of the
communication protocols or by using the optional IRIGB input.
P632
1-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2 TECHNICAL DATA
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P632, version -310 -409/410 -650.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device has
been designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards
EN 6025526 and EN 6025527 and with the EMC Directive and the Low
Voltage Directive issued by the Council of the European Community.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-1
2.2 General Data
2.2.1 General Device Data
Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
Flush-mounted case for 19 cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical 30.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52 for the front panel.
Flush-mounted case:
IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)
IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection

Surface-mounted case:
IP 50 for the case
IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections
See dimensional drawings (Section 4.2, (p. 4-4)), and the location and
terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-18)).
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1, COMM2
Fiber (X7, X8)
F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 608742 (for plastic fibers), or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST

connector 2.5 per IEC 60874101 (for
glass fibers).
(ST
is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)

Wire leads (X9, X10)
M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm (US:

AWG16).
IRIG-B Interface (X11)
BNC plug
P632
2 Technical Data
2-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Communication interface IEC 61850
Fiber (X7, X8)
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST
connector 2.5 per IEC 6087410 (for

glass fibers).
(ST
is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)

Fiber (X13)
SC connector per IEC 60874144 (for glass fibers)

Wire leads (X12)
RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.

Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs)
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 4 mm (US: AWG12), or
Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4.
Other inputs and outputs
Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm (US: AWG25 to
AWG14), or
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances
Per EN 60255-27.
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-3
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type Tests
All tests per EN 60255-26.
2.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test
Per EN 60255-22-1, Class III.
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV.
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV.
Test duration: > 2 s.
Source impedance: 200 .
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge
Per EN 60255-22-2 and IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 4.
Contact discharge
Single discharges: > 10.
Holding time: > 5 s.
Test voltage: 8 kV.
Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330 .
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy
Per EN 6100043 and ENV 50204, severity level 3.
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides.
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m.
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %.
Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100%.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements
Per EN 61000-44 and IEC 60255224, severity levels 3 and 4.
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns.
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns.
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV.
Burst duration:15 ms.
Burst period: 300 ms.
Burst frequency: 5 kHz.
Source impedance: 50 .
Power Frequency Immunity
Per IEC 60255227, Class A:
P632
2 Technical Data
2-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Phase-to-phase
RMS value 150 V.
Coupling resistance 100 .
Coupling capacitor 0.1 F, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
RMS value 300 V.
Coupling resistance 220 .
Coupling capacitor 0.47 F, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
I NP: Fi l ter to 6 [steps].
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test
Per EN 61000-45 and EN 60255-225, insulation class 4.
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical
lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s.
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s.
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV.
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min.
Source impedance: 12 / 42 .
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Per EN 61000-4-6 and EN 60255-226, severity level 3.
Test voltage: 10 V.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
Per EN 61000-4-8 or IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
Test frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity
Per EN 60255-11.
12 %.
2.3.1.2 Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test
Per EN 60255-27.
Front time: 1.2 s
Time to half-value: 50 s
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-5
2.3.1.3 Environmental tests
Temperature Stability Test
Per IEC 60068-2-1
-25C (-13F) storage (96 hours)
-40C (-40F) operation (96 hours)
Per IEC 60068-2-2
+85C (185F) storage (96 hours)
+85C (185F) operation (96 hours)
Per IEC 60068-2-14
Change of temperature, 5 cycles, 1C / min rate of change
Ambient Humidity Range Test
Per IEC 60068-2-3
56 days at 93% relative humidity and 40C (104F)
Per IEC 60068-2-30
Damp heat, cyclic (12 + 12 hours)
93 % relative humidity, +25C +55C (77F 131F)
Corrosive Environment Tests
Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
21 days at 75% relative humidity and 30C (86F) with exposure to
elevated concentrations of H
2
S, NO
2
, Cl
2
and SO
2
.
2.3.1.4 Mechanical Robustness 1
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 1 (without angle brackets and
frame)
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, and
60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport
10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
P632
2 Technical Data
2-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s, 3 x 1 cycle.
2.3.1.5 Mechanical Robustness 2
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame)
Surface-mounted case
Vibration Test
Per EN 6025521-1 or IEC 6025521-1, test severity class 2.
Frequency range in operation
10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm, and
60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport
10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 2:
10 g for 11 ms.
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
15 g for 11 ms.
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255213 or IEC 60255213, test procedure A, class 2.
Frequency range
5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s, 3 x 1 cycle.
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-1.
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-7
Additional Thermal Test
100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
P632
2 Technical Data
2-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range
-5C to +55C [+23F to +131F].
Limit temperature range
Operation: -25C to +55C [-13F to +131F].
Storage and transport: -25C to +70C [-13F to +158F].
Ambient Humidity Range
75 % relative humidity (annual mean).
56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40C [104F].
Condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-9
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs
Current Measuring Inputs
Nominal current I
nom
: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable).
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at I
nom
.
Load rating:
continuous: 20 A,
for 10 s: 150 A,
for 1 s: 500 A.
Nominal surge current: 1250 A.
Voltage Measuring Inputs
Nominal voltage V
nom
: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable).
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at V
nom
= 130 V AC.
Load rating:
continuous: 150 V AC
for 10 s: 300 V AC
Frequency
Nominal frequency f
nom
: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable).
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 f
nom
.
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz.
P632
2 Technical Data
2-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs
Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option
18 V standard variant (V
A,nom
: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V.

Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively low for V
A
< 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively high for V
A
> 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
Special variant 72 V: Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC.
Power consumption per input
18 V standard variant:
V
A
= 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W 30%,
V
A
> 110 V DC: V
A
5 mA 30%.
Special variants:
V
A
> switching threshold: V
A
5 mA 30%.
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in
most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where
a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-11
2.5.3 IRIGB Interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp
Input impedance: 33 k at 1 kHz
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
2.5.4 Direct Current Input
Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 I
DC,nom
(I
DC,nom
= 20 mA)
Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
Input load: 100
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 I
DC,nom
(adjustable).
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer
Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module).
Value range: 40.0C to +215.0C (40F to +419F).
3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor.
Open and short-circuited input permitted.
Open-circuit monitoring: > +215C and < -40C ( > +419F and
< -40F).
2.5.6 Direct Current Output
Output current: 0 to 20 mA
Maximum permissible load: 500
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P632
2 Technical Data
2-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.5.7 Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X (6I 6O)
For switchgear control.
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC.
Continuous current: 8 A.
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s.
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms.
Breaking capacity:
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4.

Operating time: less than 5 ms
Reset time: less than 5 ms
Binary I/O Modules X(4H)
with high-break contacts, applicable to DC circuits only.
Rated voltage: 250 V DC
Continuous current: 10 A
Short-duration current: 250 A for 0.03 s, 30 A for 3 s
Making capacity: 30 A
Breaking capacity:
7500 W resistive or 30 A at 250 V DC,

Maximum values: 30 A and 300 V DC.
2500 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC,

Maximum values: 10 A and 300 V DC.
Operating time: less than 0.2 ms
All other modules
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC.
Continuous current: 5 A.
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s.
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms.
Breaking capacity:
0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4.

Operating time: less than 5 ms
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-13
2.6 Interfaces
2.6.1 Local Control Panel
Input or output
With 13 keys and a 4 20 character liquid crystal display (LCD).
State and fault signals
23 LED indicators (5 permanently assigned, 18 freely configurable).
2.6.2 PC Interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface
The communication module can be provided with up to two communication
channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 may either be equipped
to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect
wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on
IEC 870-5103, IEC 608705101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol
based on IEC 60870-5-103.
Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable).
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m

Plastic Fiber Connection
Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at
both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125
Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
P632
2 Technical Data
2-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125
Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m
2.6.4 IEC Communication Interface
Ethernet-based communications per IEC 61850:
Wire Leads
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
Optical Fiber (100 Mbit/s)
ST connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Optical output: min. 18.85 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm
Optical input: max. 12 dBm

Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. 15 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm

SC connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Optical output: min. 23.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm

Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical output: min. 20 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm

2.6.5 IRIGB Interface
B122 format
Amplitude modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD- coded variable data (daily)
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-15
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter Information and Control
Functions.
P632
2 Technical Data
2-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.8 Settings Typical Characteristic Data
2.8.1 Main Function
Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
2.8.2 Differential Protection
Operate time including output relay:
16 ms without inrush stabilization or I

diff>
, I
diff>>
32 ms with inrush stabilization

Reset time (measured variable from fault infeed to 0): 30 ms, approx.
25 ms
2.8.3 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from 0 to 2-fold
operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms,
approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
2.8.4 Time-Voltage Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-
fold operate value):
40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal
value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
45 ms, approx. 30 ms
Resetting ratio for V<>:
1% to 10% (adjustable)
2.8.5 Overfluxing Protection
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-17
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
2.9.1.1 Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2
%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage V
A,nom
.
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.1.2 Differential Protection
Measuring system
at I
diff
< 0.2I
ref
: 10%
at I
diff
>= 0.2I
ref
: 5%
Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic restraint)
Deviation: 10%
2.9.1.3 Restricted Earth-Fault Protection
Measuring system at I
d
= 0.2I
ref
: 5%
2.9.1.4 Overcurrent-Time Protection
Operate values
Deviation: 5%
2.9.1.5 Thermal Overload Protection
Operate value
Deviation: 5%
2.9.1.6 Over- / Undervoltage Protection
Operate values V<>
5% related to the set value
1% related to the nominal value
2.9.1.7 Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>
30 mHz (f
nom
= 50 Hz)
40 mHz (f
nom
= 60 Hz)
P632
2 Technical Data
2-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Operate values df/dt
0.1 Hz/s (f
nom
= 50 or 60 Hz)
2.9.1.8 Overexcitation Protection
Operate values: 3%
2.9.1.9 Direct Current Input
Deviation: 1 %
2.9.1.10 Resistance Thermometer
Deviation: 2C
2.9.1.11 Analog Measured Data Output
Deviation: 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load
1 %
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
2.9.2.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency f
nom
, total harmonic distortion 2
%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage V
A,nom
.
Deviation
2.9.2.2 Definite-time stages
Deviation: 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
2.9.2.3 Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I 2 I
ref
: 5% + 10 to 25 ms
For extremely inverse IEC characteristics and for thermal overload
characteristics: 7.5% + 10 to 20 ms
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-19
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
2.9.3.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion
2%, ambient temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
V
A,nom
.
Deviation
2.9.3.2 Operating Data Measurement
Currents (measuring inputs): 1%
Voltages (measuring input): 0.5%
Currents (internally calculated): 2%
Voltages (internally calculated): 2%
Frequency: 10 mHz
2.9.3.3 Fault Data
Short-circuit current and voltage
Deviation: 3%
Short-circuit impedance, reactance, and fault location
Deviation: 5%
2.9.3.4 Internal Clock
With free running internal clock
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min)
Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface
1 ms
P632
2 Technical Data
2-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
2.10.1 Time Resolution
20 sampled values per period
2.10.2 Currents
Dynamic range
33I
nom
Amplitude resolution
at I
nom
= 1 A: 2.0 mA
rms
at I
nom
= 5 A: 10.1 mA
rms
2.10.3 Voltage
Dynamic range: 150 V
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mV
rms
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-21
2.11 Recording Functions
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating Data Memory
Scope for signals
All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
The 1000 most recent signals.
Monitoring Signal Memory
Scope for signals
All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals
All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals.
Depth for signals
200 entries per overload event.
Ground Fault Memory
Number
The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals
All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of 1024 different
logic state signals.
Depth for signals
200 entries per ground fault event.
Fault Memory
Number
The 8 most recent faults.
Scope for signals and fault values
All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different logic state signals.
Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
P632
2 Technical Data
2-22 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Depth for signals and fault values
200 entries per fault event
max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s
(for fnom = 60 Hz).
Resolution of the Recorded Data
As per Section 2.10, (p. 2-21), with maximum current dynamic ranges
(100 I
nom
/ 16 I
N,nom
)
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-23
2.12 Power Supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage V
A,nom
24 to 60 V DC or 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option).
Operating range for direct voltage
0.8 to 1.1 V
A,nom
with a residual ripple of up to 12 % V
A,nom
.
Operating range for alternating voltage
0.9 to 1.1 V
A,nom
.
Nominal burden
where V
A
= 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W

Start-up peak current
< 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time
50 ms for interruption of V
A
220 V DC (upper range supply)
50 ms for interruption of V
A
60 V DC (lower range supply)
P632
2 Technical Data
2-24 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications
2.13.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 600441 and IEC 600446
standards:
I
pn
Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT
I
sn
Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
I
psc
Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current
K
ssc
Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:
K
ssc
=
I
psc
I
pn
I
ref
Reference current of IDMT protection element
R
bn
Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
P
bn
Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
P
bn
= R
bn
I
sn
2
R
b
Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
P
b
Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
P
b
= R
b
I
sn
2
R
ct
Secondary winding resistance of the CT
P
ct
Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for
secondary rated current:
P
ct
= R
ct
I
sn
2
V
sal
Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
V
k
Rated knee point voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
n
n
Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
n
b
Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT:
n
b
= n
n
R
ct
+ R
bn
R
ct
+ R
b
= n
n
P
ct
+ P
bn
P
ct
+ P
b
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-25
R
l
One-way lead resistance from CT to relay
R
rel
Resistive burden of relays CT input
T
p
Primary time constant (primary system time constant)
(System) angular frequency
X
p
/R
p
Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio):
X
p
R
p
= T
p
K
d
Dimensioning factor for the CT
K
emp
Relay specific, empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT
2.13.2 General Equations
The current transformer can be dimensioned
either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 600441, 2.3.4:
V
sal
K
d
K
ssc
I
sn
(R
ct
+ R
b
)
or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to
IEC 600441, 2.3.3, as follows:
n
n
K
d
K
ssc
R
ct
+ R
b
R
ct
+ R
bn
= K
d
K
ssc
P
ct
+ P
b
P
ct
+ P
bn
The relation between both methods is given as follows:
V
sal
= n
n
(
P
bn
I
sn
+ I
sn
R
ct
)
The actual secondary connected burden R
b
is given as follows:
For phase-to-ground faults: R
b
= 2 R
l
+ R
rel
For phase-to-phase faults: R
b
= R
l
+ R
rel
The wire lead burden is calculated as:
R
l
=
l
A
= specific conductor resistance
(e.g. for copper 0.021 mm/m = 2.110
-8
m, at 75C)
l = wire length
A = wire cross section
The MiCOM Px3x input CT burden R
rel
is less than 20 m, independent of the set
nominal current (1A or 5A). Usually this relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage V
k
according to IEC 600441-am1, 2.3.12 is lower
than the secondary accuracy limiting voltage V
sal
according to IEC 600441,
2.3.4. It is not possible to give a general relation between V
k
and V
sal
, but for
standard core material the following relations applies:
V
K
0.85V
sal
for class 5P CTs, and
V
K
0.75V
sal
for class 10P CTs, respectively.
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to
avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value, instead of the required over-
dimensioning factor K
d
:
P632
2 Technical Data
2-26 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
K
d
= K
max
1 +
X
p
R
p
= 1 + T
p
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to consider an empirically
determined dimensioning factor K
d
=K
emp
such that the appropriate operation of
the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. This factor
depends on application and relay type, as outlined in the following.
2.13.3 Transformer Differential Protection
For Transformer Differential Protection Devices the empirical dimensioning factor
K
d
= K
emp
for the CTs considering external faults (assuming maximum through-
flowing currents) can be taken from the following diagram:
0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
4.5
5.0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
K
emp
X
p
/
p
R
0.5
1.5
2.5
3.5
This CT dimensioning assures through fault stability of the differential element.
Due to the inbuilt saturation discriminator the CT requirement is independent of
the current sensitivity given by the set basic threshold of the tripping
characteristic.
The empirical dimensioning factor K
emp
(shown in the diagram above) has been
determined by investigations using 3-shot auto-reclosing sequences with 450 ms
of fault current feed (starting at worst case point on wave) for each shot and
300 ms dead time between shots. In most practical cases faults would be cleared
in 100 to 200 ms for external protection operation and the dead time between
auto-reclose shots would be longer than 300 ms. This would reduce the flux
build-up in the core. Therefore the above shown empirical dimensioning factor
K
emp
can be considered as being based on a conservative approach.
For internal fault steady-state saturation is permissible with maximum fault
currents up to 4 times the steady-state accuracy limit current of the CT. This
corresponds to a dimensioning factor of K
d
= 0.25 for internal faults.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
2 Technical Data
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 2-27
P632
2 Technical Data
2-28 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3 OPERATION
3.1 Modular Structure
The P632, a numerical device, is part of the MiCOM P30 family of devices. The
device types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware
modules. The figure below shows the basic hardware structure of the P632.
D5Z5201C
Analog bus module
Voltages Currents Signals
Commands Signals
Commands Signals
Commands
Measured data Auxiliary voltage Signals
Commands Signals
Commands
C
o
m
m
u
n
i
c
.

m
o
d
u
l
e
T X Y V
C
P
N P
A A A
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
L
L
o
c
a
l

c
o
n
t
r
o
l

m
o
d
u
l
e
Digital bus module
Analog bus module
Analog I/O module
A
n
a
l
o
g

I
/
O

m
o
d
u
l
e
Processor module
B
i
n
a
r
y

I
/
O

m
o
d
u
l
e
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r

m
o
d
u
l
e
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

m
o
d
u
l
e
PC interface
Communication
interface(s)
Protection interface
InterMiCOM
Fig. 3-1: Basic hardware structure.
External analog quantities and binary quantities electrically isolated are
converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X.
The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary
signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or
combinations of these.
The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which
supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the
analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus
module. The optional transient ground fault module N evaluates the measured
variables according to the transient ground fault evaluation scheme.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary
signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the
binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-1
The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication
interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation
control system and for remote access respectively a protection communication
interface for the transfer of digital information between two protection devices.
The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable. It encompasses all control and display
elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program S1.
P632
3 Operation
3-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P632:
Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel)
PC interface
Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
Parameters Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P632, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P632 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
Operation Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
Events Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the users choice. All settings and signals of the P632 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
DataModelExplorer. The Addresses document (being part of the
DataModelExplorer) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P632.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value Panels on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P632 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value
Panels, Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)
When the graphic display has been fitted then the layout of a bay with its
switchgear units will be shown on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel usually consists of
one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor from the PC
Access Software MiCOM S1 and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it can be
sub-divided into up to eight pages. The graphic display also permits the display
of the Event Panel and the configurable Signal Panel. When the text display has
been fitted the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote).
In addition the P632 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured
values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or if activated the
Operation Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of
overload or ground fault events, the display will automatically switch to the
Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel
remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued (LOC: Param. change
enabl .) it will be cancelled after the time period, defined by setting LOC: Hol d-
ti me for Panel s has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up.
3.3.1 Bay Panel
Fig. 3-2: Example of a Bay Panel (with text display).
The P632 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. If the required bay type
is not included in the standard selection, the user can contact the manufacturer
of the P632 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into
the P632. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the
user can also define new bay types.
The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation (see Section 3.35.2, (p. 3-225)).
The display of external device designations can be disabled (at LOC: Di spl ay
L/R ). The display of the control point (local or remote control) and interlocking
can also be disabled (at LOC: Di spl . i nterl . stat.).
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is
cancelled if the return time for illumination (LOC: Return ti me i l l umi n.) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Return ti me sel ect. ) has elapsed.
P632
3 Operation
3-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
45Z8003A
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
LOC:
Return time illumin.
[ 003 023 ]
DEV01:
Designat. ext. dev.
[ 210 000 ]
Q0
Remote Locked
LOC:
Return time select.
[ 221 030 ]
LOC:
Display L/R
[ 221 070 ]
LOC:
Displ. interl. stat.
[ 221 071 ]
Fig. 3-3: Bay panel (text display).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-5
3.3.2 Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hol d-ti me for
Panel s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
63Z80CXA
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
m out of n
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
1
R1
S1 1
Operation Panel
LOC:
Autom. return time
[ 003 014 ]
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
C
LOC:
Autom. return time
LOC:
Fig. 3-4: Operation Panel.
P632
3 Operation
3-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.3.3 Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for LOC: Hol d-ti me for Panel s or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
50Z01EJA
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
m out of n
Fault Panel
R
LOC:
[ 031 075 ]
Fig. 3-5: Fault panel.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-7
3.3.4 Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a m out of n parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for LOC: Hol d-ti me for Panel s or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
50Z0140A
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values
m out of n
LOC:
[ 031 075 ]
Overload Panel
R
Fig. 3-6: Overload Panel.
P632
3 Operation
3-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.3.5 Selection of the Control Point
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching
between local and remote control is achieved by an appropriately configured
function key or an external key switch. The position of this external key switch is
checked by an appropriately configured binary signal input (configuration at
MAI N: I np. asg. L/R key sw.).
For more information on the use of a function key as a switch to change over
from local and remote control see Section 3.6, (p. 3-40) and Section 6.9.2,
(p. 6-14).
The setting LOC: Fct. assi gn. L/R key determines whether the switching
using either the function key or the key switch is between local and remote
control (LR) or between local+remote and local control (R&LL).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only
local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
12Z6261A
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
1
2, 3
1
2
3
Local
Remote
Remote & Local
MAIN:
Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
1) Keys, local control
LOC:
Remote&local control
305 560
LOC:
Rem.acc.block.active
[ 221 004 ]
LOC:
Loc.acc.block.active
[ 221 005 ]
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
MAIN:
Local/Remote key
[ 006 004 ]
1)
1
2
LOC:
Fct. assign. L/R key
[ 225 208 ]
1: R <-> L
2: R & L <-> L
S1
R1
1 &
&
&
& 0
&
&
&
Selected signal
Without function
m out of n
Fig. 3-7: Selection of the control point.
3.3.6 Configurable Clear Key
The P632 has a Clear key , to which one or more reset functions can be
assigned by selecting the required functions at LOC: Fct. reset key . Details
on the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.12.16, (p. 3-98).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-9
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P632 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels
depending on the design version. Communication between the P632 and the
control stations computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P632's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.12.17, (p. 3-101)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P632 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes dead. It will only be enabled again when the time-out
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P632, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.12.18, (p. 3-102)).
P632
3 Operation
3-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the P632 and a PC is through the PC interface. In order
for data transfer between the P632 and the PC to function, several settings must
be made in the P632.
There is support software available as an accessory for P632 control.
64Z51ECA
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block.
[ 003 086 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Delta f
[ 003 057 ]
PC:
Delta t
[ 003 058 ]
PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 155 ]
PC:
Time-out
[ 003 188 ]
1
0
PC:
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
Fig. 3-8: PC interface settings
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-11
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
There are several different interface protocols available at the communication
interface 1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use
with the P632:
IEC 608705103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12
(corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, "Protection communication
companion standard 1, compatibility level 2", February 1995 edition) with
additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 8705101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems Part 5: Transmission
protocols Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,"
first edition 199511
ILSC, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P632.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
P632
3 Operation
3-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z51FEA
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
Selected protocol
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
Fig. 3-9: Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-13
COMM1:
[ 003 179 ]
64Z70FFA
COMM1:
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Contin. general scan
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
Dead time monitoring
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Name of manufacturer
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 177 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
1: Yes
0: No
0
1
C
C
C
C
1: Yes
0: No
0
1
COMM1:
-103 prot. variant
[ 003 178 ]
Fig. 3-10: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 608705-103 interface protocol.
P632
3 Operation
3-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z51FGA
Commun. interface
COMM1:
[ 037 075 ]
1
0
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-101
[ 003 218 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Comm. address length
[ 003 201 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 200 ]
COMM1:
Cause transm. length
[ 003 192 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
Address length ASDU
[ 003 193 ]
COMM1:
Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 194 ]
COMM1:
Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 196 ]
COMM1:
Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 197 ]
COMM1:
Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 195 ]
COMM1:
Time tag length
[ 003 198 ]
COMM1:
ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 190 ]
COMM1:
ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 191 ]
COMM1:
Initializ. signal
[ 003 199 ]
COMM1:
Direction bit
[ 003 227 ]
COMM1:
Balanced operation
[ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Time-out interval
[ 003 228 ]
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-15
64Z51FHA
Commun. interface
COMM1:
[ 037 075 ]
1
0
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5,ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 074 ]
COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 175 ]
COMM1:
Delta V
[ 003 050 ]
COMM1:
Delta I
[ 003 051 ]
COMM1:
Delta f
[ 003 052 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 150 ]
COMM1:
Delta t
[ 003 053 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 161 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 177 ]
COMM1:
Octet address ASDU
[ 003 073 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 179 ]
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
P632
3 Operation
3-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z50FJB
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 210 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 211 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 212 ]
COMM1:
Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 213 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 152 ]
COMM1:
Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant
[ 003 214 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Fig. 3-13: Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-17
64Z50AZA
COMM1:
Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 244 ]
COMM1:
Link Max. Retries
[ 003 245 ]
COMM1:
Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 246 ]
COMM1:
Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 247 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 232 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 233 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 235 ]
COMM1:
Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 236 ]
COMM1:
Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
[ 003 250 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (DNP3)
[ 003 248 ]
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
[ 003 240 ]
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay
[ 003 241 ]
COMM1:
Phys. Char. Timeout
[ 003 242 ]
COMM1:
Link Confirm. Mode
[ 003 243 ]
COMM1:
DNP3
[ 003 230 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Fig. 3-14: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
P632
3 Operation
3-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z51BAA
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
Commun. interface
COMM1:
Test monitor on
[ 003 166 ]
COMM1:
Command selection
[ 103 042 ]
COMM1:
Signal selection
[ 103 043 ]
COMM1:
Meas. val. selection
[ 103 044 ]
COMM1:
Parameter selection
[ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
Delta t (COURIER)
[ 103 046 ]
COMM1:
Line idle state
[ 003 165 ]
COMM1:
Baud rate
[ 003 071 ]
COMM1:
Parity bit
[ 003 171 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 176 ]
COMM1:
Mon. time polling
[ 003 202 ]
COMM1:
Octet comm. address
[ 003 072 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER
[ 103 041 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
Fig. 3-15: Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-19
3.4.2.1 COMM1 Checking Spontaneous Signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 608705103, IEC 8705101, or ILS-C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered using setting
parameters.
48Z50FKA
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
Selected signals
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
1: execute
0: don't execute
0
1
1: execute
0: don't execute
0
1
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
Fig. 3-16: COMM1 Checking spontaneous signals.
3.4.2.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals
When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 608705103 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV)
from the control part.
The following parameters are available:
(221 105) COMM1: Sel . pos. dev. test
Selection possibilities:
Not assigned
DEV01 ... DEV03

(221 106) COMM1: Test posi ti on dev.
Selection possibilities:
don't execute
execute open
execute close
execute intermed.
P632
3 Operation
3-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 608705103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P632.
64Z5189A
Commun. interface
1
0
COMM2:
General enable USER
[ 103 170 ]
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
COMM2:
[ 103 076 ]
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 179 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 074 ]
COMM2:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
Delta f
[ 103 052 ]
COMM2:
[ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
Delta t
[ 103 053 ]
Fig. 3-17: Settings for communication interface 2.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-21
3.4.3.1 COMM2 Checking Spontaneous Signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
48Z50FLA
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
Selected signals
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
1: execute
0: don't execute
0
1
1: execute
0: don't execute
0
1
COMM2:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
[ --- --- ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
[ --- --- ]
Fig. 3-18: COMM2 Checking spontaneous signals.
P632
3 Operation
3-22 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.4 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE
and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups
and the Ethernet module.
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.4.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
The P632 offers as an ordering option a communication protocol according to the
Ethernet based IEC 61850 protocol.
3.4.4.1.1 IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P632:
ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description
Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available
from the P632, that are to be imported into the configuration tool IED
Configurator or into a system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an

overview of available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview

of available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of

parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used
by the P632 with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-23
3.4.4.1.2 Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic
interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of
the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by
setting the parameter [I C]: Medi a.
Setting parameters identified by [I C]: in the IEC function group are set with the
IED Configurator. They cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or
with the operating program.
There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST
connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant
ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector
supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for
remote access with the MiCOM S1 support software (function group COMM2).
The P632 may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
3.4.4.1.3 Activating and Enabling
The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter
I EC: Functi on group I EC . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P632. After activation of IEC, all
data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state
signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting I EC: General enabl e
USER .
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related
function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the P632. The
P632 features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-
related extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are
loaded into the P632 by downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication
parameters are activated by executing the command I EC: Swi tch Confi g.
Bank . This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
P632
3 Operation
3-24 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
.scd
.icd
.mcl .x3v
IED Configurator
.iid
IED Configurator
PACiS SCE
19Z7001C
System configurator
Operating program
Fig. 3-19: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-25
IED
Processor module
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
New approach to IED parameter management
Control PC
Parameter download
Parameter upload
Operating program
IED
Configurator
Device
parameters
Ethernet module
IEC 61850
parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the
device parameters
Parameter
switch
IEC 61850
parameter
19Z7002B
Fig. 3-20: Saving configuration parameters.
3.4.4.1.4 Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the Abstract Communication Service Interface (ACSI, IEC 6187072),
are assigned to the devices. A server is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
information, for instance reports. In its function as server the P632 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.4.4.1.5 Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P632 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P632 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
P632
3 Operation
3-26 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.4.1.6 Generating Datasets, Reporting
The specific project related feature of the P632s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority
transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as
to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.
The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is
determined by the application; merely the maximum size of a dataset to be
transmitted by GOOSE (see next section) is limited to 1500 bytes. Data objects
provided by the P632 are available for selection with a structure as specified by
IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of information the invalid
bit and the test bit are served according to the P632s state; the other attributes
are not set. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED Configurator.
Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The knowledge of dataset
content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals. Configuration
files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects
included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see following section)
datasets are used mainly for reporting. The P632 provides up to sixteen
unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of
clients logged-on. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report
Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA
to brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost
during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a
buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A
pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine
which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets
is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in
GOOSEs.
The P632 can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. 8 clients, and
one buffered report can be allocated to max. 4 clients. A client is then able to
activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his
requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into
account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the P632.
3.4.4.1.7 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P632 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting I EC: Si gGGI O1 sel ecti on . The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the m
out of n selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.4.4.1.8 Single Commands
Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P632 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P632. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-27
3.4.4.1.9 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units
Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible
with a special configuration software, the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear units can be carried out from all clients that have
previously logged on to the P632. Only one control command is executed at a
time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of
such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [I C]: ctl Model
are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually
set for each switchgear device:
Status only
Direct control with enhanced security
SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is
selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this
selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by
other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by
the client the P632 resets this selection after a settable timeout period [I C]:
sboTi meout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details
see description of function group GOOSE.
The switchgear devices contact positions are signaled to the clients with the
reports.
3.4.4.1.10 Originator Category
The Originator is an information type defined by IEC 61850, which is sent with
switch commands and position signals of switchgear units. This kind of data
consists of two information items:
Originator Identification: This is text describing the originator of the switch
command. (If unknown, then an empty text string is sent.)
Originator Category: This is the originator of the command according to a
list of standardized categories.
The range of values of the Originator Category, as listed in the following table, is
supported.
P632
3 Operation
3-28 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Originator
category
Originator
Identification
Use Case / Comment
1 remote-control See note [1]
(at the end of
this table).
The control command is sent by an operator at station level.
2 automatic-remote See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
station level.
3 station-control See note [1]. The control command is sent by an operator at network
level.
4 automatic-station See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
network level.
5 bay-control Local HMI
Control
The control command is generated at the local HMI of the
P632.
6 bay-control Local EXT
Control
The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
(221 061) MAI N: El ectri cal control = Local
and any of the following input signals:
DEVxx: I np. asg. el . ctrl . open
DEVxx: I np. asg. el . ctr. cl ose.
7 remote-control Remote EXT
Control
The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
(221 061) MAI N: El ectri cal control = Remote
and any of the following input signals:
DEVxx: I np. asg. el . ctrl . open
DEVxx: I np. asg. el . ctr. cl ose.
8 process Spontaneous
Process Event
A trip or close command which is generated by a protection
function.
9 process Spontaneous
Process Event
There is a spontaneous position change of the switchgear
device.
Possible causes:
A manual switch command
The operation of another protection and control device
Further possible causes:
Loss of supply voltage of electrical input signals
Faulty wiring
Faulty switchgear device
(However, this usually results in an intermediate position 00
or 11 of the switchgear device.)
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-29
Originator
category
Originator
Identification
Use Case / Comment
10 process IED Restart Power-up or restart of the P632, intentionally or
spontaneously. Possible causes:
Loss of the auxiliary supply voltage of the P632
Commissioning activities
Operation of self-monitoring of the P632
11 maintenance Test Mode
Operation
The P632 is in test mode.
The test mode can be activated either by setting parameter
(003 012) MAI N: Test mode USER
or by the binary signal
(037 070) MAI N: Test mode EXT
(See also note [2].)
[1]: The P632 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into
the information report.
[2]: External binary signals can be received via various interfaces:
Opto-coupler inputs
InterMiCOM protection communication
GOOSE or GSSE substation communication
Assignment of LOGIC outputs
The P632 does never send the Originator Category automatic-bay.
P632
3 Operation
3-30 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
UC 1,2
UC 3,4
UC 7
UC 6, 7 UC 5
UC 9
Network
HMI
Station
HMI
Gateway
Circuit
breaker
UC 10, 11
UC 7
Binary signal
Communication link
Internal interface
UC 8
12Z7312A_EN
t
I
Trip/close by external
protection or control
Fig. 3-21: Use cases in the network context. The UC numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-31
3.4.4.1.11 Fault Transmission
Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per File Transfer. COMTRADE fault files
in the P632 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.4.4.1.12 High Priority Transmission of Information
Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP
level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at
Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received
by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or
client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of
information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example,
are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The standard IEC 61850 provides two modes for high priority transmission of
information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE ) is
used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and
it is compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats
available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values, two-pole
contact position signals or analog measured values. The P632 supports receipt
and evaluation of GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact
position signals from external devices.
3.4.4.1.13 Communication with the MiCOM S1 Support Software via the Ethernet Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on
the P632 may occur through the tunneling principle. Transmission is carried
out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the
associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such
transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is
used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions
offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting
parameters or retrieving stored data.
P632
3 Operation
3-32 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.4.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a
local network, the P632 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of
information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P632 is connected.
3.4.4.2.1 Configuration and Enabling
Function group GOOSE can be configured by setting the parameter
GOOSE: Functi on group GOOSE This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P632. After having configured the
GOOSE all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and
ready to be configured.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI)
or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GOOSE: General
enabl e USER .
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-33
Device A Device B
GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32
S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
System/LLN0/Dataset
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32
IEC 61850
Mapping
MCL
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
System/DevGosGGIO3
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
System/GosGGIO1
Ext.Dev 1 32
S1 Studio
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32
S1 Studio
19Z7003A
IED Configurator
IED Configurator IED Configurator
IED Configurator
Fixed assignment
x
Fig. 3-22: GOOSE configuration.
3.4.4.2.2 Sending GOOSE
The GOOSE can send up to eight different GOOSE messages which are managed
in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on
the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P632 to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting.
Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting
GOOSE: Output 1 fct. assi g.. (or Output 2, ..., Output 32). The data object
indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the
GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then
be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
P632
3 Operation
3-34 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [I C]: I ncrement. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [I C]: Maxi mum Cycl e Ti me,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [I C]: Mul ti cast MAC Address, [I C]: Appl i cati on I D (hex),
[I C]: VLAN I denti fi er (hex), [I C]: VLAN Pri ori ty and
[I C]: GOOSE I denti fi er must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [I C]: Dataset Reference and
[I C]: Confi gurati on Revi si on.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.4.4.2.3 Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[I C]: Mul ti cast MAC Address, [I C]: Appl i cati on I D (hex),
[I C]: Source Path, [I C]: GOOSE I denti fi er and [I C]: DataSet Reference.
With the further setting of [I C]: Data Obj I ndex / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [I C]: Confi gurati on Revi si on
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function"
(virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an
existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data
input.
Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then
this can be evaluated. When activating [I C]: Qual i ty Obj I ndex the distance
of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well
as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the
bits ([I C]: I nval i di ty Qual i ty bi ts, see displayed bar with bit state) is received
as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and
are accepted from there during an import action.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[I C]: Defaul t I nput Val ue. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE: I nput 1 fct. assi g.
(or Input 2, , Input 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary
signal inputs (optocoupler inputs). Contact position signals received from
external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for
interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design
a decentralized substation interlock.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-35
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input
to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are
deleted.
3.4.4.2.4 Uniqueness of Control within a System
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (uniqueness) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P632 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information stored in a dataset is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P632 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
S1 Studio
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
Ind1.stVal ... Ind32.stVal
System/OrdRunGGIO1
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
Device A
Device B
19Z7004A
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
IED Configurator
MCL
Fig. 3-23: Uniqueness of Control.
P632
3 Operation
3-36 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.4.4.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent
electronic devices) in a local network, the P632 provides, as an additional
functionality, the GSSE function group (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the
IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic
binary state signals such as reverse interlocking, trip commands, blocking,
enabling and other signals.
3.4.4.3.1 Configuration and Enabling
Function Group GSSE can be configured by setting the parameter
GSSE: Functi on group GSSE . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P632. After configuration of
GSSE, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters,
binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or
disabled by setting GSSE: General enabl e USER .
The setting parameters for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the P632 are
not automatically activated. The P632 features two memory banks one of
which includes the active setting parameters. The other memory bank is used
with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and
the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850
parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P632 by downloading
a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing
the command I EC: Swi tch Confi g. Bank . This command may also be issued
from the IED Configurator.
3.4.4.3.2 Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary
state signals is made by setting GSSE: Output 1 fct. assi g. (or Output 2, ,
Output 32). Each selected state signal is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE
(GSSE: Output 1 bi t pai r (or Output 2, , Output 32)), which will transmit
this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal.
There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send
repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter GSSE: Mi n.
cycl e The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional
equation with the increment set with the parameter GSSE: I ncrement . Should
no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has
elapsed (GSSE: Max. cycl e ), then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as
set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used
which was set in function group IEC.
3.4.4.3.3 Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of
the logic binary state signals received (GOOSE: I nput 1 fct. assi g. , or
Input 2, , Input 32) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary
inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the
required information, must be selected by setting the IED name (e.g.
GSSE: I nput 1 I ED name ). Selection of information wanted from the selected
GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (e.g. GSSE: I nput 1 bi t pai r ).
Each GSSE includes time information on the validity duration of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-37
validity duration has elapsed without this GSSE being received again (i.e.
because of a communications fault), the signals received will automatically be
set to their respective default value (e.g. GSSE: I nput 1 defaul t ).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
P632
3 Operation
3-38 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal
clock of the P632 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional
IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on
the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at
the P632, the P632 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface
The IRIGB interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P632 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P632. If
the P632 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
47Z02BAA
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
Fig. 3-24: IRIGB interface.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-39
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P632 provides six freely configurable function keys. A password may be
configured for each function key (e.g. for F1 at F_KEY: Password funct. key
1), and if a password has been configured then the respective function key will
only be enabled when the configured password is entered.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in Fig. 3-25, (p. 3-41).
After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F_KEY: Return ti me fct. keys. Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function
keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the function Local/Remote switching has
been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function keys with a single function
One function may be assigned to each function key (e.g. for F1) at F_KEY: Fct.
assi gnm. F1 or by selecting a logic state signal (except LOC: Tri g. menu
j mp 1 EXT and LOC: Tri g. menu j mp 2 EXT). The assigned function is
triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P632.
Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu
jump lists assigned (e.g. for F1) at F_KEY: Fct. assi gnm. F1 by selecting the
listing at LOC: Tri g. menu j mp 1 EXT or LOC: Tri g. menu j mp 2 EXT. The
functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at LOC: Fct. menu j mp l i st 1 or
LOC: Fct. menu j mp l i st 2. Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters,
event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
Configuration of the READ key
As with LOC: Fct. menu j mp l i st 1 or LOC: Fct. menu j mp l i st 2 up to 16
functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at LOC: Fct.
read key . They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the READ
key.
Configuring function keys as control keys
Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the
functions at (e.g. for F1) F_KEY: Fct. assi gnm. F1 :
MAI N: Local /Remote key (060 004)
MAI N: Devi ce sel ecti on key (060 001)
MAI N: Devi ce OPEN key (060 002)
MAI N: Devi ce CLOSE key (060 003)
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above
commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function
keys.
P632
3 Operation
3-40 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Operating mode of the function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected (e.g. for F1) at
F_KEY: Operati ng mode F1 . Here it is possible to select whether the function
key operates as a key or as a switch. In the Key operating mode the selected
function is active while the function key is pressed. In the Switch operating mode
the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is
irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
40Z5003A
Activate function
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
2
1
1: Key
2: Switch
Selected function
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1)
1
&
& &
&
F_KEY:
State F1
[ 080 122 ]
S1
R1
1
0
&
Keys, local control 1)
Fig. 3-25: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-41
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs
(Function Group INP)
The P632 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
substation. The functions that will be activated in the P632 by triggering these
binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
In order to ensure that during normal operation the P632 will recognize an input
signal, it must persist for at least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general
starting this time period may have to be increased to 40 ms under unfavorable
conditions.
Configuring the Binary Inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The
same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization
commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O
module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
In this technical manual, it is assumed that the required functions (marked EXT
in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by
configuration.
Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can
specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low"
mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal. The display of the
state of a binary signal input "low" or "high" is independent of the setting for
the operating mode of the signal input.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter I NP: Fi l ter .
P632
3 Operation
3-42 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12Z6213A
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
&
&
Selected function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
&
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
Input signal
0
1
2
3
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Activate function
-Uxxx
INP:
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
&
&
&
INP:
State U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
Fig. 3-26: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-43
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
There is a second optional analog module available for the P632. In addition to
the analog (I/O) module Y with analog inputs and outputs there is now a second
analog module obtainable, the temperature p/c board (also called the RTD
module).
When the P632 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog
inputs available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P632
through the 20 mA analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for
connection of a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P632 has 9 analog
inputs available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. These analog inputs
are designed for connection of PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance
thermometers.
The input current I
DC
present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a
measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring
purposes (I
DC,lin
) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds (see Limit Value Monitoring).
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values
and monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they
exceed or fall below set thresholds (see Limit Value Monitoring).
All measured variables are also forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection
function. With this protection it is possible to set whether the PT 100 resistance
thermometer, the 20 mA analog input or if configured one of the temperature
sensors T1 to T9 is to be used for the thermal replica (see Thermal Overload
Protection).
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function
The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
S8Z52H1A
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
Fig. 3-27: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function.
P632
3 Operation
3-44 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.8.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA
that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the
temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged,
provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for
certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to
monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair MEASI : I DC 1 and MEASI : I DC, l i n 1 , the user
specifies which input current I
DC
will correspond to the current that is monitored
by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., I
DC,lin
. (These two setting parameters
refer to value pair number 1; setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are
available, too.)
The resulting points, called interpolation points, are connected by straight lines
in an I
DC
I
DC,lin
diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is
sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting
values (see Fig. 3-28, (p. 3-45)). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising
or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting
differs, the signal SFMON: I nval i d scal i ng I DC will be generated.
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1
1.1
1.2
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6
19Z5266A_EN
I
DC,lin DC,nom
/ I
I
DC,lin20
I
DC,lin1
I
DC1
I
DC20
I
DC DC,nom
/ I
Fig. 3-28: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-45
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC / IDC,nom
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
D5Z52KEC_EN
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20
IDC,lin1
IDC,lin2
IDC,lin3
IDC,lin4
IDC,lin20
Enable IDC p.u.
Interpolation points
Fig. 3-29: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 I
DC,nom
is shown as a broken line).
P632
3 Operation
3-46 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
S8Z52H2A
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
Input channel 1(I-1)
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
IDC 1
[ 037 150 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 1
[037 151 ]
MEASI:
IDC 2
[ 037 152 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 2
[ 037 153 ]
MEASI:
IDC 3
[ 037 154 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 3
[ 037 155 ]
MEASI:
IDC 4
[ 037 156 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 4
[ 037 157 ]
MEASI:
IDC 5
[ 037 158 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 5
[ 037 159 ]
MEASI:
IDC 6
[ 037 160 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 6
[ 037 161 ]
MEASI:
IDC 7
[ 037 162 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 7
[ 037 163 ]
MEASI:
IDC 15
[ 037 178 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 15
[037 179 ]
MEASI:
IDC 16
[ 037 180 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 16
[ 037 181 ]
MEASI:
IDC 17
[ 037 182 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 17
[ 037 183 ]
MEASI:
IDC 18
[ 037 184 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 18
[ 037 185 ]
MEASI:
IDC 19
[ 037 186 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 19
[ 037 187 ]
MEASI:
IDC 20
[ 037 188 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 20
[ 037 189 ]
MEASI:
Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 190 ]
MEASI:
IDC< open circuit
[ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
IDC 8
[ 037 164 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 8
[037 165 ]
MEASI:
IDC 9
[ 037 166 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 9
[ 037 167 ]
MEASI:
IDC 10
[ 037 168 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 10
[ 037 169 ]
MEASI:
IDC 11
[ 037 170 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 11
[ 037 171 ]
MEASI:
IDC 12
[ 037 172 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 12
[ 037 173 ]
MEASI:
IDC 13
[ 037 174 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 13
[ 037 175 ]
MEASI:
IDC 14
[ 037 176 ]
MEASI:
IDC,lin 14
[ 037 177 ]
Fig. 3-30: Analog direct current input.
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-47
Q9Z5029A
MEASI:
Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 180 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
Fig. 3-31: Scaling of the linearized measured value.
3.8.1.1 Zero Suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting MEASI : Enabl e I DC p. u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current I
DC p.u.
and
the current I
DC,lin
will be displayed as having a value of 0.
3.8.1.2 Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring
The P632 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current I
DC
falls
below the set threshold MEASI : I DC< open ci rcui t , the signal MEASI : Open
ci rc. 20mA i np. is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
MEASI : Overl oad 20mA i nput is issued.
3.8.2 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
This input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer. The mapping
curve, R = f(T), of PT 100 resistance thermometers is defined in the IEC 751
standard. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire
method, then no further calibration is required.
Open-Circuit Monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
SFMON: PT100 open ci rcui t is issued.
Maximum Temperature Value Since the Last Reset
The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct
measured value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T),
but also as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax).
For this the following menu points are available:
MEASI : Temperature Tmax (maximum temperature value)
MEASI : Reset Tmax EXT (reset via a binary signal)
MEASI : Reset Tmax USER (manual reset)
P632
3 Operation
3-48 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z70H3A
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
Measur. input PT100
C
+
-
Fig. 3-32: Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-49
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output
Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P632 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configurable by the user.
Configuration of the Output Relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal
can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating Mode of the Output Relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines
whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or
normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode.
Depending on the selected operating mode, latching can be disabled, either
manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input at the start of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general
starting, or of a new system disturbance.
Blocking the Output Relays
The P632 offers the option of blocking all output relays via a setting parameter or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are
likewise blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary
inputs.
In these cases the relays are treated according to their set operating mode, i.e.
relays in a normally open arrangement (NO) are not triggered, whereas relays in
a normally closed arrangement (NC) are triggered.
This does not apply to the relays associated with the signals SFMON: Warni ng
(rel ay) or MAI N: Bl ocked/faul ty . Self-monitoring alarms are thus correctly
indicated.
If the self-monitoring detects a serious hardware fault (see error messages in
Chapter 11, (p. 11-1), which will lead to a blocking of the protection), all
output relays are reset regardless of the set operating mode or signal
configuration.
P632
3 Operation
3-50 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z8038A
OUTP:
Latching reset
[ 040 088 ]
OUTP:
State K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
1
2
3: ES reset (fault)
3
4
5
6
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
-K xxx
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ yyy yyy ]
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
1
100 ms
Selected signal
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
1
S
R
1
1
1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
Fig. 3-33: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays.
Testing the Output Relays
For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via a
setting parameter. Therefore the P632 must be switched to off-line. Triggering
persists for the duration of the set hold time.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-51
47Z1050A
OUTP:
Relay test
[ 003 043 ]
Selected relay
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
OUTP:
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
[ CCC CCC ]
OUTP:
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
-K yyy
0: don't execute
1: execute
1
0
1
Fig. 3-34: Testing the output relays.
P632
3 Operation
3-52 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measurands made available by the P632 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the P632 is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the P632 is equipped with
analog module Y or not.
3.10.1 General Settings
3.10.1.1 Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function
The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
S8Z52H1A
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
Fig. 3-35: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
3.10.1.2 Enabling Measured Data Output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input,
provided that the function MEASO: Outp. enabl ed EXT has been configured.
If the function MEASO: Outp. enabl ed EXT has not been configured to a
binary signal input, then the measured data output is always enabled.
S8Z52H5A
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
036 085
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
MEASO:
Outp. enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
Fig. 3-36: Enabling measured data output.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-53
3.10.1.3 Resetting the Measured Data Output Function
BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output is reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
S8Z52H6A
MEASO:
Output reset
[ 037 117 ]
MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
0
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
1
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MEASO:
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ]
1
Fig. 3-37: Resetting the measured data output function.
3.10.1.4 Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P632 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
P632
3 Operation
3-54 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.10.2 BCD Measured Data Output
The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time MEASO: Hol d ti me output BCD. If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.10.2.1 Output of Measured Event Values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.10.2.2 Output of Measured Operating Values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.10.2.3 Scaling of BCD Output
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the
associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
MEASO: Scal ed mi n. val . BCD
MEASO: Scal ed max. val . BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out mi n. val ue
MEASO: BCD-Out max. val ue
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program under minimum and maximum.)
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-55
Measurands to be output Range
Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data
model
"Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
Measurands BCD display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to
be output"
BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
(Valid BCD value)
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
P632
3 Operation
3-56 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z5264A
++
Scaling of the BCD output
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141
MEASO:
BCD-Out min. value 037 142
MEASO:
BCD-Out max. value 037 143
++
Scaling of the
BCD output
Address
037 120
037 121
037 122
MEASO:
Output value x
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ]
Meas. value 399
Selected meas. val.
Selected meas. val.
Overflow
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD
[ 053 002 ]
MEASO:
Hold time output BCD
[ 010 010 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 054 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 056 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 057 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
MEASO:
Valid BCD value
[ 037 050 ]
Setting blocked
Selected meas. val.
Selected
meas. oper. value
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
Value not measured
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
MEASO:
304 601
x: 1
x: 2
x: 3
0 . . . 100 %
c1
c2
1
2
1 . . . 2
Fig. 3-38: BCD measured data output
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-57
3.10.3 Analog Measured Data Output
Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P632 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a
measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time MEASO: Hol d ti me output A-1. If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.10.3.1 Output of Measured Event Values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.10.3.2 Output of Measured Operating Values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.10.3.3 Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the
output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEASO: Val ue
A-1 output , since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited
(see the terminal connection diagrams at the end of Chapter 5, (p. 5-1)).
3.10.3.4 Scaling the Analog Display
In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional
value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an
analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-
62).
3.10.3.5 Measurand Range to be Output
The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following
parameters:
MEASO: Scal ed mi n. val . A-1 or MEASO: Scal ed mi n. val . A-2,
resp.
MEASO: Scal ed knee val . A-1 or MEASO: Scal ed knee val . A-2,
resp.
MEASO: Scal ed max. val . A-1 or MEASO: Scal ed max. val . A-2,
resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
P632
3 Operation
3-58 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program under minimum and maximum.)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Measurands with knee-point to be output Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be
output
Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
3.10.3.6 Associated Display Range
The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: AnOut mi n. val . A-1 or MEASO: AnOut mi n. val . A-2 ,
resp.
MEASO: AnOut knee poi nt A-1 or MEASO: AnOut knee poi nt A-2,
resp.
MEASO: AnOut max. val . A-1 or MEASO: AnOut max. val . A-2 ,
resp.
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be
output"
"AnOut min. val. A-x" ...
... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x valid)
Measurands:
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
"AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Measurands Mx:
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
"AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-59
3.10.3.7 Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 V
nom
with V
nom
= 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 V
nom
with the associated display
range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 V
nom
with an associated display of
16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx 0 V ... 150 V
Measurands with knee-point to be output 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
Associated scaled measurands 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.67
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be
output"
0.02 ... 0.1 V
nom
... 1 V
nom
4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
In this example the following P632 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
P632
3 Operation
3-60 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Functi on group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enabl e USER Yes
053 000 MEASO: Fct. assi gnm. A-1 MAI N: Vol tage V p. u.
010 114 MEASO: Hol d ti me output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO: Scal ed mi n. val . A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO: Scal ed knee val . A-1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO: Scal ed max. val . A-1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO: AnOut mi n. val . A-1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO: AnOut knee poi nt A-1 16 mA
037 109 MEASO: AnOut max. val . A-1 18 mA
By setting MEASO: AnOut mi n. val . A-1 , the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnOut
max. val . A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: I nval i d scal i ng A-1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P632, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P632 is switched on-line again (with the
setting MAI N: Devi ce on- l i ne ).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-61
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
Ia / mA
Min.
output value
Knee point
output value
Max.
output value
Mx,scal 0.013 0.067 0.667
Vnom
1.0
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-39: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
P632
3 Operation
3-62 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
S8Z52H8B
MEASO:
Output value x
X: 1
X: 2
X: 3
Address
037 120
037 121
037 122
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected meas. val.
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
[ 053 000 ]
MEASO:
Enabled
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
MEASO:
304 601
MEASO:
Hold time output A-1
[ 010 114 ]
Setting(s) blocked
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)
SFMON:
Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
MEASO:
Value A-1 valid
[ 069 014 ]
MEASO:
Current A-1
[ 005 100 ]
Selected
meas. oper. value
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
[ 037 104 ]
MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
MEASO:
Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
[ 037 109 ]
Overflow
Selected meas. val.
Value not measured
Selected meas. val.
Selected meas. val.
Value measured
Value in AnOut range
and in scaled range
Value in AnOut range
but above scaled
range
Value < AnOut range
AnOut min. value
AnOut max. value
AnOut value 1
2
3
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
OUTP:
[ xxx xxx ]
K x1
K x2
K x3
K xx
0...100 %
c1
c2
c3
[ --- --- ]
c
c
c
R
R
1...3
Fig. 3-40: Analog measured data output
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-63
3.10.4 Output of External Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P632 via the communications
interface.
MEASO: Output val ue 1
These external measured values are output by the P632 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
P632
3 Operation
3-64 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
(Function Group LED)
The P632 has 23 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Some of the
LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED
indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either
red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may
not be configured independently).
3.11.1 Configuring the LED Indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color
indications. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or
colors), if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 1 (green) HEALTHY Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the
P632 (supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when
the P632 is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by
pressing the Up and Down keys. (See Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 2 (amber) OUT OF SERVICE Permanently configured with function MAI N: Bl ocked/faul ty .
H 3 (amber) ALARM Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warni ng
(LED) .
H 4 (red) TRIP With the P632 this LED indicator is customarily configured with
function MAI N: Gen. tri p si gnal , but the configuration may
be modified.
H 4 (green) Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely
configurable.
H 5 to H 16 For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
be configured freely and independently.
3.11.2 Layout of the LED Indicators
The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-65
EDIT MODE
HEALTHY
OUT OF SERVICE
ALARM
TRIP
H18
H19
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 3-41: Layout of the LED indicators.
3.11.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be
selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will
operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode,
whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is
disabled either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately
configured binary signal input (see Section 3.12, (p. 3-68)) at the onset of a
new fault, signalized by the onset of a general starting, or of a new system
disturbance, depending on the selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 2=8 possible combinations of
the following components:
flashing / continuous,
energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes:
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous)
and
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
P632
3 Operation
3-66 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
m out of n
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Selected signals
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
R1
S1 1
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
FT_RC:
[ 035 004 ]
&
&
&
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
45Z8000A
LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
-Hxx (red)
&
&
&
&
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
m out of n
LED:
Fct.assig. Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Selected signals
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
R1
S1 1
LED:
State Hxx green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
&
&
-Hxx (green)
7
8
9
10
11
12
! G !
1
Fig. 3-42: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-67
3.12 Main Functions of the P632 (Function Group MAIN)
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Values
The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P632.
Furthermore, there is the option of connecting a measuring voltage. The
measured values are electrically isolated converted to normalized electronics
levels. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further
processing.
The P632 has the following measuring inputs:
Current inputs (three phases) for the processing of measured values for 2
winding ends of the transformer.
Two current inputs for the measurement of the residual currents (see
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70), Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-71)) or, alternatively, for looping into
ground connections of the phase current transformers or for connection to
a Holmgreen group.
One voltage input.
P632
3 Operation
3-68 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z8001A
A
B
C
a
b
1U
2U
1IA
1IB
1IC
1IN
2IA
2IB
2IC
2IN
A B C
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
MAIN:
Inom device, end a
[ 010 024 ]
MAIN:
IY,nom device, end a
[ 010 142 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,a
[ 010 140 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,a
[ 010 141 ]
1: Standard
2: Opposite
(Y = 1)
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Inom device, end b
[ 010 025 ]
MAIN:
IY,nom device, end b
[ 010 143 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,b
[ 010 150 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,b
[ 010 151 ]
1: Standard
2: Opposite
(Y = 1)
(Y = -1)
V
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IY,b
P632
Fig. 3-43: Connection of the measured values to the P632, connection of the fourth current transformer set to the
transformers of the neutral-point-to-ground connections
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-69
62Z8072A
MAIN:
Inom device, end a
[ 010 024 ]
MAIN:
IY,nom device, end a
[ 010 142 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,a
[ 010 140 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,a
[ 010 141 ]
1: Standard
2: Opposite
(Y = 1)
(Y = -1)
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IP,a
1IA
1IB
1IC
1IN
A
B
C
a
b
A B C
Connection, Part 1
Fig. 3-44: Connection of the measured values to the P632, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the
ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 1 of 2
P632
3 Operation
3-70 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Connection, Part 2
a
b
62Z8073A
A B C
2IA
2IB
2IC
2IN
MAIN:
Inom device, end b
[ 010 025 ]
MAIN:
IY,nom device, end b
[ 010 143 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IP,b
[ 010 150 ]
MAIN:
Conn.meas.circ. IY,b
[ 010 151 ]
1: Standard
2: Opposite
(Y = 1)
(Y = -1)
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IP,b
P632
Fig. 3-45: Connection of the measured values to the P632, looping of the fourth current transformer set into the
ground connections of the phase current transformers, Part 2 of 2
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-71
3.12.2 Phase Reversal Function
The phase reversal function is intended to protect machines in pumped storage
power stations that are operated either as motors or as generators, depending
on the demand. In such applications it is common practice to swap two phases in
order to facilitate the pumping operation. Because of this, the P632 phase
reversal function can maintain correct operation of all protection functions even
if phase reversal is carried out within the protected zone.
The processing is done right after A/D conversion, such that the link between
physical transformer input and internal numerical signal will be swapped,
depending on the setting. (The measured values stored in the respective
measured value memories are swapped.) Thus all further processing of
measured values and protection functions remains unchanged.
Phase reversal can be set independently for each transformer end and in each
parameter subset. The parameters are included in function group MAIN because
phase reversal affects not only the differential protection function (DIFF), but also
the negative sequence elements of Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent
protection functions (IDMTx, DTOCx) as well as Current Transformer Supervision
(CTS) and Measuring- Circuit Monitoring (MCM_x) functions.
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 Description Range of Values
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203 MAI N: Phase reversal a PSx
No swap (default)
A-B swapped
B-C swapped
C-A swapped
010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207 MAI N: Phase reversal b PSx
Using parameter subsets readily allows phase reversal to be activated via any
control interface (LOC, PC, COMMx) or via appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
Since the currently active parameter subset is shown on the LC-display and may
be recalled from the recordings, phase reversal information is accessible. There
are however applications where an additional display of a phase reversal may be
useful. Such would be the case when recordings by a P632 are to be compared
with those by other devices not featuring phase reversal (e.g. Backup
overcurrent-time protection device) and without knowledge of the P632 setting
file. For this the following display is used:

Description Range of Values
036 220 MAI N: Phase reversal acti v
No (default)
Yes
Phase reversal is active (Yes) when at least one of the setting parameters in the
active parameter subset has a value other than No swap.
The setting file must be viewed to determine which phases are swapped.
P632
3 Operation
3-72 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
*2
[ *2 ]
0
1
2
3
0: No swap
1: A-B swapped
2: B-C swapped
3: C-A swapped
[ *1 ]
0
1
2
3
0: No swap
1: A-B swapped
2: B-C swapped
3: C-A swapped
62Z8002A
*1
MAIN:
Phase reversal a PSx
010 201
010 200
010 202
010 203
MAIN:
Phase reversal b PSx
010 205
010 204
010 206
010 207
MAIN:
Phase reversal activ
[ 036 220 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
1
Fig. 3-46: Phase reversal function of the P632
3.12.3 Selection of the Residual Current to be Monitored
For protection functions of the P632 monitoring the residual current, the user can
select whether the device is to use the current derived from the three phase
currents or the current measured at the fourth current transformer; see also
Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-73
1
1: Calculated
2: Measured
MAIN:
Evaluation IN, end a
[ 016 096 ]
2
1
1: Calculated
2: Measured
MAIN:
Evaluation IN, end b
[ 016 097 ]
2
1
2
1 2
c1
c2
1
2
1 2
c1
c2
64Z8022A
IN,b
IN,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IY,b
IP,b
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
IP,a
Fig. 3-47: Evaluation of residual current
P632
3 Operation
3-74 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.4 Operating Data Measurement
The P632 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents
and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured
values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be
exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds
are not exceeded, the value Not measured is displayed. The following measured
variables are displayed:
Phase currents of all three phases of both ends of the transformer
Maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
Minimum phase current of each end of the transformer
Delayed and stored maximum phase current of each end of the transformer
Positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of each end of
the transformer
Current I
N
derived by the P632 from the sum of the phase currents for each
end of the transformer
Current I
Y
measured by the P632 at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3)
Voltage
Frequency
Angle between the phase currents for a given end of the transformer
Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the
transformer
Angle between derived IN and the current measured at transformer -Tx4 (x:
1, 2 or 3)
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted if a
general starting state occurs or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware
fault.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-75
3.12.4.1 Measured Current Values
The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P632 and as primary quantities. To allow display
in primary values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer
should be set in the P632.
3.12.4.2 Display of Delayed and Stored Maximum Phase Currents
Delayed Maximum Phase Current
The P632 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the
three phase currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase
current display is an exponential function of the maximum phase current I
P,max
(see upper curve in Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-77)). The time after which the delayed
maximum phase current display will have reached 95 % of maximum phase
current I
P,max
is set at MAI N: Settl . t. I P, max, del.
Stored Maximum Phase Current
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current.
If the value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest
value of the delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display
remains constant until the actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the
value of the stored maximum phase current (see middle curve in Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-
77)). The stored maximum phase current is set to the actual value of the
delayed maximum phase current at MAI N: I P, max p. u. , stored a, using end a
as an example (see lower curve in Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-77)).
P632
3 Operation
3-76 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z8082A
End a
005 111
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a
[ 005 163 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored a
[ 005 160 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
[ 005 111 ]
MAIN:
[ 005 160 ]
MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
005 160
MAIN:
005 163
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a
End b
005 112
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,b p.u.
006 160
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored b
006 163
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay b
Fig. 3-48: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display, shown here for end a
3.12.4.2.1 Measured Operating Data for the Phase Currents
The following diagram shows the measured operating data for the phase
currents, using the transformer end a as an example.
The parameters given apply to transformer end a. The corresponding parameters
of the other transformer ends are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8,
(p. 8-1).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-77
64Z8046A
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Current IA,a p.u.
MAIN:
Current IB,a p.u.
MAIN:
Current IC,a p.u.
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
MAIN:
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay a
MAIN:
Curr. IP,min,a p.u.
MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end a
MAIN:
MAIN:
Current IA,a prim.
MAIN:
Current IB,a prim.
MAIN:
Current IC,a prim.
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max,a prim.
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,delay a
MAIN:
IP,max prim.stored a
MAIN:
Curr. IP,min,a prim.
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IP
[ 011 030 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IA,z
IB,z
IC,z
Imax,z
Imin,z
COMP
c1
c2
c3
c4
c5
1
2
3
4
5
R
Fig. 3-49: Measured operating data for the phase currents, shown here for end a
3.12.4.2.2 Measured Operating Data for the Residual Currents
The following diagram shows the measured operating data for the residual
currents.
The parameters given apply to transformer end a. The corresponding parameters
of transformer end b are given in Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 8-
1).
P632
3 Operation
3-78 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z8047A
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
MAIN:
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IN
[ 011 031 ]
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IY
[ 011 036 ]
c
c
c
c
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Current IN,a p.u.
[ 005 141 ]
MAIN:
Current IN,a prim.
[ 005 121 ]
MAIN:
Current IY,a p.u.
[ 005 151 ]
MAIN:
Current IY,a prim.
[ 005 131 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
[ 019 027 ]
Fig. 3-50: Measured operating data for the residual currents, shown here for end a
3.12.4.3 Positive- and negative-sequence currents
The positive- and negative-sequence current measured values of all ends
(primary and per unit values) are determined continuously and displayed as
measured operating data:
End a End b
MAI N: Current I neg a pri m.
(005 125)
MAI N: Current I neg b pri m.
(005 129)
MAI N: Current I pos a pri m.
(005 127)
MAI N: Current I pos b pri m.
(005 134)
MAI N: Current I neg a p. u.
(005 126)
MAI N: Current I neg b p. u.
(005 130)
MAI N: Current I pos a p. u.
(005 128)
MAI N: Current I pos b p. u.
(005 135)
When the CB's contacts are open, it is also possible to force to zero the setting of
small positive- and negative-sequence current measured values if such
measured values are below additionally created settable thresholds.
Measured value relating to positive-
sequence current
MAI N: Meas. val ue rel . I pos
(011 058)
Measured value relating to negative-
sequence current
MAI N: Meas. val ue rel . I neg
(011 048)
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-79
3.12.4.4 Measured Voltage Values
The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P632 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P632.
64Z8003A
MAIN:
Voltage V p.u.
[ 005 019 ]
MAIN:
Voltage V prim.
[ 005 018 ]
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. V
[ 011 032 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
V
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
c
c
Fig. 3-51: Measured voltage value
3.12.4.5 Frequency
The P632 determines the frequency from the voltage. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 V
nom
in order for frequency to be
determined.
64Z8027A
MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
V
>0.65Vnom
c
c
f
Fig. 3-52: Frequency measurement.
P632
3 Operation
3-80 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.4.6 Angle Determination
The P632 determines the angle between the following currents if the associated
currents exceed the minimum threshold of 0.033 I
nom
:
Angle between the phase currents for each end of the transformer
Angle between the currents of the same phase between two ends of the
transformer
Angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at
the transformer -Tx4 (see Section 5.7, (p. 5-18)) for each end of the
transformer
62Z8049A
MAIN:
Angle phi AB, end a
End a End b
[ 005 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi AB, end a
[ 005 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi BC, end a
[ 006 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi CA, end a
[ 007 089 ]
IA,z
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IB,z
IC,z
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
MAIN:
Angle phi AB, end b
[ 005 092 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi BC, end a
[ 006 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi BC, end b
[ 006 092 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi CA, end a
[ 007 089 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi CA, end b
[ 007 092 ]
Fig. 3-53: Determination of the angle between the phase currents, shown here for end a
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-81
62Z8050A
MAIN:
Angle phi A, end a-b
[ 005 090 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi B, end a-b
[ 006 090 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi C, end a-b
[ 007 090 ]
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
IA,a
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
IB,a
IC,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
Fig. 3-54: Determination of the angle between the phase currents of the transformer ends
P632
3 Operation
3-82 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z8051A
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IY,b
MAIN:
Angle phi NY, end a
[ 005 077 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi NY, end b
[ 005 078 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
IP,a
IP,b
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
> 0.033Inom
c
c
Fig. 3-55: Determination of the angle between the derived residual current and the current measured at
transformer -Tx4
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-83
3.12.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions
The P632 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system
by configuring the available function range. By including the desired P632
functions in the configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an
individually configured device appropriate to the specific application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on
the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data
recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
3.12.5.1 Canceling a Device Function
The following conditions must be met before a P632 function can be cancelled or
removed:
The P632 function must be disabled.
None of the functions of the P632 function to be cancelled can be assigned
to a binary input.
None of the signals of the P632 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
None of the functions of the P632 function to be cancelled may be selected
in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the Configuration branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P632 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the LIMIT function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MI T: Functi on group LI MI T is set to Without. To re-include the
LIMIT function in the P632 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P632 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT). In the following
description of the P632 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P632
function is included in the configuration.
3.12.5.2 Enabling or Disabling a Device Function
Besides cancelling P632 functions from the configuration, it is also possible to
disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection
can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the
MAI N: Di sabl e protect. EXT and MAI N: Enabl e protect. EXT functions
are both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured,
the condition is interpreted as Protection externally enabled. If the triggering
signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible i.e. both are at logic level =
1 then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
MAI N: Di sabl e protect. EXT, the signal MAI N: Bl ocked/ f aul ty is not issued.
P632
3 Operation
3-84 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
Address
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address
003 027
003 026
D5Z5004A
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0
1
1: Yes (= on)
0: No (= off)
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Prot. ext. enabled
[ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
Fig. 3-56: Enabling or disabling a device function.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-85
3.12.6 Activation of Dynamic Parameters
For several of the protection functions, it is possible for the duration of the set
hold time to switch over to other settings the dynamic parameters via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s,
switching is effective as long as the binary signal input is being triggered.
64Z8005A
MAIN:
Dynam. param. active
[ 040 090 ]
MAIN:
Switch dyn.param.EXT
[ 036 033 ]
MAIN:
Hold time dyn.param.
[ 018 009 ]
t1 = 0 s
1
&
Fig. 3-57: Activation of Dynamic Parameters.
3.12.7 Function Blockings
By including function blockings in the bay interlock conditions, switching
operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for
example, by an external signal CB drive not ready or by the trip command from
an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or
output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the
function blockings 1 and 2 by setting a 1 out of n parameter. The input signal
from the function blockings starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the
signal MAI N: Fct. bl ock. 1 acti ve or MAI N: Fct. bl ock. 2 acti ve is issued.
P632
3 Operation
3-86 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.1
[ 221 014 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.2
[ 221 022 ]
MAIN:
Op. delay fct. block
[ 221 029 ]
MAIN:
[ 221 023 ]
F0Z5016A
Fig. 3-58: Function blockings
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-87
3.12.8 Multiple Blocking
Four multiple blocking conditions can be defined via m out of n parameters.
The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
64Z8041A
MAIN:
Blck.3 sel.functions
306 046
MAIN:
306 047
MAIN:
306 022
MAIN:
306 023
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
m out of n
MAIN:
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
m out of n
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
MAIN:
[ 021 048 ]
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
m out of n
MAIN:
Blocking 3 EXT
[ 040 116 ]
MAIN:
[ 021 049 ]
Function 1
Function 2
Function 3
Selected functions
m out of n
MAIN:
Blocking 4 EXT
[ 040 117 ]
Fig. 3-59: Multiple blocking.
P632
3 Operation
3-88 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.9 Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous
illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MAI N: Bl ocked/faul ty . In addition
functions can be selected that will issue the MAI N: Bl ocked/faul ty signal by
setting a m out of n parameter.
D5Z50EHA
m out of n
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
MAIN:
Protect. not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
Blocked/faulty
[ 004 065 ]
SFMON:
Blocking
304 951
Fig. 3-60: Blocked/Faulty signal.
3.12.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that
represents the circuit breaker. For the P632, 2 circuit breakers are available. CB1
is used as an example in the following description.
Coupling between control and protection for the Closed position signal is made
by the setting at MAI N: Si g. asg. CB1 cl osed. In the same way coupling
between control and protection for the Open position signal is made by the
setting at MAI N: Si g. asg. CB1 open . As a result, the CB status signal needs
to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-89
64Z7032A
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
DEV03:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 131 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV02:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB1 closed
[ 021 020 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
Fig. 3-61: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal
64Z7035A
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
DEV03:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 130 ]
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
DEV02:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 080 ]
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB1 open
[ 021 017 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
Fig. 3-62: Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal
P632
3 Operation
3-90 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.11 Multiple Signaling
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function
using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple
signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment
with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal
are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
General reset
Latching reset
LED indicators reset
A command received through the communication interface.
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal
will follow the updated signal.
12Z62FMA
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 1
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 2
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
OUTP:
Reset latching
402 102
R 1
S 11
R 1
S 11
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 2 stored
[ 221 055 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 stored
[ 221 054 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ]
Selected signal
Fig. 3-63: Multiple signaling.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-91
3.12.12 Multiple Signaling of the Measuring Circuit Monitoring Function
Signals issued by the measuring circuit monitoring (MCMON) function are
combined to one signal in function group MAIN.
62Z5185A
MAIN:
Meas. circ.I faulty
[ 036 155 ]
MCM_1:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 036 198 ]
SFMON:
[ 091 018 ]
MCM_2:
[ 036 199 ]
Fig. 3-64: Signals issued by measuring circuit monitoring
3.12.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
3.12.13.1 Tripping Signals for Autotransformers
The following tripping signals are available for applications with
autotransformers:
MAI N: Tri p si g. REF1 & REF2 036 174
3.12.13.2 Starting Signals
The trip signals of differential protection and ground differential protection plus
the general starting signals of the definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent
protection functions are combined into one common general starting signal.
62Z6002A
DIFF:
Starting
[ 041 106 ]
DTOC1:
General starting
[ 035 128 ]
DTOC2:
General starting
[ 035 234 ]
IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT2:
General starting
[ 038 135 ]
REF_1:
Trip signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_2:
Trip signal
[ 041 016 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
Fig. 3-65: General starting of the P632
3.12.13.3 Counter of Starting Signals
The general starting signals are counted. The counter can be reset individually.
P632
3 Operation
3-92 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q6Z0143A
MAIN:
No. general start.
[ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
R
Fig. 3-66: Counter for general starting signals
3.12.13.4 Trip Command
The P632 has four trip commands. The functions to effect a trip can be selected
by setting an m out of n parameter independently for each of the four trip
commands. The minimum trip command time may be set. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
The following diagram shows the configuration of the trip commands, using the
trip command 1 as an example. The parameters given apply to trip command 1.
The corresponding parameters of the other trip commands are given in
Chapter 7, (p. 7-1) and Chapter 8, (p. 8-1).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-93
64Z5044A
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 036 251 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
MAIN:
Latching trip cmd. 1
[ 021 023 ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
1
0
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
1
0
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
[ 021 003 ]
m out of n
Selected signals
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
Fig. 3-67: Forming the trip commands
3.12.13.5 Manual Trip Command
A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included
in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
3.12.13.6 Latching of the Trip Commands
For each of the four trip commands, the user can specify by way of the
appropriate setting whether it will operate in latching mode. The trip command,
set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameters or reset through
an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P632
3 Operation
3-94 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.13.7 Blocking of the Trip Commands
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all four trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED
indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay
configured to Blocked/Faulty. (To identify H 2, see the dimensional drawings in
the Chapter 4, (p. 4-1).)
3.12.13.8 Counter of Trip Commands
The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either
individually or as a group.
Q6Z0145A
MAIN:
No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 004 006 ]
MAIN:
[ 009 050 ]
MAIN:
[ 009 056 ]
MAIN:
[ 009 057 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 3
[ 036 113 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 4
[ 036 114 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
0: don't execute
1
1: execute
R
R
R
R
Fig. 3-68: Counter of trip commands
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-95
3.12.14 Communication Error
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted,
the signal Communication error will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.
19Z5070A
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140
COMM1:
Communication error
304 422
Fig. 3-69: Communication Error.
3.12.15 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P632.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P632 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
Q6Z0152B
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
Setting
0: Standard time
1: Daylight saving time
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
Fig. 3-70: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
3.12.15.1 Priority Control of Time Synchronization
The protection device provides several ways of synchronizing the internal clock:
P632
3 Operation
3-96 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
Impulse every minute via a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-
96) and the preceding section.
A primary and a backup source for time of day synchronization may be set,
where both provide the four options listed above.
MAI N: Pri m. Source Ti meSync
MAI N: BackupSourceTi meSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at MAI N: Ti me sync. ti me-out .
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP 2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-97
3.12.16 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given
that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the Clear key located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at LOC: Fct. reset key
further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when
the Clear key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_RC: Reset record. USER and set to execute, see also the exact
step-by-step description in Section 6.12.7, (p. 6-33).)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC: Reset record. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
MAI N: Group reset 1 USER (or MAI N: Group reset 2 USER ) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MAI N: Fct. assi gn. reset 1 (or
MAI N: Fct. assi gn. reset 2 , resp.)
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(That is assign parameter MAI N: Group reset 1 EXT (or MAI N: Group
reset 2 EXT ) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP: Fct. assignm. U
xxx after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAI N: Fct. assi gn. reset 1 (or MAI N: Fct. assi gn. reset 2 ).
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAI N: General
reset USER ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(MAI N: General reset EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal
battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P632
3 Operation
3-98 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12Z6115A
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
1
Fig. 3-71: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
&
MAIN:
Group reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
1
m out of n
LOC:
Fct. reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 1
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER
[ * ]
LOC:
Reset key active
310 024
&
1
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
12Z61RMB
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
&
1
m out of n
MAIN:
Fct.assign. reset 2
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 USER
[ * ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
[ * ]
Fig. 3-72: CLEAR key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal OP_RC: Reset record. EXT .
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-99) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAI N: Fct. assi gn. reset 1
in the file P632650_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-99
3.12.16.1 Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a configurable key.
One can include the relevant resetting action in the configuration of the
READ ( ) key (through LOC: Fct. read key ).
P632
3 Operation
3-100 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.12.17 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical
Communications Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up
to two communications channels available (see Chapter Technical Data). These
physical communications channels may be assigned to communications
interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P632 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes dead. It will only be enabled again when the "time-out"
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
45Z5171A
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
2
1
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
"Logical"
Communic. interface
Communic. interface
Comm. interface
COMM1
COMM2
Channel 1
Comm. interface
Channel 2
Fig. 3-73: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-101
3.12.18 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P632, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
D5Z50EBA
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
0: No
0
1
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
1: Yes
Fig. 3-74: Setting the test mode.
P632
3 Operation
3-102 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.13 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P632, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.
Selecting the Parameter Subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: Control vi a
USER or via the external signal PSS: Control vi a user EXT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS: Param. subs. sel . USER or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: Actual param. subset or
PSS: PS 1 acti ve .
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P632 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P632 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of 1. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of 1, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of 0), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of 1, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of 1, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of 1 is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-103
D5Z5002A
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
Address 065 002
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 065 003
Address 065 004
Address 065 005
PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
[ 003 060 ]
2: Parameter subset 2
1
2
3
4
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0
1
1: Yes
0: No
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
PSS:
Control via user
[ 036 102 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS:
PS 3 active
[ 036 092 ]
PSS:
PS 4 active
[ 036 093 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
1
2
3
4
1 4
PSS:
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT
[ 065 002 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT
[ 065 003 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
[ 065 004 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
1
2
3
4
0 4
0
1 4
Fig. 3-75: Activating the parameter subsets.
P632
3 Operation
3-104 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.14 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P632 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring, open-circuit monitoring
and the logic outputs.
3.14.1 Tests During Start-up
After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P632. If the P632 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P632 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.
3.14.2 Cyclic Tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory the
monitoring signal memory along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.16, (p. 3-109)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.14.3 Signals
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON: Warni ng (rel ay) . The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
Q6Z0154A
SFMON:
Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
SFMON:
Warning (relay)
[ 036 100 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
m out of n
Selected monit. sig.
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Fig. 3-76: Monitoring signals.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-105
3.14.4 Device Response
The response of the P632 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called
a warm restart is automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any
start-up, the computer system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is
characterized by the fact that no stored data and, in particular, no setting
parameters are affected by the procedure. A warm restart can also be
triggered manually by control action. During a warm restart sequence the
protective functions and the communication through serial interfaces will
be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions
remain blocked but communication through the serial interfaces will usually
be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test,
which is part of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried
out. This is necessary because the P632 cannot identify which parameter in
the subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be
reset to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings
are also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state,
the default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
P632
3 Operation
3-106 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.14.5 Monitoring Signal Memory
Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P632 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P632 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P632 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon. si g.
retenti on is applied. This parameter may either be set to Blocked or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P632 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P632 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.
3.14.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-107
3.15 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The operationally
relevant signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system events that represent a
deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or short-circuits
are also recorded. The operating data memory can be cleared/reset.
Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
12Z61CMA
0
1
Operating memory
R
+
R
0: don't execute
1: execute
OP_RC:
No. oper. data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
Fig. 3-77: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
P632
3 Operation
3-108 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.16 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: Overfl ow MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an m out of n parameter (see Section 3.14, (p. 3-
105)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P632 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring Signal Counter
The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: No. moni t. si gnal s ).
12Z6155A
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
0: don't execute
0
1
1: execute
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
Selected monit. sig.
MT_RC:
No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
CT30
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
1
1
Fig. 3-78: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-109
3.17 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
In the event of an overload, the P632 determines the following measured
overload data.
Overload duration
Measured overload data derived from the measured operating data of the
thermal overload protection function (THRM1; see also Section 3.25, (p. 3-
172)). The following values are determined:
Status of the thermal replica
Load current
Object temperature
Coolant temperature
Time remaining before tripping
Offset of the thermal replica

3.17.1 Overload Duration
In the event of an overload, the P632 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
FT_RC: Record. i n progress signal.
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
50Z0137A
1
R
+
OL_DA:
Overload duration
[ 004 102 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Fig. 3-79: Overload duration.
P632
3 Operation
3-110 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.17.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload
Protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protections
measured operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_DA:
Status THRM1 replica
[ 004 155 ]
OL_DA:
Load current THRM1
[ 004 159 ]
OL_DA:
Object temp. THRM1
[ 004 156 ]
OL_DA:
Coolant temp.THRM1
[ 004 157 ]
OL_DA:
Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1
[ 004 158 ]
OL_DA:
Offset THRM1 replica
[ 004 191 ]
64Z5038A
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
THRM1:
Object temperat.,TH1
[ 004 151 ]
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THRM1:
I
305 220
THRM1:
Status replica, TH1
[ 004 150 ]
THRM1:
Coolant temp. TH1
[ 004 154 ]
THRM1:
Pre-trip t. left,TH1
[ 004 153 ]
THRM1:
Temp. offset repl. 1
[ 004 170 ]
Fig. 3-80: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-111
3.18 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
3.18.1 Start of Overload Recording
An overload exists and consequently overload recording begins if at least the
signal THRM1: Starti ng k*I ref> is issued.
3.18.2 Counting Overload Events
Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
64Z80C3A
R
+
OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
THRM1:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 039 151 ]
Fig. 3-81: Counting overload events.
3.18.3 Time Tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
P632
3 Operation
3-112 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.18.4 Overload Logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL_RC: Overl . mem. overfl ow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
12Z6117A
R
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
033 020
033 021
033 022
033 023
033 024
033 025
033 026
033 027
OL_RC:
Overl. mem. overflow
[ 035 007 ]
R
+ CT200
C
OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[ * ]
1
1
1
1
1
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
1
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
1: execute
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
&
1
Fig. 3-82: Overload memory.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-113
3.19 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P632 collects the following measured
fault data:
Running time
Fault duration
Fault current (short-circuit current)
Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance)
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of the line reactance
and in
Line fault loop angle
Fault distance
Ground fault (short-circuit) current
Ground fault loop angle
Relative fault location
Fault location in km
3.19.1 Running Time and Fault Duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general
starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start
and end of the FT_RC: Record. i n progress signal.
49Z64DMA
1
R
+
FT_DA:
Running time
[ 004 021 ]
R
+
FT_DA:
Fault duration
[ 008 010 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
1
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
! G !
! G !
Fig. 3-83: Running time and fault duration.
3.19.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time
The P632 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time
during a fault. Depending on the protection function that recognizes a fault, the
criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P632.
If, for example, the differential protection function detects a fault then the P632
determines the measured fault data at the time during the fault when the
maximum differential current was measured. The measured fault data are
P632
3 Operation
3-114 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
displayed at the end of the fault. If several protection functions detect a fault
then the criterion is selected on the basis of the priorities given in the table
below. The selected criterion is displayed at the P632.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion
1 Differential protection function Maximum differential current
2 Ground differential protection, end a (Br: Restricted
earth fault protection, end a)
Maximum differential current
(REF_1)
3 Ground differential protection, end b (Br: Restricted
earth fault protection, end b)
Maximum differential current
(REF_2)
4 Definite-time overcurrent protection or inverse-time
overcurrent protection
Maximum restraining current
5 Functions according to the selection through m out of n
parameters
End of fault
The difference in time between the start of the fault and the fault data
acquisition time is determined by the P632 and displayed.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-115
62Z8056A
FT_DA:
Run time to meas.
[ 004 199 ]
FT_DA:
Save measured values
305 052
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
FT_DA:
Fault determ. with
[ 004 198 ]
1: Max. diff. current
1
2
3
4
5
2: Max. Idiff, REF_1
3: Max. Idiff, REF_2
5: Max. restrain. curr.
6: Other trigger
5 1
c1
c2
c3
c4
c5
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
REF_1:
Trip signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_2:
Trip signal
[ 041 016 ]
DTOC1:
General starting
[ 035 128 ]
DTOC2:
General starting
[ 035 234 ]
IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT2:
General starting
[ 038 135 ]
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
REF_2:
Id,N,b
402 558
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
c
G
R
Fig. 3-84: Determination of the fault data acquisition time
3.19.3 Acquisition of the Fault Currents
The P632 stores the fault currents data determined at the acquisition time.
The following fault currents are stored:
The maximum phase currents for each end of the transformer
The residual current calculated from the phase currents
The current measured by the P632 at transformer -Tx4 (x: 1, 2 or 3) The
fault currents are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to I
nom
.
P632
3 Operation
3-116 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z5057A
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IP,a p.u.
[ 025 086 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IN,a p.u.
[ 025 087 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IP,b p.u.
[ 026 086 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IN,b p.u.
[ 026 087 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IY,a p.u.
[ 025 088 ]
FT_DA:
Fault curr.IY,b p.u.
[ 026 088 ]
IA,a
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
305 052
IB,a
IC,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IY,a
IY,b
IP,a
IP,b
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
Imax,a
Imax,b
Fig. 3-85: Acquisition of the fault currents
3.19.4 Acquisition of the Differential and Restraining Currents
The P632 stores the differential and restraining current data determined at the
acquisition time by the differential protection and ground differential protection
functions. Moreover, the values for the second and fifth harmonics of the
differential current are stored.
Differential and restraining currents are stored as per-unit quantities referred to
I
ref
.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-117
Q6Z0158A
FT_DA:
Diff. current 3
[ 007 082 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
FT_DA:
Diff.current 3(2*f0)
[ 007 084 ]
FT_DA:
[ 007 085 ]
FT_DA:
Restrain. current 3
[ 007 083 ]
FT_DA:
Diff. current 1
[ 005 082 ]
FT_DA:
[ 005 084 ]
FT_DA:
[ 005 085 ]
FT_DA:
Restrain. current 1
[ 005 083 ]
FT_DA:
Diff. current 2
[ 006 082 ]
FT_DA:
[ 006 084 ]
FT_DA:
[ 006 085 ]
FT_DA:
Restrain. current 2
[ 006 083 ]
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
I(2f0),1
303 301
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
I(5f0),1
303 311
DIFF:
I(2f0),2
303 302
FT_DA:
305 052
DIFF:
I(5f0),2
303 312
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
DIFF:
I(2f0),3
303 309
DIFF:
I(5f0),3
303 313
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
c
R
c
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Fig. 3-86: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of differential protection
P632
3 Operation
3-118 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z8059A
FT_DA:
Diff. current REF_1
[ 025 082 ]
FT_DA:
Restrain.curr. REF_1
[ 025 083 ]
FT_DA:
Diff. current REF_2
[ 026 082 ]
FT_DA:
Restrain.curr. REF_2
[ 026 083 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
305 052
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
REF_1:
IR,N,a
402 551
REF_2:
Id,N,b
402 558
REF_2:
IR,N,b
402 559
R
c
R
R
R
c
Fig. 3-87: Acquisition of the differential and restraining currents of ground differential protection
3.19.5 Fault Data Reset
After pressing the reset key on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can
continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-119
3.20 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
3.20.1 Start of Fault Recording
A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
MAI N: General starti ng
MAI N: Gen. tri p si gnal 1
FT_RC: Tri gger
FT_RC: I d> tri ggered
FT_RC: I R> tri ggered
In addition fault recording may also be started manually using setting
parameters or externally through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P632
3 Operation
3-120 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.20.2 Fault Counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
64Z8025A
1: execute
1: execute
1
1
1
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 089 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
No. of faults
[ 004 020 ]
FT_RC:
No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
R
+
R
+
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
m out of n
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC:
Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
0 1 min
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
Fig. 3-88: Start of fault recording and fault counter.
3.20.3 Time Tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-121
3.20.4 Fault Recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-
fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC: Faul t mem. overfl ow will be entered as
the last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the
signal FT_RC: Faul ty ti me tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured RMS fault data will also be entered
in the fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
12Z6161B
R
n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
003 000
033 001
033 002
033 003
033 004
033 005
033 006
033 007
FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
[ 035 001 ]
R
+ CT200
C
FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[ * ]
1
1
1
1
1
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
1
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
1: execute
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
&
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
1: execute
Fault memory n
1
Fig. 3-89: Fault memory.
P632
3 Operation
3-122 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.20.5 Fault Value Recording
The following analog signals are recorded:
Phase currents of both ends of the transformer
Residual current measured by the P632 at the T 4 transformer
Voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time
period of 16.4 s (for 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for 60 Hz) is available for recording. This
period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum
recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-
fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording
will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have
occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-123
62Z5062A
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
IA,a
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
IP,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IY,b
IP,b
V
IA,c
Analog channel 4
Analog channel 5
Analog channel 6
Analog channel 7
Analog channel 8
Analog channel 9
Analog channel 10
Analog channel 1
Analog channel 2
Analog channel 3
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Fig. 3-90: Fault value recording
P632
3 Operation
3-124 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.21 Differential Protection (Function Group DIFF)
The P632 is designed for the protection of transformers as well as for the
protection of motors and generators and of other two-winding arrangements.
For application of the device as transformer differential protection, amplitude
matching is required. This is achieved simply by setting of the reference power
generally the nominal power of the transformer and of the primary nominal
voltages for all windings of the transformer.
Vector group matching is achieved by the straightforward input of the relevant
vector group identification number. For special applications, zero-sequence
current filtering may be deactivated. For conditions where it is possible to load
the transformer with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage, the overfluxing
restraint prevents inappropriate tripping.
For application as differential protection device for motors or generators, the
harmonic restraint (inrush compensation) can be deactivated. The start-up of
directly switched asynchronous motors represents a problem in differential
protection due to transient transformer saturation caused by a displacement of
the start-up current for relatively high primary time constants. Even under these
unfavorable measurement conditions, the P632 exhibits an excellent stable
performance due to the application of a saturation discriminator.
All observations below are based on the assumption that the system current
transformers are connected to the P632 in standard configuration (see
Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-68)). In particular, the application as transformer differential
protection device presupposes that winding a corresponds to the high voltage
side of the transformer. For a non-standard connection, the appropriate settings
must be selected (see Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)).
3.21.1 Enabling or Disabling Differential Protection
Differential protection can be enabled or disabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-125
Q6Z0102A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
Enable PSx
072 152
073 152
074 152
075 152
DIFF:
Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
DIFF:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
DIFF:
General enable USER
[ 019 080 ]
1
Fig. 3-91: Enabling or disabling differential protection
3.21.2 Amplitude Matching
In order to set the amplitude matching for the protected object, a reference
power - identical for all windings - needs to be defined. For two-winding
arrangements, the nominal power will usually be the reference power. The
individual reference currents for each winding of the protected object are then
calculated by the P632 on the basis of the set reference power and the set
primary nominal voltages of the transformer.
I
ref ,a
=
S
ref
3 V
nom,a
I
ref ,b
=
S
ref
3 V
nom,b
S
ref
: reference power
I
ref ,a
, I
ref ,b
: reference current of winding a or b, respectively
V
nom,a
, V
nom,b
: nominal voltage of winding a or b, respectively
The P632 calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents
and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
k
am,a
=
I
nom,a
I
ref ,a
k
am,b
=
I
nom,b
I
ref ,b
with
k
am,a
, k
am,b
: amplitude matching factor of end a or b, respectively
I
nom,a
, I
nom,b
: primary nominal currents of the system transformers
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P632.
P632
3 Operation
3-126 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
The P632 checks that the reference currents and matching factors are within
their permissible ranges. The matching factors must satisfy the following
conditions:
The matching factors must always be 16.
The value for the second highest matching factor (k
am,mid
) must always be
0.5.
Should the P632 calculate reference currents or matching factors not satisfying
the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values of the phase currents of the windings of the protected
object are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are then available for
further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values
always refer back to the relevant reference currents rather than to the
transformer nominal currents or the nominal currents of the device.
62Z8013A
kam,a > 16
kam,b > 16
SFMON:
2nd match.fact. inv.
[ 091 006 ]
DIFF:
Ref. curr. Iref,a
[ 019 023 ]
DIFF:
Ref. curr. Iref,b
[ 019 024 ]
SFMON:
Iref, a inval. range
[ 091 007 ]
SFMON:
Iref, b inval. range
[ 091 008 ]
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,a
[ 004 105 ]
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,b
[ 004 106 ]
SFMON:
Matching fail. end a
[ 091 000 ]
SFMON:
Matching fail. end b
[ 091 001 ]
DIFF:
Sound match
303 310
MAIN:
Vnom prim. end a PSx
[ 019 017 ]
MAIN:
Vnom prim. end b PSx
[ 019 018 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.prim.,end b
[ 019 021 ]
DIFF:
Reference power Sref
[ 019 016 ]
Iref,a=Sref/Vnom,a/3
Iref,b=Sref/Vnom,b/3
Monit. range limits
Monit. range limits
kam,pos
kam,pos < 0.5
kam,a = Inom,a/Iref,a
kam,b = Inom,b/Iref,b
COMP
Fig. 3-92: Calculating and checking the matching factors
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-127
Iam,A,a
Iam,B,a
Iam,C,a
Iam,A,b
Iam,B,b
Iam,C,b
62Z8004A
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIFF:
Sound match
303 310
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,a
[ 004 105 ]
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
DIFF:
Matching fact. kam,b
[ 004 106 ]
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
kam,aIA,a
kam,aIB,a
kam,aIC,a
kam,bIA,b
kam,bIB,b
kam,bIC,b
Fig. 3-93: Amplitude matching
P632
3 Operation
3-128 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.21.3 Vector Group Matching
Vector group matching means that the low voltage-side currents are rotated with
respect to the high voltage-side currents according to the vector group of the
transformer to be protected. Thereby, phase coincidence with the high voltage-
side currents is restored. With the P632, this is achieved by calculating the
relevant vector difference or where appropriate, by sign inversion for the low
voltage-side phase currents (end b). Care must be taken to avoid distortion of
the amplitude matching by this operation. For all odd vector groups, this is
achieved by means of the factor 1/3. Using vector diagrams, it can be shown
that the operations listed in the following table will lead to phase coincidence of
the high and low voltage-side currents while maintaining the amplitude
matching. In Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-129), such a vector diagram is depicted for a
transformer having the vector group Yd5 as an example. By subtraction of each
phase current from the cyclically leading phase current and subsequent
multiplication by the factor 1/3, the desired matching is achieved.
Q6Z0105A
-Iam,B,b
-Iam,C,b
3Is,2,b
3Is,3,b
-Iam,A,b
3Is,1,b
Iam,A,b
Iam,B,b
Iam,C,b
Is,3,a
Is,2,a
Is,1,a
Fig. 3-94: Vector diagram for vector group matching with a transformer having the vector group Yd5
3.21.4 Zero-sequence Current Filtering
Table 3-1, (p. 3-130) shows that the zero-sequence current is subtracted from
the phase currents of winding a and, for all even vector groups, from the phase
currents of winding b. According to the theory of symmetric components, the
zero-sequence current is calculated as follows:
I
am,0,z
=
1
3
. I
am,A,z
+I
am,B,z
+I
am,C,z
z: end a or b
I
am
: amplitude-matched current
Zero-sequence filtering may be disabled separately for each end.
In general this disabling of zero-sequence filtering is intended for even-numbered
vector groups. Should the side considered here require the setting of an odd-
numbered vector group while at the same time no operational system star point
grounding is provided within the protected area, then, in view of increased
sensitivity with single-pole internal faults, it is recommended that the respective
zero-sequence current is fed to the individual measuring systems again.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-129
Zero-sequence filtering for the transformer ends a or b is enabled using the
setting parameters:
DI FF: 0-seq. fi l t. a en. PSx
DI FF: 0-seq. fi l t. b en. PSx
Table 3-1, (p. 3-130) lists the required operations for all vector groups that may
occur. The indices in the equations have the following meanings:
am: amplitude-matched
x: phase A, B or C
x+1: cyclically trailing phase
x-1: cyclically leading phase
End ID of the
vector
group
Setting:
With zero-sequence filtering
Setting:
Without zero-sequence filtering
a
I
am,x,a
I
am,0,a
I
am,x,a
b 0=12
I
am,x,b
I
am,0,b
I
am,x,b
1
I
am,x,b
I
am,x+1,b

1
3
I
am,x,b
I
am,x+1,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
2
I
am,0,b
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,x+1,b
3
I
am,x1,b
I
am,x+1,b

1
3
I
am,x1,b
I
am,x+1,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
4
I
am,x1,b
I
am,0,b
I
am,x1,b
5
I
am,x1,b
I
am,x,b

1
3
I
am,x1,b
I
am,x,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
6
I
am,0,b
I
am,x,b
I
am,x,b
7
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,x,b

1
3
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,x,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
8
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,0,b
I
am,x+1,b
9
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,x1,b

1
3
I
am,x+1,b
I
am,x1,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
10
I
am,0,b
I
am,x1,b
I
am,x1,b
11
I
am,x,b
I
am,x1,b

1
3
I
am,x,b
I
am,x1,b

1
3
+I
am,0,b
Tab. 3-1: Required operations for vector groups with or without zero-sequence current filtering
Vector group matching is via a straight-forward input of the vector group
identification number provided that the phase currents of the high and low
voltage side(s) are connected in standard configuration (see section
Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-68)). For other configurations, special considerations apply
(see Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)). A reverse phase rotation (A-C-B) needs to be taken
into account by making the appropriate setting at the P632. The P632 will then
P632
3 Operation
3-130 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the
number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID).
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
62Z8010A
DIFF:
Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
019 010
019 040
019 041
019 042
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
072 155
073 155
074 155
075 155
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
072 156
073 156
074 156
075 156
Iam,0,a
Iam,0,b
Iam,A,a
Iam,B,a
Iam,C,a
Iam,A,b
Iam,B,b
Iam,C,b
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
Is,y,a
Is,1,a
Is,2,a
Is,3,a
Is,1,b
Is,y,b Is,2,b
Is,3,b
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1
3
5
7
9
11
0
1
0
1
Fig. 3-95: Vector group matching and zero-sequence filtering
3.21.5 Tripping Characteristics
The differential and restraining current values for each measurement system are
calculated from the current values after amplitude and vector group matching.
The following equations are valid for uniformly defined current arrows relative to
the protected equipment, e.g. all the current arrows of all windings point either
towards the protected object or away from it.
Calculation of differential and restraining currents:
I
d, y
=
|
I
s, y,a
+ I
s, y,b
|
I
R, y
= 0.5
|
I
s, y,a
I
s, y,b
|
The tripping characteristic of the P632 line differential protection device has two
knee points. The first knee-point depends on the setting at DI FF: I di ff> PSx
and is on the intersection with the tripping characteristic for single-side feed.
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up
sensitivity DI FF: I di ff> PSx can be increased to a set value
(DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx) when a CT fault is detected. See details given in the
section describing the CTS function group.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-131
The second knee of the tripping characteristic is defined by the setting at
DI FF: I di ff> PSx.
The characteristic equations for the three different ranges are given below.
Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-132) shows the tripping characteristic.
Characteristics equation for the range 0 I
R
0.5I
diff >
:
I
d
I
ref
=
I
diff >
I
ref
Characteristics equation for the range 0.5I
diff >
< I
R
I
R,m
2
:
I
d
I
ref
= m
1
I
R
I
ref
+
I
diff >
I
ref

(
1 0.5 m
1
)
Characteristics equation for the range I
R,m
2
< I
R
:
I
d
I
ref
= m
2
I
R
I
ref
+
I
diff >
I
ref

(
1 0.5 m
1
)
+
I
R,m
2
I
ref

(
m
1
m
2
)
I
ref
: reference current
m
1
: gradient of the characteristic in range 0.5I
diff >
< I
R
I
R,m
2
m
2
: gradient of characteristic in range I
R,m
2
< I
R
2
4
6
8
0
2 4 6 8
I III II
64Z8017

Tripping area
m
1 =
0.3
m
2

=

0
.
7
= 0.2
Id>
Iref
IR
Iref
Id
Iref
IR,m2
Iref
= 4.0
Blocking area
F
a
u
l
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c

f
o
r

s
i
n
g
l
e
-
s
i
d
e

f
e
e
d
Fig. 3-96: Tripping characteristic of differential protection
If the current transformer supervision (CTS) function is used, the basic pick-up
sensitivity DI FF: I di ff> PSx can be increased to a value set at
DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx.
P632
3 Operation
3-132 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
1 2 3
1
0
Idiff
I
R
Load line
for single side infeed
I
diff
>
I
R,m2
m
1
m
2
I
diff
>(CTS)
64Z6030A_EN
Fig. 3-97: Changing the characteristic if CTS: I di f f >(CTS)acti ve = Yes
3.21.6 Rapid (high-set) Differential Protection
Above the adjustable threshold DI FF: I di ff>> PSx of the differential current,
the P632 will trip without taking into account either the harmonic restraint or the
overfluxing stabilization. If the differential current exceeds the adjustable
threshold DI FF: I di ff>>> PSx, the restraining current and the saturation
discriminator are no longer taken into account either, that is the P632 will trip
regardless of the restraining value and the saturation discriminator.
62Z5071A
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
Id,1 = f(Is,1,z)
Id,2 = f(Is,2,z)
IR,1 = f(Is,1,z)
IR,2 = f(Is,2,z)
Id,3 = f(Is,3,z)
IR,3 = f(Is,3,z)
Is,1,a
Is,1,b
Is,2,a
Is,2,b
Is,3,a
Is,3,b
End a, b z:
Fig. 3-98: Forming the differential and restraining currents for the three measuring systems
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-133
64Z8012A
DIFF:
Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Idiff>(CTS) PSx
or
if CTS:
Idiff>(CTS)active
= yes
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
[ 041 115 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 2 trigg.
[ 041 116 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 3 trigg.
[ 041 117 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
DIFF:
Overflux.bl.1 trigg.
[ 041 121 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 122 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 123 ]
DIFF:
Enabled
[ 041 210 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 1
[ 041 002 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 2
[ 041 003 ]
DIFF:
Trip signal 3
[ 041 004 ]
DIFF:
Id>> triggered
[ 041 221 ]
DIFF:
Meas.system 1 trigg.
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF:
Id>>> triggered
[ 041 222 ]
DIFF:
Op.mode rush rst.PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
m1 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
m2 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
IR,m2 PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Idiff>> PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Idiff>>> PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
1: Not phase-selective
2: Phase-selective
DIFF:
Idiff> PSx
[ * ]
[ 036 203 ]
0
1
2
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
IR,m2 PSx
072 147
073 147
074 147
075 147
DIFF:
m2 PSx
072 146
073 146
074 146
075 146
DIFF:
m1 PSx
072 145
073 145
074 145
075 145
DIFF:
Idiff>> PSx
072 143
073 143
074 143
075 143
DIFF:
Idiff>>> PSx
072 144
073 144
074 144
075 144
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
Idiff>(CTS) PSx
080 000
081 000
082 000
083 000
DIFF:
Idiff> PSx
072 142
073 142
074 142
075 142
DIFF:
Op.mode rush rst.PSx
072 148
073 148
074 148
075 148
DIFF:
Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
010 162
010 163
010 164
010 165
Fig. 3-99: Measuring system of the P632
3.21.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
When an unloaded transformer is connected, the inrush current at unfavorable
switching instants such as for voltage zero, may have values that exceed the
P632
3 Operation
3-134 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
transformer nominal current several times over. It takes some time for the
current to assume its small stationary value. Since the high inrush current flows
on the connected side only, the tripping characteristic of the P632 differential
protection may give rise to a trip unless stabilizing action is taken. The fact that
the inrush current has a high proportion of harmonics having twice the system
frequency offers a possibility of stabilization against tripping by the inrush
current.
The P632 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I
(
f
0
)
and second
harmonic components I
(
2 f
0
)
of the differential current are determined. If the
ratio
I
(
2 f
0
)
I
(
f
0
)
exceeds a specific adjustable value in at least one measuring
system, tripping is blocked optionally in one of the following modes:
across all three measuring systems
selectively for one measuring system (see Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-135)).
There will be no blocking if the differential current exceeds the set threshold
DI FF: I di ff>> PSx.
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
f0 I(f0)
I(2f0)
I(2f0)/I(f0)
DIFF:
RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
0 30ms
&
DIFF:
Trip signal
[ 041 075 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
I(f0)
I(2f0)
I(2f0)/I(f0)
0 30ms
&
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
I(f0)
I(2f0)
I(2f0)/I(f0)
0 30ms
&
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
DIFF:
I(2f0),1
303 301
DIFF:
I(2f0),2
303 302
DIFF:
I(2f0),3
303 309
Q6Z0110C
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
072 159
073 159
074 159
075 159
f0
f0
2f0
2f0
2f0
&
&
&
Fig. 3-100: Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
3.21.8 Saturation Discriminator
Up to a certain limit, stability in the event of external faults is ensured by means
of the bias. Due to the triple-slope tripping characteristic, the stabilization is
particularly pronounced for high currents. However, as an additional safeguard
for through-currents with transformer saturation, the P632 is provided with a
saturation discriminator.
After each zero crossing of the restraining current, the saturation discriminator
monitors the occurrence of the differential current over time. For internal faults,
the differential current appears after a zero crossing together with the restraining
current. In the case of passing currents with transformer saturation, however, a
differential current will not appear until transformer saturation begins.
Accordingly, a locking signal is generated on the basis of level monitoring of the
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-135
differential current as compared to the restraining current, and thus the desired
through-stabilization is achieved. Locking is restricted to the measuring system
where an external fault was detected.
Q6Z0111A
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
[ 041 115 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 2 trigg.
[ 041 116 ]
DIFF:
Sat.discr. 3 trigg.
[ 041 117 ]
Fig. 3-101: Saturation discriminator
3.21.9 Overfluxing Stabilization
If the transformer is loaded with a voltage in excess of the nominal voltage,
saturation effects occur. Without stabilization, these could lead to differential
protection tripping. The fact that the current of the protected object under
saturation conditions has a high proportion of harmonics having five times the
system frequency serves as the basis of stabilization.
The P632 filters the differential current. The fundamental wave I
(
f
0
)
and fifth
harmonic components I
(
5 f
0
)
of the differential current are determined. If the
ratio
I
(
5 f
0
)
I
(
f
0
)
exceeds the set value DI FF: Ov. I (5f0)/I (f0) PSx in at least one
measuring system, and if the differential current is smaller than 4I
ref
, then
tripping is blocked selectively for one measuring system.
P632
3 Operation
3-136 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q6Z0112A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DIFF:
Overflux.bl. en. PSx
072 158
073 158
074 158
075 158
DIFF:
[ 041 121 ]
DIFF:
I(5f0),1
303 311
DIFF:
[ 041 122 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 123 ]
DIFF:
I(5f0),2
303 312
DIFF:
I(5f0),3
303 313
DIFF:
Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
072 160
073 160
074 160
075 160
DIFF:
Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Overflux.bl. en. PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
I(5f0) I(5f0)/I(f0)
5f0
I(f0)
f0
I(5f0)
5f0
I(f0)
f0
I(5f0)
5f0
I(f0)
f0
I(5f0)/I(f0)
I(5f0)/I(f0)
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
<4Iref
Fig. 3-102: Overfluxing stabilization
3.21.10 Measured Operating Data of Differential Protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating
data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-137
Q6Z0109A
DIFF:
Diff. current 1
[ 005 080 ]
DIFF:
Diff. current 2
[ 006 080 ]
DIFF:
Diff. current 3
[ 007 080 ]
DIFF:
Restrain. current 1
[ 005 081 ]
DIFF:
Restrain. current 2
[ 006 081 ]
DIFF:
Restrain. current 3
[ 007 081 ]
1
2
3
1
2
3
c1
c2
c3
c1
c2
c3
DIFF:
Meas. value rel. Id
[ 011 037 ]
DIFF:
Meas. value rel. IR
[ 011 038 ]
DIFF:
IR,1
303 305
DIFF:
IR,2
303 306
DIFF:
IR,3
303 308
DIFF:
Id,1
303 303
DIFF:
Id,2
303 304
DIFF:
Id,3
303 307
Fig. 3-103: Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
P632
3 Operation
3-138 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.22 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_1 and
REF_2)
The ground differential protection function (Br.: restricted earth fault protection)
can be applied to transformer windings with grounded neutral point where the
neutral-point-to-ground connection is fitted with a current transformer.
One ground differential protection function is available per transformer winding.
The P632 display shows the winding end associated with a particular ground
differential protection function. Connection for and operation of the ground
differential protection function will now be presented with end a as an example.
Equivalent considerations apply to end b.
Ground differential protection may be applied to transformer ends with a
grounded neutral-point, but in this case the neutral-point-to-ground connection
must be fitted with a CT.
Ground differential protection is based on comparing the vector sum I
N
of the
phase currents of the relevant transformer end to the neutral-point current I
Y
.
The P632 calculates the vector sum of the phase currents. For the connection,
see Section 3.12.1, (p. 3-68).
3.22.1 Enabling or Disabling Ground Differential Protection
Ground differential protection can be enabled or disabled from the local control
panel; see also Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140). Moreover, enabling can be done
separately for each parameter subset.
3.22.2 Blocking ground differential protection
Blocking of the ground differential protection functions when the DIFF protection
was triggered may be enabled or disabled using setting parameters.
Furthermore, binary signal input functions (REF_1: Bl ocki ng EXT , for
example) are available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions.
Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting,
the readiness of ground differential protection is also indicated (by means of the
REF_1: Ready state, for example).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-139
REF_1:
Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
[ * ]
0
0: No
1
REF_1:
Ready
[ 019 054 ] DIFF:
[ 041 124 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 125 ]
DIFF:
[ 041 126 ]
REF_1:
Blocking EXT
[ 019 051 ]
REF_1:
Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
PSU:
PS y active
[ ** ]
64Z5300C
REF_1:
General enable USER
[ 019 050 ]
0
0: No
1
REF_1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0
0: No
1
REF_1:
Enable PSx
072 141
073 141
074 141
075 141
REF_1:
Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
080 006
081 006
082 006
083 006
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 3
PSU:
PS y active
036 090
036 091
036 092
036 093
y
1
2
3
4
1: Yes
** *
1
1
1: Yes
1: Yes
Fig. 3-104: Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection
3.22.3 Amplitude Matching
For amplitude matching, the nominal power of the transformer end should first
be set as the reference power. The reference current is then calculated by the
P632 on the basis of the set reference power and the set primary nominal
voltage of the transformer end.
I
ref ,N,a
=
S
ref
3 V
nom,a
S
ref
: reference power
I
ref ,N,a
: reference current of the ground differential protection function, end a
V
nom,a
: nominal voltage, end a
The P632 calculates the matching factors on the basis of the reference currents
and the set primary nominal currents of the system transformers.
P632
3 Operation
3-140 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
k
am,N,a
=
I
nom,a
I
ref ,N,a
k
am,Y ,a
=
I
nom,Y ,a
I
ref ,N,a
with
am: amplitude-matched
I
nom,a
: primary nominal current of the main current transformer
I
nom,Y ,a
: primary nominal current of current transformer in the neutral-point-to-
ground connection
Reference currents and matching factors are displayed at the P632.
The P632 checks that the reference current and matching factor are within their
permissible ranges. The acceptable range for the reference current can be read
out from the operating program. The following applies to the matching factors:
The matching factor must always be 16.
The value for the smaller matching factor (k
am,min
) must always be 0.5.
Should the P632 calculate a reference current or matching factors not meeting
the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will be blocked
automatically.
The measured values are multiplied by the relevant matching factors and are
then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and
measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than
to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-141
kam,N,a 16
kam,Y,a 16
kam,N,a =
kam,Y,a =
64Z6020A
REF_1:
Ref. curr. Iref
[ 019 034 ]
SFMON:
Inv.range Iref REF_1
[ 091 105 ]
REF_1:
Match. fact. kam,N,a
[ 004 160 ]
REF_1:
Matching fact. kam,Y
[ 004 163 ]
SFMON:
Match.f. kam,N REF_1
[ 091 101 ]
SFMON:
Match.f. kam,Y REF_1
[ 091 102 ]
SFMON:
Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
[ 091 104 ]
Inom,a/Iref,N,a
Inom,Y,a/Iref,N,a
Monit. range limits
Iref,N,a=Sref/Vnom/3
REF_1:
Reference power Sref
[ 019 031 ]
MAIN:
Vnom prim. end a PSx
[ 019 017 ]
MAIN:
[ 019 020 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
[ 019 027 ]
kam,min < 0.5
kam,min
COMP
Fig. 3-105: Calculating and monitoring the matching factors
3.22.4 Operating Modes
The user can choose among three operating modes.
P632
3 Operation
3-142 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Address Description Range of Values
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149 REF_1: Operati ng mode
PSx
Low imped. / sum(IP)
(default)
Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169 REF_2: Operati ng mode
PSx
Low imped. / sum(IP)
(default)
Low imped. / IP,max
High impedance
3.22.4.1 Low imped. / sum(IP) Operating Mode
From the amplitude-matched resultant currents I
am,N,a
and I
am,Y,a
, the differential
and restraining currents are calculated as follows:
I
d,N,a
= |I
am,N,a
+ I
am,Y,a
|
I
R,N,a
= |I
am,N,a
|
Again, the equation for the differential current applies under the condition of
uniformly defined current arrows relative to the protected object. Both current
arrows point either towards the protected object or away from it.
Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-144) shows the tripping characteristic of the ground differential
protection function. The characteristic equation is as follows:
I
d,N,a
I
ref
=
I
diff >,N,a
I
ref ,N,a
+1.005
I
R,N,a
I
ref ,N,a
with
I
diff>,N,a
: setting at REF_1: I di ff> PSx
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-143

2
4
6
8
0 2 4 6 8
64Z8018
= 0.2
Id,N>
Iref
Id,N
Iref
m

=

1
.
0
0
5
IR,N
Iref
Tripping area
Blocking area
F
a
u
l
t

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c

f
o
r

t
r
a
n
s
i
e
n
t

s
a
t
u
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

t
h
e

m
a
i
n

c
u
r
r
e
n
t

t
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r
s
Fig. 3-106: Tripping characteristic of ground differential protection with the Low imped. / sum(IP) operating mode
3.22.4.2 Low imped. / IP,max Operating Mode
Using this operating mode differential current Id and restraining current IR are
defined as follows:
I
d
=
|
k
am,P

{
I
A
, I
B
, I
C
}
+k
am,Y
I
Y
|
I
R
=
1
2

(
k
am,P
max
{ |
I
A
|
,
|
I
B
|
,
|
I
C
| }
+k
am,Y

|
I
Y
| )
When compared to the Low imped. / sum(IP) operating mode, a double slope
tripping characteristic can be used here because of the definition of the
restraining current (see Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-145)). In particular, this tripping
characteristic permits a tripping test under load current by shorting a phase
current (to simulate residual current) without the need of star point current I
Y
.
Besides the I
diff>
parameter, already available to set the basic pick-up sensitivity,
the following parameters are also provided with the Low imped. / IP,max
operating mode to set the tripping characteristic; in this case I
R,m2
is equivalent
to I
ref
.
P632
3 Operation
3-144 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Address Description Range of Values *
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162 REF_1: m1 PSx 0.00 {0.20} 1.00
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163 REF_1: m2 PSx 0.15 {1.50}
072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164 REF_1: I R, m2 PSx 0.10 {1.00} 1.50
072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172 REF_2: m1 PSx 0.00 {0.20} 1.00
072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165 REF_2: m2 PSx 0.15 {1.50}
072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166 REF_2: I R, m2 PSx 0.10 {1.00} 1.50
* Default setting in curly braces {}

1 2
1
2
I
d
/I
ref
I
diff> I
R,m2
m
1
m
2
I
R
/I
ref
64Z6021A_EN
Fig. 3-107: Tripping characteristic of the ground differential protection with the Low imped. / IP,max operating
mode
3.22.4.3 High impedance Operating Mode
This operating mode is provided for application with the high impedance current
measuring approach. The pick-up sensitivity is set via the I
diff>
parameter which
is already available.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-145
3.22.5 Idiff>>> Threshold
The restraining quantity is no longer taken into account when the differential
current value exceeds the threshold set at REF_1: I di ff>>> PSx. Therefore
the P632 will issue a trip signal independently of the restraining quantity.
3.22.6 Applying Current Transformer Supervision
When applying current transformer supervision (CTS), the ground differential
protection function may be blocked for the relevant end where a CT fault is
detected. See details given in Section 3.29, (p. 3-194).
When a CTS alarm signal is issued for one of the transformer ends (for example
CTS: Al arm end a ), the associated ground differential protection function is
then blocked, if it has been set accordingly (for example by assigning REF_1 to
end a: REF_1: CTS effecti ve PSx = Yes).
64Z6022A
IN,a
REF_1:
IR,m2 PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
m2 PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
m1 PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
Idiff> PSx
[ * ]
REF_1:
Idiff>>> PSx
[ * ]
kam,N,aIN,a
kam,Y,aIY,a
Id,N,a
IR,N,a
REF_1:
Trip signal
[ 041 005 ]
REF_1:
IR,N,a
402 551
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
REF_1:
Enabled
[ 041 132 ]
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
REF_1:
m2 PSx
072 163
073 163
074 163
075 163
REF_1:
m1 PSx
072 162
073 162
074 162
075 162
REF_1:
Idiff> PSx
072 150
073 150
074 150
075 150
REF_1:
IR,m2 PSx
072 164
073 164
074 164
075 164
REF_1:
Idiff>>> PSx
072 151
073 151
074 151
075 151
CTS:
Alarm end a
[ 036 205 ]
1: Yes
REF_1:
CTS effective PSx
[ 080 003 ]
1: Yes
Fig. 3-108: Measuring system of the P632, shown here for REF_1
3.22.7 Measured Operating Data of Ground Differential Protection
The differential and restraining currents are displayed as measured operating
data provided that the set thresholds are exceeded.
P632
3 Operation
3-146 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q6Z0116A
REF_1:
Diff. current, REF_1
[ 008 080 ]
REF_1:
Restrain.curr.,REF_1
[ 008 081 ]
REF_1:
Meas. value rel. Id
[ 011 039 ]
REF_1:
Meas. value rel. IR
[ 011 040 ]
REF_1:
Id,N,a
402 550
REF_1:
IR,N,a
402 551
c
c
Fig. 3-109: Measured operating data of differential and restraining currents
3.22.8 Protection of Autotransformers
Function group REF_1 provides a protection function, stabilized by a
characteristic, for autotransformers; a typical example is displayed in the next
figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-
point current must be taken into account.
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IY,a
64Z7199A
(Ix,b) = IN,b
(Ix,a) = IN,a
Fig. 3-110: Currents with an autotransformer
For such applications with REF_1, the transformer end b may be selected, and
end a is permanently included in the protection function.
(019 120) REF_1: Add. meas. i np. end b = Yes / No (default setting is No)
The neutral-point current is permanently assigned to the measuring input for end
a (T14).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-147
A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the P632 for
each end added. All currents involved must be referred to a common reference
value as this application entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence
system. This common reference current value is calculated based on the settable
reference power and the nominal voltage for end a. The amplitude matching
factors then result from the ratio of the primary transformer current values for
the relevant end and the common reference current value.
Reference current: I
ref
=
S
ref , prim
3 V
nom, prim,a
Amplitude matching factor: k
amp,x
=
I
nom,CT , prim,x
I
ref
for x = End a, b
with
S
ref, prim
= (019 031) REF_1: Reference power Sref
V
nom, prim a
= (019 017) MAI N: Vnom pri m. end a PSx
I
nom, CT, prim a
= (019 020) MAI N: I nom C. T. pri m. , end a
I
nom, CT, prim b
= (019 021) MAI N: I nom C. T. pri m. , end b
The reference current and matching factors for the transformer ends are
displayed at the P632.
As before, the P632 checks that the reference current and matching factors
remain within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference
current can be looked up in the operating system. The following rule applies to
the matching factors:
The larger of both matching factors must be 16.
The smaller of both matching factors must come to 0.5.
Should the P632 calculate a common reference current value or matching factors
not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P632 will
automatically be blocked.
The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then
available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and
measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current
rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current
of the device.
As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase
currents involved and the neutral-point current:
I
diff,N
= |k
am,a
I
N,a
+ k
am,b
I
N,b
+ k
am,Y
I
a,Y
|
= |k
am,a
{I
A,a
,I
B,a
,I
C,a
} + k
am,b
{I
A,b
,I
B,b
,I
C,b
} + k
am,Y
I
a,Y
|
The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode.
If the operating mode is set to Low imped. / sum(IP), the restraining current is
calculated from the sum of all ends involved:
I
R,N
= |k
am,a
I
N,a
+ k
am,b
I
N,b
|
= |k
am,a
{I
A,a
,I
B,a
,I
C,a
} + k
am,b
{I
A,b
,I
B,b
,I
C,b
}|
If the operating mode is set to Low imped. / IP,max, the formula to calculate
the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end.
But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched
sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.
I
R,N
= 0.5(max{|I
A
|,|I
B
|,|I
C
|} + k
am,Y
|I
a,Y
|) (unchanged)
with I
x
= k
am,a
I
x,a
+ k
am,b
I
x,b
for x = A, B or C
P632
3 Operation
3-148 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
The value pairs ( I
d,N
/ I
R,N
) calculated with the above formula are then compared
with the already identified tripping characteristics of the ground differential
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-149
3.23 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups
DTOC1 and DTOC2)
In the P632, a three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC
protection) is available. The measured values to be monitored by the respective
DTOC functions are selected using a setting parameter.
Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current
measured values are monitored.
The function group DTOC1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of
the DTOC protection functions. The same will apply to function group DTOC2.
62Z5070A
DTOC1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 103 ]
0
1
0: End a
1: End b
0 , 1
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
IN,y
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IN,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IN,b
Fig. 3-111: Selection of measured values for DTOC protection
3.23.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection
DTOC protection can be enabled or disabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
P632
3 Operation
3-150 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q6Z0118A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
Enable PSx
076 050
077 050
078 050
079 050
DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC1:
General enable USER
[ 031 135 ]
1
Fig. 3-112: Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3.23.2 Phase Current Stages
The three phase currents are monitored by the P632 with three-stage functions
to detect when they exceed the set thresholds. One of two different threshold
types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for
the dynamic parameters (see Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)) and the normal
thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set
thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once the time delays have
elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately
configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the DTOC protection function can optionally be blocked by the
inrush stabilization function of differential protection.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-151
Q6Z0119A
DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>
[ 035 114 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 035 115 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tI>>>
[ 035 116 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 110 ]
DTOC1:
Starting A
[ 035 104 ]
DTOC1:
Starting B
[ 035 105 ]
DTOC1:
Starting C
[ 035 106 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
tI>> PSx
076 058
077 058
078 058
079 058
DTOC1:
I>>> PSx
076 053
077 053
078 053
079 053
DTOC1:
I>>> dynamic PSx
076 153
077 153
078 153
079 153
DTOC1:
tI>>> PSx
076 059
077 059
078 059
079 059
DTOC1:
Rush restr.enabl PSx
076 063
077 063
078 063
079 063
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
I> PSx
076 051
077 051
078 051
079 051
DTOC1:
I> dynamic PSx
076 151
077 151
078 151
079 151
DTOC1:
tI> PSx
076 057
077 057
078 057
079 057
DTOC1:
I>> PSx
076 052
077 052
078 052
079 052
DTOC1:
I>> dynamic PSx
076 152
077 152
078 152
079 152
DTOC1:
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
DTOC1:
I> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
I> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
I>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
I>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
I>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
I>>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tI> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tI>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tI>>> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tI> EXT
[ 035 120 ]
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tI>> EXT
[ 035 121 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tI>>> EXT
[ 035 122 ]
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
0 t
c
0 t
c
0 t
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
Fig. 3-113: Phase current stages
P632
3 Operation
3-152 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.23.3 Negative-Sequence Current Stages
The P632 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current
values according to this equation. This is based on the setting at MAI N: Phase
sequence .
Phase sequence A-B-C:
I
neg
=
1
3

| (
I
A
+a
2
I
B
+aI
C
) |
Phase sequence A-C-B:
I
neg
=
1
3

| (
I
A
+aI
B
+a
2
I
C
) |
a = e
j120
a
2
= e
j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P632 with three-stage
functions to detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different
threshold types can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set
hold time for the dynamic parameters (see Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)) and the
normal thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current
exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started. Once the time
delays have elapsed, a trip signal is issued. The timer stages can be blocked by
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The first stage of the negative-sequence current protection function can
optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential
protection.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-153
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
64Z5074C
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
Ineg>> PSx
076 198
077 198
078 198
079 198
DTOC1:
Ineg> dynamic PSx
076 200
077 200
078 200
079 200
DTOC1:
Ineg> PSx
076 197
077 197
078 197
079 197
DTOC1:
Ineg>> dynamic PSx
076 201
077 201
078 201
079 201
DTOC1:
076 063
077 063
078 063
079 063
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
tIneg> PSx
076 203
077 203
078 203
079 203
DTOC1:
Ineg>>> dynamic PSx
076 202
077 202
078 202
079 202
DTOC1:
Ineg>>> PSx
076 199
077 199
078 199
079 199
DTOC1:
tIneg>> PSx
076 204
077 204
078 204
079 204
DTOC1:
tIneg>>> PSx
076 205
077 205
078 205
079 205
DTOC1:
Gen.starting modePSx
076 066
077 066
078 066
079 066
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>>
[ 036 152 ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>> elapsed
[ 036 149 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>>>
[ 036 153 ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>>> elapsed
[ 036 150]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg
[ 036 144 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIneg>
[ 036 151 ]
DTOC1:
tIneg> elapsed
[ 036 148 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>
[ 036 145 ]
DTOC1:
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Block. tIneg> EXT
[ 036 141 ]
DTOC1:
[ * ]
1: With start. IN/Ineg
1: Yes
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
DTOC1:
Block. tIneg>> EXT
[ 036 142 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tIneg>>> EXT
[ 036 143 ]
DTOC1:
Ineg> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Ineg> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Ineg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Ineg>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Ineg>>> PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIneg>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIneg> PSx
[ * ]
Ineg,y
Fig. 3-114: Negative-sequence current stages
3.23.4 Residual Current Stages
The residual current is monitored by the P632 with three-stage functions to
detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. One of two different threshold types
P632
3 Operation
3-154 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for the
dynamic parameters (see Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)) and the normal
thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the residual current
exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started. Once the time delays have
elapsed, a signal is issued. If the operating mode of the general starting decision
is set to With start. IN/Ineg, a trip signal is issued as well. The timer stages can
be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. In addition these
timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multipole
starting (depending on the setting).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-155
Q6Z0124A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
IN>>> PSx
076 056
077 056
078 056
079 056
DTOC1:
IN>>> dynamic PSx
076 156
077 156
078 156
079 156
DTOC1:
tIN>>> PSx
076 062
077 062
078 062
079 062
DTOC1:
076 066
077 066
078 066
079 066
DTOC1:
Block tim.st. IN PSx
076 067
077 067
078 067
079 067
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
IN> PSx
076 054
077 054
078 054
079 054
DTOC1:
IN> dynamic PSx
076 154
077 154
078 154
079 154
DTOC1:
tIN> PSx
076 060
077 060
078 060
079 060
DTOC1:
IN>> PSx
076 055
077 055
078 055
079 055
DTOC1:
IN>> dynamic PSx
076 155
077 155
078 155
079 155
DTOC1:
tIN>> PSx
076 061
077 061
078 061
079 061
DTOC1:
[ * ]
0: Without
1: For single-ph. start
0
1
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 126 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DTOC1:
Starting A
[ 035 104 ]
DTOC1:
Starting B
[ 035 105 ]
DTOC1:
Starting C
[ 035 106 ]
2: For multi-ph. start.
2
DTOC1:
IN> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
IN> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
IN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
IN>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
IN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
IN>>> dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
tIN> elapsed
[ 035 117 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIN>>
[ 035 130 ]
DTOC1:
tIN>> elapsed
[ 035 118 ]
DTOC1:
Starting IN>
[ 035 111 ]
DTOC1:
Trip signal tIN>>>
[ 035 131 ]
DTOC1:
tIN>>> elapsed
[ 035 119 ]
DTOC1:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 112 ]
DTOC1:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 113 ]
DTOC1:
Starting N
[ 035 107 ]
DTOC1:
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Enabled
[ 035 102 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tIN> EXT
[ 035 123 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tIN>> EXT
[ 035 124 ]
IN,y
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC1:
Block. tIN>>> EXT
[ 035 125 ]
0
c
t
c
c
0
c
t
c
c
0
c
t
c
c
Fig. 3-115: Residual current stages
3.23.5 General Starting
If the current exceeds one of the set thresholds of the phase current stages, a
general starting decision is issued. The user can select whether the starting of
P632
3 Operation
3-156 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
the negative-sequence and residual current stages should be taken into account
in the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A
signal is issued when the time delay of this stage has elapsed.
64Z5025A
DTOC1:
tGS elapsed
[ 035 129 ]
DTOC1:
General starting
[ 035 128 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
DTOC1:
076 066
077 066
078 066
079 066
DTOC1:
tGS PSx
076 065
077 065
078 065
079 065
DTOC1:
[ * ]
1
0
0: W/o start. IN/Ineg
DTOC1:
tGS PSx
[ * ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>
[ 036 145 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC1:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC1:
Starting N
[ 035 107 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>
[ 035 108 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>
[ 035 109 ]
DTOC1:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 110 ]
Fig. 3-116: General starting
3.23.6 Counters of the DTOC Protection Function
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Q6Z0134A
DTOC1:
No. general start.
[ 009 150 ]
DTOC1:
General starting
[ 035 128 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
R
Fig. 3-117: Counters of the DTOC protection function
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-157
3.24 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups
IDMT1 and IDMT2)
The P632 features an inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT
protection). The measured variables to be monitored by the respective IDMT
function are selected by a setting parameter.
Phase current values as well as negative-sequence and residual current
measured values are monitored.
The function group IDMT1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of
the IDMT protection functions. The same will apply to function group IDMT2.
62Z5027A
IDMT1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 106 ]
0
1
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
IN,y
0: End a
1: End b
0 , 1
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IN,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IN,b
Fig. 3-118: Selection of measured variables for IDMT protection
3.24.1 Enabling or Disabling IDMT Protection
IDMT protection can be enabled or disabled via setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
P632
3 Operation
3-158 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q6Z0128A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Enable PSx
081 050
082 050
083 050
084 050
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
IDMT1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT1:
General enable USER
[ 031 141 ]
1
Fig. 3-119: Enabling or disabling IDMT protection
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-159
3.24.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics
The measuring systems for phase currents, residual current and negative-
sequence current operate independently of each other and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negative-
sequence current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system.
The tripping characteristics available for selection are shown in the following
figures (Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-161) to Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-163)).
0 Definite Time t = k
Per IEC 2553 t = k
a
(
I
I
ref
)
b
- 1
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k (
a
(
I
I
ref
)
b
- 1
+c) t
r
=
k R
(
I
I
ref
)
2
- 1
Per ANSI t = k (
a
(
I
I
ref
)
b
- 1
+c) t
r
=
k R
(
I
I
ref
)
2
- 1
11 RI-Type Inverse t = k
1
0.339 -
0.236
(
I
I
ref
)
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k (5.8 - 1.35 ln
I
I
ref
)
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 2.0000 0.4910 21.60 19.6100
7 Extremely Inverse 2.0000 0.1217 29.10 28.2000
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 9.00 0.17966
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.50 0.03393
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 15.75 2.18592
R
No.
Tripping
Characteristic
Formula for the
Reset
Characteristic
Formula for the Tripping
Characteristic
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
Characteristic
Constants
b c a
P632
3 Operation
3-160 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 2553
Characteristic 1: IEC 2553, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 2553, Very Inverse
Characteristic 4: IEC 2553, Long Time Inverse Characteristic 3: IEC 2553, Extremely Inverse
Fig. 3-120: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-161
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
Fig. 3-121: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
P632
3 Operation
3-162 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse
Fig. 3-122: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.
IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415161718192021
I/Iref
t/s
k=0.05
k=0.1
k=1
k=10
Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Fig. 3-123: RI-type inverse and RXIDGtype inverse tripping characteristics.
3.24.3 Phase Current Stage
The three phase currents are monitored by the P632 to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The
dynamic threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic parameters
(see Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)); the normal threshold is active when no hold
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-163
time is running. The IDMT protection function will be triggered when the 1.05-fold
of the set reference current value is exceeded in one phase. The P632 will then
determine the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is
used for further processing. Depending on the characteristic selected and the
current magnitude, the P632 will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a
minimum tripping time can be set; the tripping time will not fall below this
minimum independently of the magnitude of the current.
The IDMT protection function can optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization
function of differential protection.
P632
3 Operation
3-164 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5075A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Factor kt,P PSx
081 054
082 054
083 054
084 054
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. P PSx
081 057
082 057
083 057
084 057
IDMT1:
Hold time P PSx
081 055
082 055
083 055
084 055
IDMT1:
Release P PSx
081 056
082 056
083 056
084 056
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
081 060
082 060
083 060
084 060
IDMT1:
Iref,P PSx
081 051
082 051
083 051
084 051
IDMT1:
Iref,P dynamic PSx
081 052
082 052
083 052
084 052
IDMT1:
Characteristic P PSx
081 053
082 053
083 053
084 053
0: Definite Time
Setting
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
IDMT1:
IDMT1:
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Factor kt,P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Hold time P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Release P PSx
[ * ]
Setting
IDMT1:
Release P PSx
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char.
IP,max/Iref,P
IDMT1:
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Iref,P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Iref,P dynamic PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,A>
[ 038 117 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,B>
[ 038 118 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,C>
[ 038 119 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
IDMT1:
Memory P clear
[ 038 113 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
IDMT1:
Block. tIref,P> EXT
[ 038 114 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
1.05 Iref
Fig. 3-124: Phase current stage
3.24.4 Negative-Sequence Current Stage
The P632 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current
values according to this equation. This is based on the setting at MAI N: Phase
sequence .
Phase sequence A-B-C:
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-165
I
neg
=
1
3

| (
I
A
+a
2
I
B
+aI
C
) |
Phase sequence A-C-B:
I
neg
=
1
3

| (
I
A
+aI
B
+a
2
I
C
) |
a = e
j120
a
2
= e
j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P632 to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active.
The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for the dynamic
parameters (see Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)) and the normal thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the
1.05-fold of the set reference current value is exceeded. Dependent on the
characteristic selected and the negative-sequence current magnitude the P632
will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum tripping time can be
set; the tripping time will not fall below this minimum independent of the
magnitude of the current.
The negative-sequence current stage of the IDMT protection function can
optionally be blocked by the inrush stabilization function of differential
protection.
P632
3 Operation
3-166 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
64Z5076C
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Hold time neg PSx
081 115
082 115
083 115
084 115
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. neg PSx
081 117
082 117
083 117
084 117
IDMT1:
Factor kt,neg PSx
081 114
082 114
083 114
084 114
IDMT1:
Release neg PSx
081 116
082 116
083 116
084 116
IDMT1:
081 059
082 059
083 059
084 059
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Iref,neg dynamic PSx
081 112
082 112
083 112
084 112
IDMT1:
Iref,neg PSx
081 111
082 111
083 111
084 111
IDMT1:
081 060
082 060
083 060
084 060
IDMT1:
Character. neg. PSx
081 113
082 113
083 113
084 113
IDMT1:
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Iref,neg PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Iref,neg dynamic PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Character. neg. PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Factor kt,neg PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. neg PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Hold time neg PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Release neg PSx
[ * ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg.
[ 041 120 ]
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
IDMT1:
Block.tIref,neg> EXT
[ 038 178 ]
Ineg/Iref,neg
IDMT1:
Release neg PSx
Setting
1: Without delay
Ineg
1.05 Iref
0: No
1: Yes
Setting
IDMT1:
Character. neg. PSx
2: IEC Very Inverse
11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMT1:
Memory 'neg' clear
[ 038 176 ]
IDMT1:
Trip sig. tIref,neg>
[ 038 177 ]
IDMT1:
tIref,neg> elapsed
[ 038 174 ]
IDMT1:
Hold time neg runn.
[ 038 175 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 038 173 ]
0
1
Fig. 3-125: Negative-sequence current stage
3.24.5 Residual Current Stage
The residual current is monitored by the P632 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The dynamic
threshold is active for the set hold time for the dynamic parameters (see
Section 3.12.6, (p. 3-86)) and the normal threshold is active when no hold time
is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-167
reference current value is exceeded by the residual current. Dependent on the
characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P632 will
determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no
circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the
residual current flow magnitude.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked
by singlepole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
P632
3 Operation
3-168 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5077A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Factor kt,N PSx
081 064
082 064
083 064
084 064
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. N PSx
081 067
082 067
083 067
084 067
IDMT1:
Hold time N PSx
081 065
082 065
083 065
084 065
IDMT1:
Release N PSx
081 066
082 066
083 066
084 066
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
081 068
082 068
083 068
084 068
IDMT1:
Iref,N PSx
081 061
082 061
083 061
084 061
IDMT1:
Iref,N dynamic PSx
081 062
082 062
083 062
084 062
IDMT1:
Characteristic N PSx
081 063
082 063
083 063
084 063
IDMT1:
081 059
082 059
083 059
084 059
IDMT1:
tIref,N> elapsed
[ 038 121 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 038 120 ]
IDMT1:
Hold time N running
[ 038 122 ]
IDMT1:
Memory N clear
[ 038 123 ]
IDMT1:
Trip signal tIref,N>
[ 038 126 ]
IDMT1:
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Factor kt,N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Min. trip t. N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Hold time N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Release N PSx
[ * ]
Setting
2: IEC Very Inverse
11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMT1:
Setting
IDMT1:
Release N PSx
1: Without delay
IDMT1:
[ * ]
1
0
2
0: Without
1: For single-ph. start
2: For multi-ph. start.
IDMT1:
Iref,N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT1:
Iref,N dynamic PSx
[ * ]
1.05 Iref
|IN|/Iref,G
IDMT1:
Enabled
[ 038 125 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MAIN:
[ 040 090 ]
IDMT1:
Block. tIref,N> EXT
[ 038 124 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,A>
[ 038 117 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,B>
[ 038 118 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,C>
[ 038 119 ]
IN,y
IDMT1:
[ * ]
0: Definite Time
Fig. 3-126: Residual current stage
3.24.6 Hold Time
The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the IDMT
protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. Should
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-169
starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the renewed starting
will be added to the time period stored. When the starting times sum reach the
tripping time value determined by the P632 then the corresponding signal will be
issued. Should starting not recur during the hold time period then, depending on
the setting, the memory storing the accumulated starting times value will either
be cleared without delay or according to the characteristic set. In Fig. 3-127,
(p. 3-170), the effect of the hold time is shown by the example of a phase
current stage.
Q6Z0131A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
Hold time P PSx
081 055
082 055
083 055
084 055
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ]
Case A
Case B
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
Non-delayed
Per characteristic
Determ. trip time
IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ]
IDMT1:
Hold time P running
[ 038 112 ]
600 ms
400 ms
200 ms
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
Determ. trip time
600 ms
400 ms
200 ms
IDMT1:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 038 111 ]
200 ms 200 ms
200 ms 450 ms
Fig. 3-127: The effect of the hold time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.
Case B: The determined tripping time is reached.
P632
3 Operation
3-170 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.24.7 General Starting
A general starting is triggered if the current in one phase exceeds the 1.05-fold
of the set reference current value. It can be selected whether the starting of the
negativesequence and residual current stages should be taken into account in
the general starting decision. The general starting triggers a timer stage. A signal
is issued when the time period of this stage has elapsed.
64Z5032A
IDMT1:
tGS elapsed
[ 038 116 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
IDMT1:
081 059
082 059
083 059
084 059
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,neg>
[ 038 173 ] IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
IDMT1:
tGS PSx
081 058
082 058
083 058
084 058
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,N>
[ 038 120 ]
IDMT1:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 038 110 ]
IDMT1:
[ * ]
1
0
0: W/o start. IN/Ineg
IDMT1:
tGS PSx
[ * ]
Fig. 3-128: General starting
3.24.8 Counters of the IDMT Protection Function
The number of general starts is counted. The counter can be reset individually.
Q6Z0133A
IDMT1:
No. general start.
[ 009 151 ]
IDMT1:
General starting
[ 038 115 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
R
Fig. 3-129: Counters of the IDMT protection function
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-171
3.25 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THRM1)
The thermal overload protection function has been designed for overload
protection of transformers. The measured values to be monitored are selected
using a setting parameter.
THRM1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 109 ]
0
1
0: End a
1: End b
0 , 1
62Z5079A
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IP,max,y
IP,max,a
IP,max,b
COMP
COMP
Fig. 3-130: Selection of measured values for thermal overload protection
3.25.1 Enabling or Disabling Thermal Overload Protection
Thermal overload protection may be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
64Z5017A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
THRM1:
Enable PSx
081 070
082 070
083 070
084 070
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ]
THRM1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
THRM1:
General enable USER
[ 031 144 ]
1
Fig. 3-131: Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection
P632
3 Operation
3-172 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.25.2 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection
Thermal overload protection will issue the THRM1: Not ready signal if one of
the following conditions applies:
Thermal overload protection is disabled.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant
temperature (ambient) acquisition.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
64Z5190A
THRM1:
Not ready
[ 039 154 ]
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ]
THRM1:
Replica block EXT
[ 039 150 ]
THRM1:
Setting error,block.
[ 039 126 ]
THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
305 221
Fig. 3-132: THRM1: Not ready
3.25.3 Tripping Characteristics
The maximum phase current IP,max.y of the selected transformer end is used to
track a first-order thermal replica according to IEC 255-8. The following
parameters will govern the tripping parameters:
The set thermal time constant () of the protected object
THRM1: Ti m. const. 1, >I bl PSx
The tripping threshold
trip
set at THRM1: Rel . O/T tri p PSx
The accumulated thermal load
0
The updated measured coolant temperature
c
for the protected object
The maximum permissible coolant temperature
c,max
set at
THRM1: Max. perm. cool . tmpPSx
The maximum permissible object temperature
max
set at
THRM1: Max. perm. obj . tmp. PSx
The object temperature is calculated from the current I
P,max.y
and can be
displayed at THRM1: Obj ect temperat. , TH1. The coolant temperature is
either measured via the PT 100 input or via a 20 mA input, or a default
temperature value is used instead. This choice is governed by the setting at
THRM1: Sel ect CTA PSx. The coolant temperature is displayed at
THRM1: Cool ant temp. TH1 . The difference between the settings for the
maximum permissible temperatures of the protected object and the coolant can
be displayed at THRM1: O/T f. I ref persi st 1.
The tripping characteristics are then defined by the equation:
t = ln
(
I
I
ref
)
2

0
(
I
I
ref
)
2

trip
(
1

c

c,max
max

c,max
)
The setting for the operating mode selects an absolute or relative replica. If
the setting is for Absolute replica, the P632 will operate with a fixed trip
threshold
trip
of 100 %.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-173
/ %
t / min
I / I
D5Z50BEB_EN
/ min
1000
30
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
1000
10000
0.001
200
110
50
200
110
50
200
110
50
ref
Fig. 3-133: Tripping characteristic of the thermal overload protection.
Tripping characteristics apply to
0
= 0 % and identical settings for the
maximum permissible coolant and the updated measurement of the object
temperature.
3.25.4 Coolant Temperature Acquisition
To permit acquisition of the coolant temperature, an analogue I/O module Y must
be fitted to the P632. If this module is not present then the setting at
THRM1: Defaul t CTA PSx is used in the calculation of the tripping time.
pThe setting at THRM1: Bl . f. CTA faul t PSx defines whether the thermal
overload protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.
P632
3 Operation
3-174 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5019A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
THRM1:
Select CTA PSx
081 072
082 072
083 072
084 072
THRM1:
Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
081 073
082 073
083 073
084 073
THRM1:
Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
THRM1:
Select CTA PSx
[ * ]
1
0
2
0: Default temp. value
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
SFMON:
CTA error THRM1
[ 098 036 ]
THRM1:
CTA error
[ 039 127 ]
THRM1:
With CTA
305 222
THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
305 221
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
THRM1:
CTA error EXT
[ 039 152 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI:
[ 040 192 ]
Fig. 3-134: Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition (ambient temperature input)
3.25.5 Warning Signal
A warning signal is issued when the thermal load reaches the warning level set at
THRM1: Rel . O/T warni ng PSx. Moreover, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-
trip time) can be set. When the time left until tripping falls below the setting at
THRM1: Warni ng pre-tri p PSx, a warning signal will be issued.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 I
ref
, the buffer is discharged
with the time constant set at THRM1: Ti m. const. 2, <I bl PSx. The thermal
replica may be reset from the local control panel or via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload
protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-175
64Z5118A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
THRM1:
Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
081 080
082 080
083 080
084 080
THRM1:
Default CTA PSx
081 081
082 081
083 081
084 081
THRM1:
Rel. O/T warning PSx
081 079
082 079
083 079
084 079
THRM1:
Rel. O/T trip PSx
081 076
082 076
083 076
084 076
THRM1:
Hysteresis trip PSx
081 078
082 078
083 078
084 078
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
THRM1:
Iref PSx
081 074
082 074
083 074
084 074
THRM1:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
081 075
082 075
083 075
084 075
THRM1:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
081 082
082 082
083 082
084 082
THRM1:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
081 083
082 083
083 083
084 083
THRM1:
Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
081 077
082 077
083 077
084 077
THRM1:
Warning pre-trip PSx
081 085
082 085
083 085
084 085
THRM1:
Pre-trip t. left,TH1
[ 004 153 ]
THRM1:
Coolant temp. TH1
[ 004 154 ]
THRM1:
Object temperat.,TH1
[ 004 151 ]
THRM1:
Status replica, TH1
[ 004 150 ]
THRM1:
Trip signal
[ 039 123 ]
THRM1:
Warning
[ 039 124 ]
THRM1:
Setting error,block.
[ 039 126 ]
THRM1:
Within pre-trip time
[ 039 153 ]
SFMON:
Setting error THRM1
[ 098 038 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
THRM1:
Temp. offset repl. 1
[ 004 170 ]
THRM1:
Stat. repl., p.u.TH1
[ 004 204 ]
THRM1:
Object temp. p.u. 1
[ 004 205 ]
THRM1:
Coolant temp. p.u. 1
[ 004 206 ]
THRM1:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 039 151 ]
THRM1:
I
305 220
THRM1:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Default CTA PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Rel. O/T warning PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Rel. O/T trip PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Hysteresis trip PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Warning pre-trip PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Operating mode
[ 039 121 ]
1: Absolute replica
2: Relative replica
1
2
< 0.1Iref
I/Iref
THRM1:
Iref PSx
[ * ]
THRM1:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
[ * ]
kPIref
AR_MV
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IP,max,y
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ]
THRM1:
Block. by CTA error
305 221
Coolant temperature
THRM1:
Reset replica
[ 039 125 ]
THRM1:
With CTA
305 222
THRM1:
Replica block EXT
[ 039 150 ]
Fig. 3-135: Thermal overload protection
P632
3 Operation
3-176 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5020A
THRM1:
Reset replica USER
[ * ]
1
0
0: don't execute
1: execute
THRM1:
Reset replica
[ 039 125 ]
THRM1:
Enabled
[ 039 129 ]
THRM1:
Reset replica EXT
[ 039 122 ]
Fig. 3-136: Resetting the thermal replica
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-177
3.26 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>)
The two-stage time-voltage protection function provided by the P632 evaluates
the fundamental wave of the phase voltages.
3.26.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3.26.2 V<> Protection Readiness
V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the
voltage-measuring circuit by the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
S9Z5006A
V<>:
Enabled
[ 040 066 ]
V<>:
Enable PSx
076 000
077 000
078 000
079 000
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
1
0
V<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
Not ready
[ 042 004 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
Fig. 3-137: Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection.
3.26.3 Voltage Monitoring
The P632 checks the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below a set
threshold. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands,
then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip
command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected,
and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
Furthermore, time-voltage protection provides a time-window for each timer
stage. The windows are defined by the setting V<>: Vmi n> PSx as lower
threshold for both timer stages and by the set operate value V< or V<< of the
relevant timer stage and parameter subset as upper threshold. With an
appropriate setting of the successive timer stages, this provision can be used to
bridge short periods of voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
P632
3 Operation
3-178 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
S9Z5007A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V<>:
V> PSx
076 003
077 003
078 003
079 003
V<>:
tV> PSx
076 005
077 005
078 005
079 005
V<>:
V>> PSx
076 004
077 004
078 004
079 004
V<>:
tV>> PSx
076 006
077 006
078 006
079 006
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
076 048
077 048
078 048
079 048
V<>:
tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT
[ 041 069 ]
t 0
t 0
c
c
c
c
Fig. 3-138: Overvoltage monitoring
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-179
64Z8008A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V<>:
V<< PSx
076 008
077 008
078 008
079 008
V<>:
tV<< PSx
076 010
077 010
078 010
079 010
V<>:
tTransient PSx
076 029
077 029
078 029
079 029
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
076 048
077 048
078 048
079 048
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V<>:
V< PSx
076 007
077 007
078 007
079 007
V<>:
tV< PSx
076 009
077 009
078 009
079 009
V<>:
Vmin> PSx
076 046
077 046
078 046
079 046
V<>:
tV< elapsed
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed & Vmin>
[ 041 026 ]
V<>:
Starting V<
[ 041 037 ]
V<>:
Fault V<
[ 041 110 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed & Vmin>
[ 041 066 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
V<>:
Starting V<<
[ 041 099 ]
V<>:
Fault V<<
[ 041 112 ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ]
V<>:
tV</<< elaps. trans.
[ 042 007 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV<< EXT
[ 041 071 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vmin> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV<< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tTransient PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
Setting(s) blocked
t 0
t 0
t 0
t 0
c
c
c
c
c
t 1
t 1
Fig. 3-139: Undervoltage monitoring
P632
3 Operation
3-180 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.27 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P632 monitors the voltage to determine whether its frequency exceeds or
falls below set thresholds. The frequency is determined from the difference in
time between the zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/
underfrequency protection function has four stages. Subsequently, the operation
of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained using the first stage as an
example.
3.27.1 Disabling or Enabling Over/Underfrequency Protection
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
F5Z0104C
f<>:
Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
f<>:
Not ready
[ 042 140 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Enable PSx
018 196
018 197
018 198
018 199
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
Fig. 3-140: Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-181
3.27.2 Undervoltage Blocking and Evaluation Time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient
magnitude. Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if
the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
47Z0151A
f<>:
VMeas
305 725
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
305 726
f<>:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
Fig. 3-141: Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting.
3.27.3 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can
choose between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring
(f/t)
3.27.4 Frequency Monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P632 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P632 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P632 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
P632
3 Operation
3-182 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.27.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency
Gradient Monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the
frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is
reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set
threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3.27.6 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient
Monitoring (f/t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual
substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-
shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for underfrequency monitoring.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within
the set time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the t/f monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-183
F5Z0128C
Start t Start t
t t
f
f<
Function blocked
Trip f/t
f
t
Fig. 3-142: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring.
P632
3 Operation
3-184 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z8053A
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
018 120
018 121
018 122
018 123
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
f<>:
f1 PSx
018 100
018 101
018 102
018 103
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
018 108
018 109
018 110
018 111
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
018 112
018 113
018 114
018 115
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
018 116
018 117
018 118
018 119
f<>:
tf1 PSx
018 104
018 105
018 106
018 107
f<>:
Trip signal f1
[ 042 111 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
Setting error f<>
[ 098 028 ]
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas
305 726
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1: f
1
2
3
2: f with df/dt
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t
f<>:
f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
tf1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
Start. cond. met
f/t
Start. cond. met
f>
Fig. 3-143: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-185
3.27.7 f
min
/f
max
Measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
f<>: Mi n. frequ. for f<
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
f<>: Reset meas. val . USER
P632
3 Operation
3-186 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.28 Overfluxing Protection (Function Group V/f)
The overfluxing protection function will detect an inadmissibly high induction B in
the iron core of transformers which may have been caused either by a voltage
increase and/or a frequency decrease.
3.28.1 Enabling or Disabling Overfluxing Protection
The overfluxing protection function can be enabled or disabled using setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
64Z5191A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
Enable PSx
081 210
082 210
083 210
084 210
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
V/f:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
V/f:
General enable USER
[ 019 097 ]
1
Fig. 3-144: Enabling or disabling overfluxing protection
3.28.2 Conditioning the Measured Value
The overfluxing protection function will evaluate the voltage to frequency (V/f)
ratio referred to nominal values. This ratio is proportional to the induction in the
iron core of a transformer. The overfluxing measurement is not enabled unless
the voltage and frequency values are within limits for admissible values.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-187
64Z5193A
V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u.
[ 004 220 ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
402 650
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
V
V/f
> 0.5 fnom
< 1.5 fnom
> 0.5 Vnom
Fig. 3-145: Conditioning of measured value
3.28.3 Fixed-time Warning Stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set
threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this
threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
64Z5192A
V/f:
tV/f> elapsed
[ 041 231 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f>
[ 041 230 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
V/f> (alarm) PSx
081 211
082 211
083 211
084 211
V/f:
tV/f> PSx
081 214
082 214
083 214
084 214
V/f:
V/f> (alarm) PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
tV/f> PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V/f:
Block. tV/f> EXT
[ 035 196 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
402 650
V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u.
[ 004 220 ]
Fig. 3-146: Warning stage
3.28.4 Fixed-time Tripping Stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds a set
threshold. A timer stage is triggered when the overfluxing value exceeds this
threshold and a signal is issued when the time delay has elapsed.
P632
3 Operation
3-188 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5195A
V/f:
tV/f>> elapsed
[ 041 235 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f>>
[ 041 234 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
V/f>> PSx
081 213
082 213
083 213
084 213
V/f:
tV/f>> PSx
081 229
082 229
083 229
084 229
V/f:
V/f>> PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
tV/f>> PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
402 650
V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u.
[ 004 220 ]
V/f:
Block. tV/f>> EXT
[ 035 199 ]
Fig. 3-147: Fixed-time tripping stage
3.28.5 Variable-time Tripping Stage
The overfluxing value (V/f) is monitored to determine whether it exceeds the set
threshold. When the overfluxing value exceeds this threshold the P632 will
determine the tripping time according to the overfluxing magnitude value and
the set characteristic.
The variable-time tripping characteristic is set by defining 12 pairs of overfluxing
values and their associated tripping time values. Intermediate values are
obtained by interpolation. The setting of the characteristic is checked for
plausibility with regard to a monotonically decreasing characteristic. With values
of V/f > 1.6 the tripping time is limited to the value set for V/f = 1.6. The tripping
characteristic with default setting values is displayed in Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-190).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-189

1
10
100
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
V/f
t/s
P1852ENa

1
10
100
1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 1.60 1.70 1.80 1.90 2.00
V/f
t/s
P1852ENa
Fig. 3-148: Example of a tripping characteristic (with default settings)
After a starting, the elapsed starting time is accumulated in a buffer. When the
starting drops out, the buffer memory is discharged. The discharge gradient is
defined by the set cooling time. When the starting recurs the buffer memory is
again accumulated with starting time values. If the accumulated starting time
reaches the tripping time value determined by the P632 then the trip signal will
be issued. The buffer memory content during an interrupted starting is shown in
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-191). In case A, the tripping time determined by the P632 is not
reached by the accumulated starting time. In case B, on the other hand, a trip
signal is issued.
P632
3 Operation
3-190 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5197A
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f(t)
[ 041 232 ]
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f(t)
[ 041 232 ]
Determ. trip time
Determ. trip time
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
Reset time PSx
081 230
082 230
083 230
084 230
Case A
Case B
5.5 s 2 s
2 s
4 s
6 s
2 s
4 s
6 s
2 s 2 s
Fig. 3-149: Buffer memory content during a starting
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-191
64Z5194A
V/f:
Trip signal tV/f(t)
[ 041 233 ]
V/f:
Status replica in %
[ 004 222 ]
V/f:
Buffer empty
[ 041 236 ]
V/f:
Status replica p.u.
[ 004 223 ]
V/f:
Starting V/f(t)
[ 041 232 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
t at V/f=1.35 PSx
081 223
082 223
083 223
084 223
V/f:
t at V/f=1.40 PSx
081 224
082 224
083 224
084 224
V/f:
t at V/f=1.45 PSx
081 225
082 225
083 225
084 225
V/f:
t at V/f=1.50 PSx
081 226
082 226
083 226
084 226
V/f:
t at V/f=1.55 PSx
081 227
082 227
083 227
084 227
V/f:
t at V/f=1.60 PSx
081 228
082 228
083 228
084 228
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
V/f(t)> PSx
081 212
082 212
083 212
084 212
V/f:
Reset time PSx
081 230
082 230
083 230
084 230
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
V/f:
t at V/f=1.05 PSx
081 217
082 217
083 217
084 217
V/f:
t at V/f=1.10 PSx
081 218
082 218
083 218
084 218
V/f:
t at V/f=1.15 PSx
081 219
082 219
083 219
084 219
V/f:
t at V/f=1.20 PSx
081 220
082 220
083 220
084 220
V/f:
t at V/f=1.25 PSx
081 221
082 221
083 221
084 221
V/f:
t at V/f=1.30 PSx
081 222
082 222
083 222
084 222
V/f:
t at V/f=1.05 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.10 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.15 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.20 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.25 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.30 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.35 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.40 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.45 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.50 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.55 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
t at V/f=1.60 PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
Reset time PSx
[ * ]
V/f:
V/f(t)> PSx
[ * ]
Setting(s) blocked
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
V/f:
Enable meas.
402 650
V/f:
Excitation V/f p.u.
[ 004 220 ]
V/f:
Block. replica EXT
[ 035 197 ]
V/f:
Reset replica
[ 035 184 ]
Fig. 3-150: Variable-time tripping stage
P632
3 Operation
3-192 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5196A
V/f:
Reset replica
[ 035 184 ]
V/f:
Enabled
[ 041 229 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
V/f:
Reset replica EXT
[ 035 182 ]
V/f:
Reset replica USER
[ 035 183 ]
0: don't execute
1
0
1: execute
1 100ms
Fig. 3-151: Resetting of the thermal replica
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-193
3.29 Current Transformer Supervision (Function Group CTS)
The current transformer supervision function can prevent unwanted tripping by
differential protection for faults in the CT's secondary circuit.
3.29.1 Hardware requirement
The CTS function can only be used if the processor board with DSP coprocessor is
fitted!
3.29.2 Enabling or Disabling the CTS Function
The current transformer supervision function can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
0
CTS:
General enable USER
[ 031 085 ]
1
0: No
0
CTS:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0: No
&
CTS:
Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
64Z5300B
PSU:
PS y active
[ ** ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
CTS:
Enable PSx
001 118
001 119
001 120
001 121
PSU:
PS y active
036 090
036 091
036 092
036 093
y
1
2
3
4
*
1: Yes
**
1: Yes
Fig. 3-152: Enabling or disabling the CT Supervision
3.29.3 Blocking CTS
Current transformer supervision is blocked if one of the following conditions
applies:
Protection is disabled (off).
The CTS function is not enabled.
An external blocking signal is present.
The general trip signal is present.
Inrush stabilization or overfluxing restraint have operated.
P632
3 Operation
3-194 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z5301A
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
CTS:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 160 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 1 trigg.
[ 041 118 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 2 trigg.
[ 041 119 ]
DIFF:
Harm.block 3 trigg. [ 041 120 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 036 251 ]
CTS:
Enabled
[ 036 080 ]
CTS:
blocked
460 400
1
1
Fig. 3-153: Blocking of current transformer supervision
3.29.4 Monitoring Condition
If CTS is ready, it will monitor the positive- and negative-sequence currents from
both transformer ends (a, b).
A CT fault is detected when the following conditions are simultaneously present:
The positive-sequence current exceeds the set threshold I
pos>
in both
winding ends. This means that CTS can operate only if a minimum load
current is present in the protected object.
The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio exceeds a high set
threshold value I
neg
/I
pos>>
in a single winding end.
In the other end, the negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is smaller
than the low set threshold value I
neg
/I
pos>
, or no significant current is
present (i.e. the positive-sequence current is lower than the I
pos>
threshold).
In such a case, there is a fault in the secondary circuit of the CT at the
transformer end where a high negative-sequence current is present.
Because this function uses negative-sequence currents, it can only detect
unbalanced CT faults. In practice, this does not present a problem as the
occurrence of a three-pole CT fault is very unlikely.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-195
CTS:
blocked
460 400
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
Ipos
Ineg
Ineg/Ipos
c
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx
[ * ]
c
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
[ * ]
c
CTS:
Ipos> PSx
[ * ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
CTS:
Ipos> PSx
001 111
001 115
001 116
001 117
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx
001 102
001 103
001 104
001 105
CTS:
Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
001 122
001 123
001 124
001 125
64Z5302A
Ipos>,y
Ineg/Ipos>,y
Ineg/Ipos>>,y
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
*
Fig. 3-154: Current evaluation referring to the respective end
62Z5303A
CTS:
blocked
460 400
Ipos>,a
Ineg/Ipos>,a
Ipos>,b
Ineg/Ipos>,b
Ineg/Ipos>>,a
Ineg/Ipos>>,b
=(N-1)
&
&
CTS:
End a faulty
460 471
&
CTS:
End b faulty
460 472
1
1
2
=1
Fig. 3-155: CTS triggering condition
N represents the number of transformer ends, that is N = 2 (a, b).
3.29.5 Signaling and Indication
Triggering of the CTS function is signaled by multiple signals as well as by single
signals referring to the respective ends. Beside the updated signals latched
signals are also available in order to achieve stable signaling behavior and a
permanent differential protection characteristic with reduced sensitivity when,
for instance, intermittent faults have occurred. The updated signal as well as the
stored signal are time-delayed in order to suppress any signaling caused by a
P632
3 Operation
3-196 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
transient event. On the other hand, instantaneous signals are used to block or
restrain the differential protection functions as fast as possible:
As soon as a CTS condition is detected (CTS: I di ff>(CTS)acti ve is
present), the function will raise the differential protection low set threshold
to the DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx setting; see Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-197).
The setting for this value determines the CTS operating mode:
Signaling only:
DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx = DI FF: I di ff> PSx. Differential protection
remains unrestricted, but there is a risk of unwanted tripping occurring
under load current.
Restricted operation:
DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx = maximum load current. This will permit the
safe differential protection behavior, even during CT failure. There will be
no unwanted trip under any load condition, but protection will remain
operational for internal faults with currents exceeding the load current.
Blocking:
DI FF: I di ff>(CTS) PSx = DI FF: I di ff>> PSx. In practice differential
protection is blocked for all currents under normal operating conditions.
1 2 3
1
0
Idiff
I
R
Load line
for single side infeed
I
diff
>
I
R,m2
m
1
m
2
I
diff
>(CTS)
64Z6030A_EN
Fig. 3-156: Modification of the differential protection triggering characteristic with CTS active
3.29.6 Reset
Latched CTS signals can be reset using control parameters or through an
appropriately configured binary signal input as well as by a general reset
command.
3.29.7 Multiple Signaling from the CTS Function
The signals issued by the CTS function (and/or measuring circuit monitoring, see
Section 3.30, (p. 3-199)) are combined into the MAI N: Meas. ci rc. I faul ty
signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by the self-monitoring function.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-197
62Z5304A
CTS:
End a faulty
460 471
CTS:
End b faulty
CTS:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 036 158 ]
CTS:
Reset latch. USER
[ 036 157 ]
1
0
1 100 ms
1: execute
0: don't execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
t 0
CTS:
t(Latch) PSx
[ * ]
1
1
1
S
R
t 0
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
[ * ]
CTS:
Operated (updating)
[ 036 099 ]
CTS:
Operated (latched)
[ 036 202 ]
CTS:
Idiff>(CTS)active
[ 036 203 ]
CTS:
Reset
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
001 126
001 127
001 128
001 129
CTS:
t(Latch) PSx
001 130
001 131
001 132
001 133
1 500 ms
*
1: execute
1
1
1
460 450
460 472
Fig. 3-157: CTS overreaching signals.
64Z5305B
CTS:
End a faulty
460 471
t 0
CTS:
t(Latch) PSx
[ * ]
1
1
1
S
R
t 0
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
[ * ]
CTS:
Alarm end a (updat.)
[ ** ]
CTS:
Reset
460 450
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
CTS:
t(Alarm) PSx
001 126
001 127
001 128
001 129
CTS:
t(Latch) PSx
001 130
001 131
001 132
001 133
CTS:
Alarm end a (latch.)
[ ** ]
CTS:
Alarm end a
[ ** ]
End a
End b
End c
End d
CTS:
Alarm end a (updat.)
036 081
CTS:
Alarm end a (latch.)
036 204
CTS:
Alarm end a
036 205
036 082 036 206 036 207
036 083 036 208 036 209
036 084 036 210 036 211
** *
1
Fig. 3-158: CTS signals per end.
P632
3 Operation
3-198 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.30 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Groups MCM_1 and
MCM_2)
The measuring-circuit monitoring function featured by the P632 will detect faults
in the secondary circuits of the CTs. Measuring-circuit monitoring functions
MCM_1 and MCM_2 are permanently assigned to the transformer ends monitored
by the P632.
Function group MCM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
measuring-circuit monitoring functions. The same will apply to function group
MCM_2.
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
The measuring-circuit monitoring function can be enabled or disabled using
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter set.
64Z5186A
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
MCM_1:
Enable PSx
081 038
082 038
083 038
084 038
MCM_1:
Enabled
[ 036 194 ]
MCM_1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
0
0: No
1: Yes
MCM_1:
General enable USER
[ 031 146 ]
1
Fig. 3-159: Enabling or disabling measuring-circuit monitoring
3.30.2 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
The negative- to positive-sequence current ratio is used as a criterion for
measuring-circuit monitoring. The measuring-circuit monitoring function is
triggered when the set ratio value, I
neg
/I
pos
, is exceeded and either the negative-
or the positive-sequence current exceeds 0.02 I
nom
. After the set operate time-
delay has elapsed, a warning is issued.
The measuring-circuit monitoring functions can be used to detect broken
conductors on the CTs' primary sides.
The functions can now be blocked individually via input signals set at
MCM_x: Blocking EXT.
When the triggering condition is met an instantaneous starting signal is
raised: (MCM_x: Starting).
In the following logic diagram, the measuring-circuit monitoring function is
displayed using function group MCM_1 as an example.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-199
IA,a
IA,a
IA,a
Ineg/Ipos
c
MCM_1:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx
[ * ]
c
c
MCM_1:
Enabled
[ 036 194 ]
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MCM_1:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 213 ]
>0.02 Inom
>0.02 Inom
Ineg
Ipos
5s 0
c
MCM_1:
Operate delay PSx
[ * ]
SFMON:
Meas. c. I faulty, a
[ 091 026 ]
64Z5187B
MCM_1:
[ 036 198 ]
MCM_1:
Starting
[ 036 212 ]
Parameter
set 1
set 2
set 3
set 4
MCM_1:
Operate delay PSx
081 046
082 046
083 046
084 046
MCM_1:
Ineg/Ipos> PSx
081 042
082 042
083 042
084 042
1
Fig. 3-160: Measuring-circuit monitoring for end a
3.30.3 Multiple Signaling from the Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
Function
The signals issued by the measuring-circuit monitoring function (and/or current
transformer supervision, see Section 3.29, (p. 3-194)) are grouped to form the
MAI N: Meas. ci rc. I faul ty multiple signal. A signal is simultaneously issued by
the self-monitoring function.
62Z5185A
MAIN:
Meas. circ.I faulty
[ 036 155 ]
MCM_1:
[ 036 198 ]
SFMON:
[ 091 018 ]
MCM_2:
[ 036 199 ]
Fig. 3-161: Signals issued by the measuring-circuit monitoring function
P632
3 Operation
3-200 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.31 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1
and CBF_2)
The P632 features circuit breaker failure (CBF) protection functions. After a trip
command has been issued the CBF function checks that the circuit breaker has
actually been opened.
The CBF function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function may
be applied to each end on the protected object.
The following specifications apply to assigning the CBF protection functions to
the physical measured current values and the internal logical signals.
3.31.1 Assigning Transformer Ends
The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected
using setting parameters:
Address Description Range of values
022 156 CBF_1: Sel ect. meas. i nput End a
End b
022 157 CBF_2: Sel ect. meas. i nput
3.31.2 Assigning Circuit Breakers
Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers
CBx. This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the
MAIN function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the
assignment of circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.
3.31.3 Assigning the Trip Command
Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective
CBF function may be selected by setting parameters:
Address Description Range of Values
022 202 CBF_1: Fct. assi gn. starti ng MAI N: Gen. tri p si gnal 1
022 216 CBF_2: Fct. assi gn. starti ng
The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection
function CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function group CBF_2
provides the same functional range.
3.31.4 Enabling or Disabling the CBF Function
The activation of the function is enabled at CBF_1: General enabl e USER . If
this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be enabled or disabled via
setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The
front panel HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If
only the function CBF_1: Enabl e EXT is assigned to a binary signal input, then
CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a
negative edge. If only the parameter CBF_1: Di sabl e EXT has been assigned
to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-201
64Z1101A
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
038 042
CBF_1:
Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF_1:
Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
038 041
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
CBF_1:
General enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
0: No
1
CBF_1:
Enable USER
[ 003 016 ]
0: don't execute
CBF_1:
Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0: don't execute
0
1
0
1
CBF_1:
Ext./user enabled
[ 038 040 ]
CBF_1:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
1: Yes
Address
Address
1: execute
1: execute
Fig. 3-162: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker failure protection, illustrated for CBF_1
3.31.5 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following
conditions be met:
The CBF function is not activated.
Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to Blocked.
P632
3 Operation
3-202 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
CBF_1:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF_1:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1:
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
CBF_1:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
CBF_1:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
CBF_1:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
CBF_1:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF_1:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
64Z1102B
blocked
blocked
blocked
blocked
blocked
&
&
CBF_1:
Ready
[ 038 009 ]
Fig. 3-163: CBF readiness
3.31.6 Detecting a CB Tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB
tripping. Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent
on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from
CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.
3.31.7 Current flow monitoring
The current flow monitoring function is used to detect a break in current flow
safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously
compares sampled current values from the selected end with the set threshold
value CBF_1: I < . As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective
signals CBF_1: Current fl ow A , CBF_1: Current fl ow B , CBF_1: Current
fl ow C and the multiple signal CBF_1: Current fl ow Phx will be continuously
issued.
In addition to this line-associated current flow monitoring function a residual
current monitoring function is available which can be enabled/disabled.
For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value
derived from the three phase currents may be used.
Note that this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual
current is available.
As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the
current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (CBF_1: Current
fl ow N ) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no
monitoring is carried out and the CBF_1: Current fl ow N = No signal is issued
continuously.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-203
64Z1103C
CBF_1:
Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
IA
IB
IC
CBF_1:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
CBF_1:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF_1:
Current flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
CBF_1:
IN<
[ 022 180 ]
CBF_1:
Evaluation IN
[ 022 184 ]
0
1
2
0: Without
2 IN
1 ... 2
CBF_1:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
CBF:
IN
460 394
1
1: Calculated
2: Measured
1
c1
c2
CBF_1:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
+
+
+
Fig. 3-164: Current flow monitoring
3.31.8 Evaluation of CB Status Signals
Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals
provided by the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can
be selected with the parameter CBF_1: Fct. assi gnm. CBAux. .
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.
The P632 can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate
them:
The Open signal from the circuit breaker, MAI N: CB1 open 3p EXT
The Closed signal from the circuit breaker, MAI N: CB1 cl osed 3p EXT
Note that each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective
CBF_x function. In the following description, CB1 is used as an example.
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the
respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will
result in the P632 issuing the signal CBF_1: CB pos. i mpl ausi bl e . Evaluation
of current criteria is not affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P632.
As an alternative, the status signals from the external device may be used; see
Section 3.12.10, (p. 3-89). The assignment that is necessary for this is carried out
with the parameters MAI N: Si g. asg. CB1 open or MAI N: Si g. asg. CB1
cl osed, using CB1 as an example. Status signals from external devices are
processed similar to the CB status signals MAI N: CB1 open 3p EXT and
MAI N: CB1 cl osed 3p EXT
P632
3 Operation
3-204 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
&
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
031 028
036 051
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
&
&
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
64Z7031B
Address
Address
Fig. 3-165: Plausibility check of CB status signals
3.31.9 Startup Criteria
The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the
CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria
are evaluated:
Internal startup criterion:
Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by
setting parameter CBF_1: Fct. assi gn. starti ng, is considered a startup
criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter
CBF_1: Start wi th man. tri p, that a manual trip signal will also be used
as a startup criterion.
External startup criterion:
Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (CBF_1: Start 3p
EXT ) may be used as a startup criterion. To be on the safe side an
additional two-pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal
CBF_1: Start enabl e EXT .
Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has
been detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, when the CB
signals that its contacts are open.
3.31.9.1 Timers and Tripping Logic
Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signal CBF_1: Tri p si gnal t1 will be issued if the startup criterion is
still present when the time delay, set at timer stage CBF_1: t1 3p , has
elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a
second CB trip coil.
The signal CBF_1: Tri p si gnal t2 will be issued if the startup criterion is
still present when the time delay, set at timer stage CBF_1: t2 , has
elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a
backup circuit breaker or protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.
Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the de-arcing chambers of installed type
SF6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately
tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an
external CB_ 1 fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal
to the binary signal input appropriately configured at CBF_1: CB faul ty EXT .
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-205
CBF_1:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
m out of n
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
038 209
CBF_1:
Start enable EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF_1:
Start 3p EXT
[ 038 205 ]
CBF_1:
Start with man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
64Z1104D
0: No
CBF_1:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
IB
IC
CBF_1:
Fct.assign. starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen.trip signal 1
Gen.trip signal 2
Gen.trip signal 3
Gen.trip signal 4
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 3
[ 036 108 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 4
[ 036 109 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
>1
1
1
1
S
R
&
&
>1
>1
1
1
1
S
R
&
>1
CBF_1:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
1: Yes
Address
Fig. 3-166: Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection
P632
3 Operation
3-206 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z1105B
C
t
CBF_1:
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1:
Startup 3p
[ 038 211 ]
CBF_1:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
CBF_1:
CB faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]
CBF_1:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
C
CBF_1:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
MAIN:
CB failure
[ 036 017 ]
&
0
t 0
Fig. 3-167: Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection
3.31.10 Trip Commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages
available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued
by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip
command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
CBF_1:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1:
Trip command t1
[ 038 220 ]
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ]
CBF_1:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
1
1
1
S
R
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
CBF_1:
Latching trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
CBF_1:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
CBF_1:
Trip command t2
[ 038 224 ]
t 0
CBF_1:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
1
1
1
S
R
CBF_1:
Latching trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
64Z1106B
1
1
1
1

t 0
Fig. 3-168: Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection
3.31.11 Starting Trigger
Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection
function. In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a
condition so as to guarantee increased security against overreaction.
The signal CBF_1: Starti ng will be issued when the signal CBF_1: Starti ng
tri g. EXT is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting is present. The signal CBF_1: Tri p si gnal will be issued after
timer stage CBF_1: Del ay/starti ng tri g. has elapsed.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-207
t
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
CBF_1:
Starting trig. EXT
[ 038 016 ]
CBF_1:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
CBF_1:
Starting
[ 038 021 ]
CBF_1:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
0
64Z1107B
&
Fig. 3-169: Starting trigger
3.31.12 Fault Behind CB Protection
A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit
breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if
the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is
closed after the time delay set at CBF_1: Del ay/faul t beh. CB has elapsed.
When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal CBF_1: Faul t behi nd CB
is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an
InterMiCOM teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted
triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.
19Z6136D
CBF_1:
Fault behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
&
CBF_1:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
CBF_1:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
IA
t 0
IB
IC
&
Fig. 3-170: Fault behind CB protection
3.31.13 CB Synchronization Supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker
contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and
evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge
CB operate times the time delay CBF_1: Del ay/CB sync. superv can be used.
When this time delay has elapsed the signal CBF_1: Tri pSi g CBsync. super is
issued. Poles that are recognized as being open will still be signaled.
P632
3 Operation
3-208 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
64Z1109C
t
CBF_1:
TripSig CBsync.super
[ 038 226 ]
CBF_1:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
CBF_1:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN:
CB1 open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB1 closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
<3
CBF_1:
CBsync.superv C open
[ 038 229 ]
CBF_1:
CBsync.superv B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF_1:
CBsync.superv A open
[ 038 227 ]
IA
IB
IC
&
&
&
&
&
0
Fig. 3-171: CB synchronization supervision
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-209
3.32 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
The limit value monitoring function (LIMIT) monitors measured values which have
been obtained from the analog measured data inputs.
3.32.1 Enabling or Disabling the Limit Value Monitoring Function
The limit value monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.32.2 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the thresholds then a signal is issued after
the associated time-delay has elapsed.
P632
3 Operation
3-210 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Q9Z5021A
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 040 182 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
0
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
1
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>
[ 014 112 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ]
LIMIT:
IDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<
[ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 117 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
t 0
c
t 0
c
t 0
c
t 0
c
Fig. 3-172: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3.32.3 Monitoring the Measured Temperature Value
The temperature that is measured by the P632 using a resistance thermometer
is monitored by two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set
thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds, a signal is issued once a
set time-delay has elapsed.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-211
S8Z52G7A
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
T>
[ 014 100 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
LIMIT:
T>>
[ 014 101 ]
LIMIT:
tT>
[ 014 103 ]
LIMIT:
tT>>
[ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
T<
[ 014 105 ]
LIMIT:
tT<
[ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
T<<
[ 014 106 ]
LIMIT:
tT<<
[ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT> elapsed
[ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
t 0
c
t 0
c
t 0
c
t 0
c
Fig. 3-173: Monitoring the measured temperature value
P632
3 Operation
3-212 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.33 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Groups LIM_1 and LIM_2)
Each of the limit value monitoring functions, LIM_1 and LIM_2, is designed for the
monitoring of the minimum and maximum phase currents for a user-selected
transformer end.
The limit value monitoring functions LIM_1 and LIM_2 can be enabled or disabled
using setting parameters.
3.33.1 Monitoring Minimum and Maximum Phase Currents
Two limit value monitoring functions (LIM_1 and LIM_2) are implemented and can
be assigned to both transformer ends.
For each limit value monitoring function, a setting parameter is provided for this
assignment by the user. The function will then monitor the minimum and
maximum phase currents for the selection. If a maximum phase current exceeds
the relevant set threshold or if a minimum phase current falls below the relevant
set threshold, a signal is issued once a set time has elapsed.
Function group LIM_1 will serve as an example to illustrate the operation of the
limit value monitoring functions in the following figures.
62Z5080A
LIM_1:
Select. meas. input
[ 019 111 ]
0
1
0: End a
1: End b
1 0
IA,a
IB,a
IC,a
IN,a
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IN,b
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
IN,y
Fig. 3-174: Selection of measured values
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-213
64Z5081A
LIM_1:
Enabled
[ 040 123 ]
LIM_1:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 122 ]
LIM_1:
tI>> elapsed
[ 037 201 ]
LIM_1:
tI< elapsed
[ 037 202 ]
LIM_1:
tI<< elapsed
[ 037 203 ]
LIM_1:
I>
[ 015 116 ]
LIM_1:
I>>
[ 015 117 ]
LIM_1:
I<
[ 015 118 ]
LIM_1:
I<<
[ 015 119 ]
LIM_1:
tI>
[ 015 120 ]
LIM_1:
tI>>
[ 015 121 ]
LIM_1:
tI<
[ 015 122 ]
LIM_1:
tI<<
[ 015 123 ]
IA,y
IB,y
IC,y
LIM_1:
General enable USER
[ 014 014 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
1: Yes
0: No
0
1
Imax
Imin
COMP
Fig. 3-175: Limit value monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
P632
3 Operation
3-214 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.34 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals
within a framework of Boolean equations.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other. There are only two differences between these two
function groups:
LOGIC offers 32 logical equations.
LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations.
On the other hand, LOG_2 features long-term timers.
For example for output 1:
LOGI C: Ti me t1 output 1 and LOGI C: Ti me t2 output 1 : settable

from 0 to 600 s.
LOG_2: Ti me t1 output 1 and LOG_2: Ti me t2 output 1 :

settable from 0 to 60,000 s.
The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Where
applicable, any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned.
Binary signals in the P632 may be linked by logical OR or AND operations
with the option of additional NOT operations by setting LOGI C: Fct. assi gnm.
outp. 1 (or LOGI C: Fct. assi gnm. outp. 2 to LOGI C: Fct. assi gnm. outp.
32, or LOG_2: Fct. assi gnm. outp. 1 to LOG_2: Fct. assi gnm. outp. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P632, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGI C: I nput 1 EXT (or LOGI C: I nput 2 EXT , ,
LOGI C: I nput 40 EXT ) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGI C: Set 1 EXT (or LOGI C: Set 2 EXT , , LOGI C: Set 8 EXT ) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGI C: Set 1 EXT if the corresponding reset input LOGI C: Reset 1 EXT )
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of 1), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
Warning!
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type
test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance
during startup of the P632, during operation and when there is a fault
(blocking of the P632) are fulfilled.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-215
0: No
0
1
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
1: Yes
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address 036 051
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 036 059
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
D5Z52FAB
Fig. 3-176: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
The LOGI C: Tri gger 1 signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms
pulse to be issued.
P632
3 Operation
3-216 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
D5Z52CDA
LOGIC:
Output 1
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 1 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
0: No
0
1
2
3
4
5
0 5
1: Oper./releas.delay
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
[ 030 002 ]
LOGIC:
Time t2 output 1
[ 030 003 ]
LOGIC:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
LOGIC:
General enable USER
[ 031 099 ]
1: Yes
0: don't execute
0
1
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
1: execute
0: don't execute
0
1
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
1: execute
LOGIC:
Input 1 EXT
[ 034 000 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ]
LOGIC:
1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ]
LOGIC:
1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
LOGIC:
8 set externally
[ 034 082 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
0
1
0: Without timer stage
Fig. 3-177: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-217
19Z80CDA
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
0: No
0
1
2
3
4
5
0 5
1: Oper./releas.delay
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOG_2:
Time t1 output 1
[ 050 002 ]
LOG_2:
Time t2 output 1
[ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
[ 050 000 ]
LOG_2:
General enable USER
[ 011 137 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
0
1
Fig. 3-178: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-219) to
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-221)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P632 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the 0 logic level.
P632
3 Operation
3-218 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
D5Z50BYA
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 = 0s
t1 = 0s
t1, t2 > 0s
t1 t1
t1 t1
t2 t2
t2 t2
Fig. 3-179: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
D5Z50BZA
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 = 0s
t1 = 0s
t1, t2 > 0s
t1 t1
t1 t1
t2 t2
t2 t2
Fig. 3-180: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-219
D5Z50CAA
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 = 0s
t1 = 0s
t1, t2 > 0s
t1 t1
t1 t1
t2 t2
t2
t2 t2
t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
Retrigger pulse
Fig. 3-181: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
D5Z50CBA
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 = 0s
t1 = 0s
t1, t2 > 0s
t1 t1
Retrigger pulse
t1
t1 t1
t1
t2 t2
t2 t2
Fig. 3-182: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P632
3 Operation
3-220 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
D5Z50CCA
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
Fig. 3-183: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary
input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation
then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has
been assigned were triggered.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-221
D5Z52FBA
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address BBB BBB
Address BBB BBB
Address AAA AAA
Address AAA AAA
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
-Uxxx
-Uxxx
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
LOGIC:
Output 1
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 1 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Fig. 3-184: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P632
3 Operation
3-222 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function
Groups DEV01 to DEV03)
The P632 is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units.
The control functions are available and all related function groups and parameters
are visible only if the binary module X(6I 6O) is ordered.
The binary module X(6I 6O) is not available for the 24 TE case.
The binary module X(6I 6O) can be fitted to the following slot:
For case 40 TE: slot 6
For case 84 TE: slot 12
(See also the Location Diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-18).)
Regardless of this, function groups DEV01, ILOCK, CMD_1 and SIG_1 are activated
and visible by default (for all variants and case sizes of the P632). This is due to
constraints of the IEC 61850 protocol and does not necessarily mean that
switchgear units can be controlled.
The Bay Panel type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
3.35.1 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control
functions of the P632, the P632 first checks whether the switch command may be
executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has
been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are
defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is
subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without
station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled
for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station
interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and
each control direction.
If Local has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks
may be cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-223
19Z50ABA
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
Selected signal
Without function
MAIN:
SI active USER
[ 221 002 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg.interl.deact
[ 221 007 ]
MAIN:
BI active USER
[ 221 003 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
[ 221 057 ]
0: No
1: Yes
1
0
1
0
0: No
1: Yes
LOC:
[ 221 005 ]
Fig. 3-185: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the
interlocks.
19Z50ADA
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
307 015
DEVxx:
Open cmd. rejection
307 017
DEV01:
Close cmd. rejection
307 016
DEVxx:
307 018
Fig. 3-186: Rejection of the switching commands.
P632
3 Operation
3-224 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.2 Designation of External Devices
Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation. The user can either select this designation from a list of over
70 pre-defined names (via the parameter DEV01: Desi gnat. ext. dev. in
case of DEV01, for example), or this parameter is set to Device Name User. With
this selection, the text for the device's name, entered by the user at
DEV01: DEV-Name User (in case of DEV01, for example), will be used as the
device's designation.
(The maximum length is 4 characters, as with the fixed identifiers. Longer text
entries are truncated to 4 characters internally.)
3.35.3 Bay Type Selection
The P632 is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The bay type
defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
The P632 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay
type be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the
manufacturer of the P632 to request the definition of a customized bay type to
download into the P632. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software
MiCOM S1 the user can define new bay types.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P632 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic
configuration is shown in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
19Z50AQA
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
MAIN:
Type of bay
[ 220 000 ]
MAIN:
Auto-assignment I/O
[ 221 065 ]
BB1
Q0
Fig. 3-187: Bay type selection
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-225
3.35.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type
With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.
Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P632.
The bay interlock conditions for the Open / Close command control of
the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock
function.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status
signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically
if MAI N: Auto-assi gnment I /O is set to Yes. If set to No, the user will need to
carry out this configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows
which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands
for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P632 and the different possibilities to integrate a
switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P632 (processing of status
signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one
switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in
this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group
COMM1: with a blank address [--- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or
from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address.
P632
3 Operation
3-226 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear
Units
3.35.5.1 Status Signals
The status signals Open and Closed are assigned to binary signal inputs. The
signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see
Section 3.38.1.1, (p. 3-244)) are used for further processing. If no logic value of
1 is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring
function is started. For the duration of the set time period for running time
monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position either Open or Closed the signal Intermediate position is
issued.
If DEV01: I nterm. pos. suppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once
the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated
status is signaled.
The signal Faulty position is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have
not reached either their Open or Closed position after the set time period for
running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAI N: Del ay
Man. Op. Superv. have elapsed. If DEV01: Stat. i nd. i nterm. pos. is set to
Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs
will be signaled.
3.35.5.2 Switch Truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to Open while the input has a logic value of
1.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-227
19Z50AJA
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
0: No
1
0
1
0
2
3
0 3
1: Yes
0: Interm. pos.
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty pos.
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Control state
[ 210 018 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Dev. interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
DEV01:
Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
DEV01:
Interm. pos. suppr.
[ 210 012 ]
0: No
1
0
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
1: Yes
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
Without function
Debouncing
Chatter suppression
Selected group
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
Fig. 3-188: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units.
P632
3 Operation
3-228 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
3.35.6.1 Local or Remote Control of External Devices
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The
selection of the control point is described in the section entitled Configuration of
the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels; Selection of the Control Point.
Usually, remote control is carried out via the communication interface, local
control via the keys on the local control panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be
controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via
DEV01: I np. asg. el . ctrl . open or DEV01: I np. asg. el . ctr. cl ose). The setting
MAI N: El ectri cal control determines whether the inputs function as remote or
local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P632 will issue the following
logic state signals:
MAI N: Cmd. fr. comm. i nterf
or
MAI N: Command from HMI
or
MAI N: Cmd. fr. el ectr. ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating
data memory:
DEV01: Open cmd. recei ved
DEV01: Cl ose cmd. recei ved
3.35.6.2 Selection of the Switchgear Unit to be Controlled and Generating a
Switching Request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is
sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control
panel using the selection key and pressing the Open or Close key to
generate the switching request.
Note that the front panel HMI on the P632 does not feature specific keys for
switching functions. If at this point mention of a selection key is made, then this
would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned in this
example MAI N: Devi ce sel ecti on key. See Section 6.9, (p. 6-11), particularly
Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-14).
For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the
communication interface, the control commands Open or Close will also
address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-229
63Z80AAA
MAIN:
Cmd. fr. comm.interf
[ 221 101 ]
DEV01:
Open cmd. received
[ 218 000 ]
DEV01:
Close cmd. received
[ 218 001 ]
COMM1:
Open command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Close command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
307 012
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
307 011
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
MAIN:
End command
306 028
DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Electrical control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
LOC:
[ 221 005 ]
LOC:
Return t. illum. trg
305 550
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01
MAIN:
Device selection key
[ 006 001 ]
MAIN:
Device OPEN key
[ 006 002 ]
MAIN:
Device CLOSE key
[ 006 003 ]
1)
1)
1)
1) Selected signal
Fig. 3-189: Generating a switching request.
P632
3 Operation
3-230 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.6.3 Enabling Switching Commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P632 checks the interlocking
conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching
command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or
without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an
output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the
interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the Open
command for operation without the station interlock function.
19Z50AEA
ILOCK:
Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
ILOCK:
Output 32
[ 250 063 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ]
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
1: Yes
1: Yes
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
[ 210 041 ]
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
[ 210 042 ]
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI open
[ 210 039 ]
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
[ 210 040 ]
ILOCK:
Output 1
ILOCK:
Output 2
ILOCK:
Output 3
ILOCK:
Output 4
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
307 015
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005
DEV01:
307 016
Fig. 3-190: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching
commands by the bay interlock function.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-231
3.35.6.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be
a communication link with the substation control level. If the P632 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there
will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function,
the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching
enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At
substation control level, there will then be a check taking into account the
station interlock functions as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the
substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching
operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still
present. Optionally, the Open or Close switching operation can be carried out
without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay
interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will
be considered.
19Z50AFA
COMM1:
Enable SI open DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Enabl.SI close DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Open request DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Close request DEV01
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
Fig. 3-191: Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock.
P632
3 Operation
3-232 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.6.5 Linking Protection Commands to Switching Commands
For circuit breakers, the Open command can be linked to the protection trip
signals.
The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed
directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.
63Z75FNA
DEV01:
With close cmd./prot
[ 210 023 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.2
[ 210 022 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.1
[ 210 021 ]
1: Yes
0
1
0: No
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
307 013
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
Fig. 3-192: Linking to the protection commands.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-233
3.35.6.6 Issue of Switching Commands
Dependent on the operating mode (set at DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. ) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or
according to time control.
3.35.6.7 External Termination Control
If the operating mode Time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the
control process of external switchgear units by using external termination
contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P632 at MAI N: W. ext. cmd.
termi n. to Yes and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be
connected to the external termination contacts.
63Z70AGA
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
1: Yes (= on)
DEV01:
Open command
[ 210 028 ]
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
307 013
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Oper. mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
1
2
3
Fig. 3-193: Issue of switching commands.
P632
3 Operation
3-234 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.35.6.8 Switch Truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to Open while the input has a logic value of
1.
3.35.6.9 Time Control of Switching Commands
After sending an Open / Close command, running time monitoring for the
switchgear unit is started.
The P632 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position
within a period of time that can be configured via DEV01: StartCmdTi me
superv. (for DEV01, respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). If
the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by
the signal MAI N: Startcmdti me exceed.. In case of a switchgear unit for
which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position it is
recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the parameter to Blocked.
Moreover, the P632 expects a status signal Open or Closed to be issued by
the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P632, which can be set to
debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.38.1.1, (p. 3-244)). For
the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear
unit are back to a defined position either Open or Closed the signal
Intermediate position is issued.
If DEV01: I nterm. pos. suppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once
the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated
status is signaled.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their Open or
Closed position after the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. If DEV01: Stat. i nd. i nterm. pos. is
set to Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and
there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary
inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected
(MAI N: W. ext. cmd. termi n.. is set to No) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the Open or
Closed position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAI N: W. ext. cmd. termi n.. is set to Yes) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination
command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is
active.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-235
12Z51AKB
0: Interm. pos.
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty pos.
Selected signal
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 011 ]
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
DEV01:
Open command
[ 210 028 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
DEV01:
Start runn.time mon.
307 008
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
DEV01:
Interm. pos. suppr.
[ 210 012 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Selected group
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
0
1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
DEV01:
[ 210 004 ]
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 038 ]
0
1
2
3
0 ... 3
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
DEV01:
Switch. device runn.
307 010
DEV01:
Control state
[ 210 018 ]
C
Debouncing
Chatter suppression
Fig. 3-194: Monitoring of switching commands.
P632
3 Operation
3-236 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z5201B
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
1 3 4
DEV01:
Latching time
DEV01:
[ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
1
3
4
10 ms
Fig. 3-195: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control, example for
switching operation close.
19Z5202B
1 3
DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
3
1
10 ms
Fig. 3-196: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control, example for
switching operation close.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-237
3.35.6.10 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Permitted
The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time period may be set
with parameter MAI N: CB1 max. oper. cap. Associated with this parameter is
the counter at MAI N: CB1 act. oper. cap. to which the maximum number of
CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is
present that has been selected by a 1 out of n parameter at MAI N: CB1
ready fct. assi gn.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at MAI N: CB1
act. oper. cap. are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation
of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DEV01: Swi tch.
devi ce open and DEV01: Swi tch. devi ce cl osed.
The counter at MAI N: CB1 act. oper. cap. may only be decremented to a
value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control
functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB
fault has occurred (i.e. MAI N: CB1 faul ty EXT is set to Yes) the counter
MAI N: CB1 act. oper. cap. is immediately set to 1.
P632
3 Operation
3-238 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.36 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)
The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are
enabled only after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock
conditions are defined in the form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic
function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the Open and Close operations of the individual switchgear units
in the bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ
from the bay interlock equations for operation without station interlock (see Vol.
2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1), Vol. 2, Chapter A6, (p. A6-1)). These automatically
defined interlock conditions determined by the choice of bay type can be
modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements. The
following signals acquired by the P632 are linked by logic operations for the bay
interlock:
Function blocks 1 and 2
Programmable logic outputs
Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to
define interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without
the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before
AND before OR. The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-
order equation as an input thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean
equations.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-239
ILOCK:
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN:
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
[ 221 023 ]
LOGIC:
Output 1
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
LOGIC:
Output 1 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Output 32 (t)
[ 042 095 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
12Z80ACA
ILOCK:
Output 1
[ 250 032 ]
& 1
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV03:
Switch. device open
[ 210 136 ]
DEV02:
Switch. device open
[ 210 086 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV03:
[ 210 137 ]
DEV02:
[ 210 087 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 038 ]
DEV03:
[ 210 138 ]
DEV02:
[ 210 088 ]
Fig. 3-197: Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1.
3.36.1 IEC 61850 Reporting
As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
IEC 61850 communication protocol it is a requirement that these interlock
conditions are cyclically checked and not only with the request for a switching
operation.
Therefore the parameter (221 104) I LOCK: Cycl e t i nterl . check allows for
setting the cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s), after which a check of the
interlock conditions is carried out. As additional processor capacity must be
provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable
compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is
desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that
changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but
on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so large that the P632
system will be under too much strain. As the P632 CPU load is dependent on the
total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to
suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
P632
3 Operation
3-240 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
3.37 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)
Commands may be transmitted to the P632 via the communications interface.
When the P632 receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is
enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal
issued.
The user can select the operating mode for each 1-pole command. The following
settings are possible:
Long command
Short command
Persistent command
If the operating mode Long command or Short command has been selected the
output relay will be triggered for the time period set at MAI N: Cmd. dur. l ong
cmd. or MAI N: Cmd. dur. short cmd..
The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
[ --- --- ]
19Z50ALB
CMD_1:
Command C001
[ 200 001 ]
OUTP:
[ xxx xxx ]
-K xxx
Address 200 001
K x1
K x2
K x3
K xx
CMD_1:
Command C001 config.
[ 200 004 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
CMD_1:
Oper. mode cmd. C001
[ 200 002 ]
1: Long command
2
1
2: Short command
3
3: Persistent command
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
COMM1:
Command C001
1
&
&
&
&
&
1
t
1
t
Fig. 3-198: Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-241
3.38 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)
Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P632
via its appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter
suppression (see Section 3.38.1.1, (p. 3-244)). This conditioned signal is then
presented as SI G_1: Logi c si gnal S001 (to SI G_1: Logi c si gnal S012 ).
Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting
the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
Without function
Start/end signal
Transient signal
If setting Without function has been selected then no message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes. If setting Start/end
signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal
state at the binary signal input changes. A requirement for transmission of the
Start signal message is that the logic 1 signal is present for the set minimum
time period. If setting Transient signal has been selected then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes form
logic 0 to logic 1.
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole
signals.
P632
3 Operation
3-242 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z50AMA
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
COMM1:
Signal S001,log
[ --- ---]
SIG_1:
Oper. mode sig. S001
[ 226 001 ]
0: Without function
1
0
2
1: Start/end signal
2: Transient signal
SIG_1:
Min. sig. dur. S001
[ 226 002 ]
Debouncing
Chatter suppression
SIG_1:
Signal S001 config.
[ 226 007 ]
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
0: No
1
0
1: Yes
Selected group
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
Fig. 3-199: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001.
3.38.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time
acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as
standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for
each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set.
Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious
pickups.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-243
64Z7034A
2
1
MAIN:
Chatt.mon. time gr.1
[ 221 201 ]
DEV01:
Debounced cl. signal
310 045
3
2
1
3
MAIN:
Debounce time gr. 1
[ 221 200 ]
MAIN:
Change of state gr.1
[ 221 202 ]
Debouncing
Chatter suppression
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 011 ]
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
DEV01:
Debounced op. signal
310 046
SIG_1:
Debounced sign. M001
310 044
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
and
Group 1
Fig. 3-200: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
3.38.1.1 Debouncing and Chatter Suppression
3.38.1.1.1 Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of
the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers
the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram
containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the
time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MAI N: Ti me
tag to the value After debounce time.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is
generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce
time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of
MAI N: Ti me tag to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter
has been set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem sorted then all entries are always
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
P632
3 Operation
3-244 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
F0Z5011B
Telegram with
time tag
Signal sequence
time tag
1s 2e
Fig. 3-201: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter
MAI N: Ti me tag set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort or 1stEdge,OpMem sorted.) Example: Set debouncing
time: 50 ms, s: start, e: end.
3 Operation
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 3-245
3.38.1.1.2 Chatter Suppression
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated
for the admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can
be set. After the first inadmissible signal change, no further telegrams are
generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing,
it is re-triggered by each new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed,
each signal change triggers a telegram.
F0Z5012A
Telegram with
time tag
Signal sequence
time tag
1s 2e 3s 4e
Debouncing
Fig. 3-202: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. Set debouncing time: 20 ms, set chatter monitoring
time: 200 ms, number of admissible signal changes: 4, s: start, e: end.
P632
3 Operation
3-246 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
4 DESIGN
The P632 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
Irrespective of the type a P632 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local
control panel. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential
control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED
indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-1
4.1 Designs
The P632 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-18)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
Warning!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control
panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
Warning!
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened!
If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the
resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
Warning!
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
P632
4 Design
4-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
47Z14BBA
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (or in case of a detachable HMI the case front
panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel.
4 Design
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-3
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case
213.4
242.6
260.2
257.1
1
4
7
.
5
1
7
7
.
5
1
8
4
.
5
X6
Fig. 4-2: Surface-mounted 40 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
227.9
253.6
1
7
7
.
5
213.4
203.0
155.4
5.0
181.3
1
5
9
.
0
1
6
8
.
0
5.0
X6
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
P632
4 Design
4-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
227.9
253.6
1
7
7
.
5
1
0
1
.
6
6.4
224.5
242.6
1
0
1
.
6
1
8
6
.
5
213.4
242.6
260.2
X6
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with
angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case
1
4
7
.
5
1
7
7
.
5
1
8
4
.
5
434.8
464.0
481.6
257.1
X6
Fig. 4-5: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
4 Design
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-5
227.9
253.6
1
7
7
.
5
434.8
284.9
259.0
5.0
1
5
9
.
0
1
6
8
.
0
5.0
25.9
410.0
X6
Fig. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
227.9
253.6
1
7
7
.
5
1
0
1
.
6
6.4
445.9
464.0
1
0
1
.
6
1
8
6
.
5
434.8
464.0
481.6
X6
Fig. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with
angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P632
4 Design
4-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
4.2.3 Detachable HMI
Fig. 4-8: View of case 40 TE for connection of detachable HMI.
Fig. 4-9: View of case 84 TE for connection of detachable HMI.
206.0
20.7
46.3
1
7
7
.
5
197.5
3.0
181.3
1
4
8
.
0
1
6
8
.
0
1
0
7
.
3
192.5
X6
Fig. 4-10: Detachable HMI with panel opening.
4 Design
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-7
4.3 Hardware Modules
The P632 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P632.
Key:
: standard equipment,
: optional,
: depending on order,
*: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,
(p. 5-18)).
P632
4 Design
4-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Type Item
Number
Index Description Width P632
409
P632
410
A(CH1
CH2)
009650356 A ff Communication module (for RS 485 wire
connection)
4TE
A(CH1
CH2)
009650355 A ff Communication module (for plastic fiber) 4TE
A(CH1
CH2)
009650354 A ff Communication module (for glass fiber, ST
connector)
4TE
A(ETH
CH2)
009651427 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet,
glass fiber, SC connector and RJ45 wire)
4TE
A(ETH
CH2)
009651471 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet,
glass fiber, ST connector and RJ45 wire)
4TE
A(Red.
ETH CH2)
009651531 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s, SHP
Protocol, glass fiber, ST connector)
4TE
A(Red.
ETH CH2)
009651532 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s, RSTP
4TE
A(Red.
ETH CH2)
009651533 B ff Redundant Ethernet Board (100 Mbit/s, DHP
4TE
B 000336187 D ff * Bus module (digital, for 40 TE device) 4TE
B 000336188 C ff * Bus module (digital, for 84 TE device) 4TE
B 000337870 D ff * Bus module (analog) 4TE
L 009651473 C ff * Local control module (DHMI text display,
European)
4TE
L 009651474 B ff * Local control module (DHMI text display,
Cyrillic)
4TE
L 009650561 D ff * DHMI Adapter Board 4TE
L 009650563 F ff * Processor Unit Adapter Board 4TE
P 009651571 * Processor Unit 4TE
T(4J) 009650328 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J (pin connection) 8TE

T(4J) 009650329 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J (ring connection) 8TE

T(4J 1V) 009650311 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J, 1 x V (pin

connection)
8TE

T(4J 1V) 009650325 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J, 1 x V (ring
connection)
8TE

V(4I 8O) 009651534 B ff Power supply module 24 ... 60 V DC, standard

variant (switching threshold 18 V)
4TE
4 Design
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-9
Type Item
Number
409
P632
410
V(4I 8O) 009651536 B ff Power supply module 24 ... 60 V DC,
switching threshold 73 V
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
V(4I 8O) 009651544 B ff Power supply module 60 ... 250 V DC / 100 ...
230 V AC, standard variant (switching
threshold 18 V)
4TE
230 V AC, switching threshold 73 V
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
X(24I) 000337612 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs),
standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
X(4H) 009651493 B ff Binary module (4 high-break contacts) 4TE
X(6I 6O) 000337377 E ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs, 6 output
relays), standard variant (switching threshold
18 V)
4TE
X(6I 6O) 009651305 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs, 6 output
relays), switching threshold 73 V
4TE
4TE
P632
4 Design
4-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Type Item
Number
409
P632
410
4TE
4TE
X(6I 8O) 000336971 D ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs, 8 output
relays), standard variant (switching threshold
18 V)
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
4TE
X(6O) 000336973 B ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4TE
Y(4I) 000337406 D ff Analog I/O module, standard variant
(switching threshold 18 V)
4TE
Y(4I) 009651307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V 4TE
The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE
in width (HE = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm).
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal
blocks in the P632 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection
diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-18).
4 Design
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 4-11
P632
4 Design
4-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
5 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION
Warning!
Sustained exposure to high humidity during storage may cause damage to
electronics and reduce the lifetime of the equipment.
We recommend that storage humidity shall not exceed 50% relative humidity.
Once the MiCOM products have been unpacked, we recommend that they are
energized within the three following months.
Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment,
before energization.
Warning!
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the Warning page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
Warning!
The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-11) (Protective and
Operational Grounding) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the
diagram Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal (Fig. 5-8,
(p. 5-11)).
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
Warning!
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected
at the same time.
Warning!
Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective
earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) must be
connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable
HMI at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor
terminal on the devices case. Both the detachable HMI and the device have to
be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to the
detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be subjected
to dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable
HMI next to high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent
induced currents that would lead to electromagnetic interferences.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-1
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P632 devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons and shipped
with outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking
devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting
documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device
from the inside carton. The design revision level of each module included in the
device when shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly
list). This list of components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in
proper mechanical condition.
If the P632 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If
the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms
to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m.
P632
5 Installation and Connection
5-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P632 can be determined by checking
the type identification label (see below). One type identification label is located
under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found
on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed
to the outside of the P632 packaging.
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a MiCOM P3x3 device.
The P632 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter Order Information of this
manual.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-3
5.3 Location Requirements
The P632 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P632.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 V
A,nom
with a residual ripple of up to 12 % V
A,nom
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
P632
5-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P632 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P632 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-5) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter Design. When the P632 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Protective and Operational
Grounding (Section 5.5, (p. 5-11))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:
The P632 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class of the shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:
Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI
can be found in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4).
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-5
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P632 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or
the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken
down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1. Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180 up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2. Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-7)).
3. Then remove the local control panel.
Warning!
The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P
by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do
not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-7)). Now insert the P632 into the panel opening from the rear so
that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
Warning!
When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the M3.5
screws with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters.)
If the control panel thickness is 2 mm, the longer M3.5 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P632
5-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12Y6181B
M4
< 3 mm
M3.5
Merely loosen the
upper screws and
hook device on side
plates to mount
For panels with a
thickness 2 mm,
replace the M3 bolts
with the enclosed
longer M3 bolts
Remove the lower
screws completely
prior to mounting
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
Warning!
The P632 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets
and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-8)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-11).
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
1. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-8), and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-8)).
4. Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-7
45Z5058A
Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets.
the 40TE case
H
e
i
g
h
t
:

2
0
4
m
m
Angle brackets
Frame
12Y6183B
6.4
M6 x 15
M6
B6
Width: 280mm for
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
Warning!
The P632 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets
and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-8)) is used.
P632
5-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a
second sub-rack to form a 19 mounting rack (see Fig. 5-6, (p. 5-9)). The
second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a
blank front panel. Fit the 19 mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. 5-7,
(p. 5-10).
61Y5077A
Tapped bush
Connection flange
Bolt
Fig. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19 mounting rack.
Warning!
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-9
61Y5078A
Covering flange
Rack frame
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P632 in a cabinet with a 19 mounting rack.
Warning!
P632
5-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding
requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must
be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided.
The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm (AWG12) is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power
supply module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal connection
diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of
this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A
minimum cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) is required.
If a detachable HMI is installed, a further protective conductor (ground/earth) of
at least 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) must be connected to the DHMI
protective conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these
must be located within the same substation.
All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as short
as possible.
19Y5220B
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
PE terminal
Description
Nut M4
Bolt M4
Clamp bracket
Tooth lock wash.A4.3
surface-mount. case
PE terminal
Description
Nut M4
Bolt M4
Clamp bracket
Tooth lock wash.A4.3
flush-mount. case
Pos.
1
2
3
4
Pos.
1
2
3
4
Fig. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective
grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety given by this set-
up.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-11
5.6 Connection
The P632 Transformer Differential Protection Device must be connected in
accordance with the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type
identification label. The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the
P632 are to be found either in the supporting documents supplied with the
device, or in Section 5.7, (p. 5-18).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P632.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P632. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
5.6.1.1 Power Supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage V
A
for the P632 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
5.6.1.2 Current-Measuring Inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
Warning!
Warning!
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
5.6.1.3 Connecting the Measuring Circuits
The system current transformers must be connected in accordance with the
standard schematic diagram shown in Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-13). It is essential that the
grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT
connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when making settings (see
Chapter 7, (p. 7-1)).
P632
5-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
62Z5084A
A
B
C
A B C
1U
2U
1IA
1IB
1IC
2IA
2IB
2IC
2IN
a
b
1IN
P632
Fig. 5-9: Standard schematic connection diagram for the P632
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-13
5.6.1.4 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog
module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire
method (see Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-14)). No supply conductor compensation is
required in this case.
S8Z52H9A
PT 100
P632
Fig. 5-10: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.
5.6.1.5 Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring
these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O
modules (X) varies (see Section 2.5.7, (p. 2-13)). Once the user has selected a
bay type, the P632 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output
relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. The standard
configuration of binary inputs and output relays for each bay type is given in the
list of bay types to be found in the Appendix (see Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1),
Vol. 2, Chapter A6, (p. A6-1)).
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal
connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-18)). This is to be understood as a recommendation only.
Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIGB Interface
An IRIGB interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional
feature. It is connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a
characteristic impedance of 50 must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
5.6.3.1 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
Warning!
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106, part 101.
P632
5-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
5.6.3.2 Communication Interfaces
The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected
either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair
copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable
requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this
operating manual.
Warning!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P632, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P632 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at
both ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also
possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-16), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-17) as an example for channel 2 on the
communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication
module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped
electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P632. The two
devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to
terminate the data transmission conductor. In MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in
the P632, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and
can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end
of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an
electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system,
e.g. the P632, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master
device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the
master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-15
communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 resistor each. In MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P632, a
220 resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface hardware and can be
connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor order
number see Chapter Accessories and Spare Parts).
19Z6480A
First participant
connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
Last participant
Device with half-
duplex interface
P632
P632 XXXX
XXXX
D1[T]
D2[R] D1[T]
D2[R]
200 ... 220
-X10
-X10
D1[T] D2[R] D1[T] D2[R]
Fig. 5-11: 2-wire data link.
P632
5-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
19Z6481A
First participant
(e.g. the master)
XXXX
Last participant
D1[T]
D2[R]
-X10
P632
200 ... 220
D1[T]
D2[R]
Device with half-
duplex interface
P632 XXXX
-X10
D1[T] D2[R] D1[T] D2[R]
Fig. 5-12: 4-wire data link.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-17
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P632409/410
Location diagram for P632 in 40 TE case
Pin-terminal connection (P632 409)
01
01
P
02
02
A
CH1
CH2
A
ETH
CH2
A
Red.
ETH
CH2
03
03
T
4J
1V
04
04
05
05
T
4J
06
06
07
07
X
6I
6O
X
6I
8O
08
08
X
24I
Y
4I
09
09
V
4I
8O
10
10
X
4H
X
6O
Location diagram for P632 in 84 TE case
Ring-terminal connection (P632 410)
01
01
P
02
02
A
CH1
CH2
A
ETH
CH2
A
Red.
ETH
CH2
03
03
T
4J
1V
04
04
05
05
T
4J
06
06
07
07
08
08
X
24I
Y
4I
09
09
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
X
6I
6O
X
6I
8O
17
17
18
18
X
4H
X
6O
19
19
20
20
V
4I
8O
21
21
Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. 1 module.
If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot, then these are
alternatives, depending on the ordering options.
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P632409/410
_ is a placeholder for the slot.
See also Section 5.5, (p. 5-11), Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case
Grounding / Protective Earth
P632
5-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Type T
4J / 1V
Transformer
module
Ring Pin
Voltage measuring
input
X0_1 X0_1
Current measuring
inputs
X0_2
xIA
xIB
xIC
xIN
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Tx4
T5
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
1
2
3
4
13
14
15
16
V
Type T
4J
Transformer
module
Ring Pin
X0_1
Current measuring
inputs
X0_2
xIA
xIB
xIC
xIN
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Tx4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
8
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Ring
K_01
K_02
K_03
K_04
K_05
K_06
K_07
K_08
Power supply
Type V
U100
Power supply
module
Signal inputs
U_01
U_02
U_03
U_04
Output relays
Pin
X_3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
PE
Vaux
4I / 8O
+
-
Ring Pin
X_1 X_1
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
X_2
10 1
11 2
12 3
13 4
14 5
15 6
16 7
17 8
18 9
X_3
19 1
20 2
21 3
22 4
23 5
24 6
25 7
26 8
27 9
Binary
module
Type X
6I / 8O
Output relays
K_01
K_02
K_03
K_04
K_05
K_06
K_07
K_08
U_01
U_02
U_03
U_04
U_05
U_06
V
in
V
in
V
in
V
in
V
in
V
in
Signal inputs
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Output relays
X_3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
K_01
K_02
K_03
K_04
K_05
K_06
Signal inputs
U_01
U_02
U_03
U_04
U_05
U_06
Ring Pin
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
Binary
module
Type X
6I / 6O
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Ring
Output relays
Pin
X_3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
K_01
K_02
K_03
K_04
K_05
K_06
Type X
6O
Binary
module
X_1
4
5
X_1
4
5
11
12
19
20
26
27
Ring
Type X
High-break
contacts
Pin
X_3
1
2
8
9
X_2
2
3
K_01
4H
K_02
K_04
K_03
+
+
+
+
Binary
module
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Ring
Binary
module
Signal inputs Pin
X_3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Type X
24I
U_17
U_18
U_19
U_20
U_21
U_22
U_23
U_24
U_01
U_02
U_03
U_04
U_05
U_06
U_07
U_08
U_09
U_10
U_11
U_12
U_13
U_14
U_15
U_16
Vin
Vin
Vin
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 5-19
X_3
1
2
3
4
5
6
X_2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X_1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Ring
Analog
module
U_01
U_02
U_03
U_04
Pin
Type Y
4I
Signal and
measuring inputs
Measuring outputs
K_01
U_08
0..20 mA
valid
K_02
U_09
0..20 mA
valid
U
#
U
#
U_05
U_06
U
#
U
#
0..20 mA
PT100
Vin
Vin
Vin
Vin
X11
1
X8
1
Type A
Serial [Channel 1]
optical fiber link
Per order
#
#
IRIG-B
time synchronization
Serial [Channel 2]
wire link only
or wire link
X//Y
D2[R]
X10
1
2
3
4
5
D1[T]
U20
X//Y
RS 422 / 485
D2[R]
X9
1
2
3
4
5
D1[T]
U19
U17 X//Y
U18 X//Y
X7
1
U21
Communication
module
CH1 / CH2
RS 422 / 485
X8
TX
Type A
Ethernet [IEC]
optical fiber link ST
Per order
Serial [COMM2]
wire link
or
optical fiber link SC
X//Y
D2[R]
X10
1
2
3
4
5
D1[T]
U20
U17 X/Y
U18 X/Y
X7
RX
Communication
module
ETH / CH2
X12
1
U26
X/Y
U25 X//Y
X13
RX
TX
and wire link
RJ 45
RS 422 / 485
X8
TX
Type A
Ethernet [IEC], Port 1
U17 X/Y
U18 X/Y
X7
RX
Communication
module
Red. ETH / CH2
Serial [COMM2]
wire link only
X//Y
RS 422 / 485
D2[R]
X10
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
D1[T]
U20
X11
1 #
#
IRIG-B
time synchronization
U21
X15
TX
U28 X/Y
U29 X/Y
X14
RX
Ethernet [IEC], Port 2
Alarm Port 1 K21
K22
Port supervision
Alarm Port 2
P632
5-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6 LOCAL CONTROL (HMI)
6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI)
Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel
(HMI). All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from
the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read
out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control
panel:
Controlling switchgear units
Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status
signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short
circuits in the power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in
testing and commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-1
6.2 Display and Keypad
6.2.1 Text Display
The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.11, (p. 3-65) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
EDIT MODE
HEALTHY
OUT OF SERVICE
ALARM
TRIP
H18
H19
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display.
6.2.2 Display Illumination
If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set return time illumination (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time
illumination (LOC: Return ti me i l l umi n.) is set to blocked.
6.2.3 Contrast of the Display
The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local
control panel at the same time, as follows:
P632
6 Local Control (HMI)
6-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press Up or Down ( , ) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.4 Short Description of Keys
6.2.4.1 Up and Down Keys
Panel Level: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level: Press the up and down keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
up and down keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the up and down keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
Up key: the next higher value is selected.
Down key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the up and down key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.4.2 Left and Right Keys
Menu Tree Level: Press the left and right keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the left and
right keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
Left key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
Right key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the left and right keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.4.3 ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
6.2.4.4 CLEAR Key
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-3
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6.2.4.5 READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.4.6 Configurable Function Keys
( )
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered.
More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in Section 3.6,
(p. 3-40).
More details on handling function keys can be found in Section 6.9, (p. 6-11).
P632
6-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.3 Display Levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the READ key:
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-5
6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel
The Bay Panel is only available under these conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit must be fitted with the binary
module X(6I 6O) to a slot supporting this module.
2. By selecting and sending a bay type (with parameter MAI N: Type of
bay ) a bay type has been generated.
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any
other point in the menu tree, press the READ key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay
panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the ENTER key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree
level the user must simultaneously press the keys Cursor up and RESET. (If
previously no panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel,
if available, is accessed.)
After the set LOC: Autom. return ti me has elapsed the protection unit will
also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display
panel last selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the
key Cursor left and back again by pressing the key Cursor right.
P632
6-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.5 Display Panels
The text display of the P632 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Record View Bay Panel
Control and Display Panels
Panel(s)
(state-dependent)
+
Menu tree
Device type
Parameters
Device ID
Configuration parameters
Function parameters
Global
Main functions
Parameter subset 1
Parameter subset ...
Control
Operation
Cyclic measurements
Control and testing
Operating data recordings
Measured operating data
Physical state signals
Logical state signals
Events
Event counters
Measured fault data
Event recordings
X0 :running
Q0 :running
Q8 :running
Local Remote
>
Voltage VAB prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage VBC prim.
20.6 kV
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record
Measured Value
Fig. 6-2: Display panels and menu tree.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-7
6.6 Menu Tree and Data Points
All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using
a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the
LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected
by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch
and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically
encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected
data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line
below.
P632
6-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.7 List Data Points
List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data
points generally have more than one associated value element. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When
a list data point is selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the
LCD, indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The
individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the
case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators
such as OR.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-9
6.8 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays
can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right
of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described
in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
P632
6-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.9 Configurable Function Keys
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-11
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx
Function keys [F1] to [Fx] can be assigned a password (see Section 6.12.9, (p. 6-
36)). In such a case they are effective only after that password has been
entered. By default, no password is required to use the function key.
It is assumed for the following operating example that function key [F1] is
enabled only after the password (as assigned at F_KEY: Password funct. key
1) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will
remain active for the duration set at F_KEY: Return ti me fct. keys.
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
P632
6-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650

Control Step / Description Control
Action
Display
Step 0 Display example.

Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press function key [F1].
Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt
to enter the password if it is required.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step and the
next do not exist and the function key is effective
immediately as described in Step 3.)
********
Step 2a If a password is set, press the keys corresponding to
the set password, for example:
Left *

Down
*

Right
*

Up
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column. *

Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has
been entered, the active display will re-appear.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return
time.
By default, no password is required and therefore
function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by
pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is
pressed.
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-13

Action
Display
Step 3 Press [F1] again. The function configured to this
function key is carried out.
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4 When function keys are pressed during their associated
return time, then the set function is carried out directly,
i.e. without checking for the password again.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does
not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
Yes
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys
As described in Section 3.6, (p. 3-40) function keys [F1] to [Fx] may be
configured as control keys (for [F1] e.g. at F_KEY: Fct. assi gnm. F1 ).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see Section 6.9.1,
(p. 6-12)) and the configuration to Key/Switch is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the
four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
MAI N: Local /Remote key
The Local/Remote control command is effective only in the bay panel
except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the configured functionality, the Local/Remote command
toggles either between Remote and Local control, or between Local/
Remote and Local control. (The parameter LOC: Fct. assi gn. L/R key
may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of
the two switching modes is active.) If the Local/Remote command is
configured such that it will switch from Remote control to Local control,
then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at
LOC: Password L/R . Switching from Local to Remote control will
occur without checking the password. (See also Section 3.3.5, (p. 3-9).)
MAI N: Devi ce sel ecti on key
This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if
Local control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display HMI with the flashing symbol > in front of the external
devices designation text.
MAI N: Devi ce OPEN key
The OPEN command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit taking into
account the interlock equation to assume the open status.
MAI N: Devi ce CLOSE key
The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit taking into
account the interlock equation to assume the closed status.
P632
6-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.10 Changing Between Display Levels
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Action
Display
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree.

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
No (=off)
Step 1 First press the up key and hold it down while pressing
the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the up key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
+
Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level

Action
Display
Step 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel.

Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the
Menu Tree Level.
P632
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: Par/Conf/LOC), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-15
6.11 Control at Panel Level
The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel (LOC: Fct.
Operati on Panel), the Overload Panel (LOC: Fct. Overl oad Panel ), and the
Fault Panel (LOC: Fct. Faul t Panel ).
Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the
given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The
selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see
Section 6.12.5.1, (p. 6-27) for instructions regarding selection. If
MAI N: Wi thout functi on has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault
Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset,
by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.

Action
Display
Step 0 Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously
on the Panel.

Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 If more than two measured values have been selected,
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the
up or down keys.
The device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC: Hol d-ti me for Panel s, located at Par/
Conf in the menu tree) has elapsed.
or
Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
Current A prim.
415 A
6.11.1 Bay Panel
6.11.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel
If available the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote). The text display HMI will show up to 3 external devices, one per line,
where the external device selected is marked with the flashing symbol > in
front of the external devices designation text.
Fig. 6-3: Example of a bay panel.
P632
6-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their
numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there
are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their
current state is displayed (Interm. pos., Open, Closed or Faulty pos.).
The active control unit (Remote or Local) is displayed in the fourth line, as
well as its state: Locked or Unlocked.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-17
6.11.1.2 Controlling Switchgear Units
Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for local control.
The following example assumes that the configurable function keys are set as
follows (see also Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-14)):
[F1]: MAI N: Local /Remote key called local/remote key in the
following example
[F2]: MAI N: Devi ce sel ecti on key called select key in the following
example
[F3]: MAI N: Devi ce CLOSE key called close key in the following
example
[F4]: MAI N: Devi ce OPEN key called open key in the following
example
If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and local control (RL),
then the switch from remote to local operation requires a password.
The following example is based on the (RL) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.12.9.4, (p. 6-40)) the following description will apply accordingly.
P632
6-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650

Action
Display
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel.

X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 1 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch the device to
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
P632 10:33:22
********
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence:
Left
P632 10:33:22
*

Down
P632 10:33:22
*

Right
P632 10:33:22
*

Up
The display will change as shown in the column on the
right.
P632 10:33:22
*

Now press the Enter key.
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel
will re-appear. The fourth line will display Local.
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing
the Clear key before the enter key is pressed.
X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only
switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be
selected. The external device designation for the
selected switchgear unit Q0, for example is marked
by a flashing > character.
X0 :Closed
>Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the
Clear key. Press the Selection key to select a new
switchgear unit.
X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-19

Action
Display
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys Open
or Close to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions if applicable is checked.
or

Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that
an operation can be carried out, then the switch
command is executed. The status Interm[ediate]
pos[ition] is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating.

X0 :Closed
Q0 :Interm. pos
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked

Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has
elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed.

X0 :Closed
Q0 :Open
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that
switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear
unit is no longer marked.
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for the signal MAI N: I nterl ock equ.
vi ol . will be illuminated.

X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period
after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (LOC: Return ti me i l l umi n.) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Return ti me sel ect. )
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.

Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote
control; this is accomplished without a password prompt.
X0 :Closed
Q0 :Open
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
P632
6-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.12.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three
main folders Settings, Measurements & Tests and Fault & Event Records,
which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the
entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
PX yyy
Parameters
PX yyy
Operation
PX yyy
Events
Oper/
Cyclic measurements
Oper/Cycl/
Meas. operating data
Oper/Cycl/Data/
MAIN
Folder
plane 1
Folder
plane 2
Folder
plane 3
Function
groups
Data
points
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Date
01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
Unit
type
Fig. 6-4: Basic menu tree structure.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-21
6.12.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode
and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals,
and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain
text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form
of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The
active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the
following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only.

Action
Display
Step 0 In this example, the user switches from plain text mode
to address mode.

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
No (=off)
Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice
versa, press the CLEAR key and either the left key or
the right key simultaneously. This can be done at any
point in the menu tree.
+
or
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
0
P632
6-22 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling function: To activate the global change-
enabling function, set the LOC: Param. change enabl . parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.12.8, (p. 6-34)) are enabled without
entering the password.
Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting
change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when
the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following
example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see Section 6.12.9, (p. 6-36)), the following
description will apply accordingly.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-23

Action
Display
Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select the
LOC: Param. change enabl . parameter.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the
fourth line of the display.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
********
Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Left
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*

Right
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*

Up
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*

Down
right.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*

Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting
can now be changed by pressing the up or down
keys.
shown in Step 1 appears.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
Step 3 Change the setting to Yes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out.
The unit is enabled for further setting changes.
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.12.3.1 Automatic Return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (LOC: Autom. return ti me , menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
P632
6-24 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system
condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
6.12.3.2 Forced Return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAI N: Devi ce on-l i ne , menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings
include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can
be adapted to the system. The following entries in the Change column of the
Telegram Documentation (part of the separately available
DataModelExplorer) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
on: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
off: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-25
6.12.4 Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.

Action
Display
Step 0 Example of a display.
In this example, the change-enabling function is
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Yes
Step 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the keys.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is
highlighted by a cursor (underlined).
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 3 Press the left or right keys to move the cursor to
the left or right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
Step 4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing
the up and down keys. In the meantime the device
will continue to operate with the old value.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
MODE will go out and the device will now operate with
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50010 s
Step 6 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
50000 s
P632
6-26 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.5 List Parameters
6.12.5.1 Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order
to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements
that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements
are linked by an OR operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and
NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list
items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a
Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-27

Action
Display
Step 0 Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter
MAI N: Fct. assi g. tri p cmd. 1 at Par/Func/Glob/
MAIN in the menu tree). The down arrow () indicates
that a list setting has been selected.

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.

Step 1 Press the down key. The first function and the first
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines,
respectively. The symbol #01 in the display indicates
the first item of the selection. If MAI N: Wi thout
functi on appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#01 DIST
Trip zone 1
Step 2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing
the right and left keys.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2

Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown
on the right will appear.

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#05 MAIN
?????
Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Step 4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the
right and left keys in the input mode.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
#02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the up and
down keys. In this particular case, only the OR
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the
selection of classes.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate
with the new settings.
If no operator has been selected, the OR operator is
always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 4
Step 7 Press the up key to exit the list at any point in the
list.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on),
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE will be extinguished.
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
P632
6-28 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.5.2 Deleting a List Parameter
If MAI N: Wi thout functi on is assigned to a given item, then all the following
items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-29
6.12.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory
In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8

Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6.12.6.1 Readout of the Operating Data Memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
Display
Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory.

Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Step 1 Press the down key to enter the operating data
memory. The latest entry is displayed.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 2 Press the left key repeatedly to display the entries
one after the other in chronological order. Once the
end of the operating data memory has been reached,
pressing the left key again will have no effect.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
Enabled USER
Yes
Step 3 Press the right key to display the previous entry.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4 Press the up key at any point within the operating
data memory to return to the entry point.
Oper/Rec/OP_RC

P632
6-30 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.6.2 Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring
routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning
of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum
of 30 entries is possible. After that an overflow signal is issued.

Action
Display
Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal
memory.

Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.

Step 1 Press the down key to enter the monitoring signal
memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 2 Press the right key repeatedly to display the entries
one after the other in chronological order. If more than
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the overflow signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
Exception oper. syst.
Step 3 Press the left key to display the previous entry.
Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Step 4 If the down key is held down while a monitoring
signal is being displayed, the following additional
information will be displayed:
Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
First
Time when the signal first occurred
Updated
The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no
longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring
function.
Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the self-
monitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
Number
The signal occurred x times.

First: 13:33:59.744
Updated: Yes
Acknowledged: No
Number: 5
Step 5 Press the up key at any point within the monitoring
signal memory to return to the entry point.
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-31
6.12.6.3 Readout of the Event Memories (Records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored
in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
Display
Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line
of the display will show the date and time the fault
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.

Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33

Step 1 Press the down key to enter the fault memory. First,
the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd
fault since the last reset.
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
Event
22
Step 2 Press the right key repeatedly to see first the
measured fault data and then the binary signals in
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or
ended.
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
right key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
right key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
Running time
0.17 s
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start

Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3 Press the left key to see the previous measured value
or the previous signal.
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Start
Step 4 Press the up key at any point within the fault memory
to return to the entry point.
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
01.01.13 10:00:33

P632
6-32 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.7 Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section Resetting Actions in Chapter Operation.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-
enabling function has already been activated.

Action
Display
Step 0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the
number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this
example.

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
MODE will light up.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
Step 2 Press the Up or Down keys to change the setting to
Execute.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Execute
MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset
to 0.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
0
Step 4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings
after leaving the standard control mode (the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR
key. The LED indicator will be extinguished, and the
fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection units memory. Any setting can be selected
again for a value change by pressing the keys.
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-33
6.12.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for
testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent
unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been
activated (see section Change-Enabling Function).
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the
global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a
pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If
the password has been changed by the user (see section Changing the
Password), the following description will apply accordingly.
P632
6-34 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650

Action
Display
Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN, select the
parameter MAI N: Man. tri p cmd. USER .

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
********
Step 2 Press the following keys in sequence:
Left
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*

Right
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*

Up
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*

Down
right.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*

Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting
can now be changed by pressing the up or down
keys.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 3 Change the setting to execute.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the
command.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on,
the control action can be terminated by pressing the
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-35
6.12.9 Changing the Password
6.12.9.1 Local Control Panel with Password Protection
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered
sequentially within a specific time interval. The left, right, up and down
keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and
4, respectively:
1
3
4
2
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this
change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
P632
6-36 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650

Action
Display
Step 0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the
LOC: Password setting.

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
********
Step 2 Press the left, right, up and down keys to enter
the valid password. The display will change as shown in
the column on the right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an
underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a
new password.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
_
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done
by pressing the up key followed by the down key.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line
prompts the user to enter the new password again.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 6 Re-enter the password.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-37

Action
Display
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been
re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
Step 7b If the password has been re-entered incorrectly, the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the
display shown on the right appears. The password has
to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
_
Step 8 The change in password can be canceled at any time
before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is
done, the original Password continues to be valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
6.12.9.2 Local Control Panel without Password Protection
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also
possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in
steps 4 and 6 of Table, (p. 6-37), without entering anything else. This will
configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control
actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling
function has been activated (see Change-Enabling Function, Section 6.12.3,
(p. 6-23)).
P632
6-38 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
6.12.9.3 Display the Password
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD
display as described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and
then on again.

Action
Display
Step 0 Turn off the device.

Step 1 Turn the device on again. At the very beginning of
device startup, press the four directional keys (left,
right, up and down) at the same time and hold
them down.
TEST
Step 2 When this condition is detected during startup, the
password is displayed.
Password
1234
Step 3 After the four keys are released, startup will continue.

TEST
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-39
6.12.9.4 Changing and Displaying the L/R Password
In order to enable local control on devices fitted with the graphic display HMI
(ordering option) the L/R password has to be entered.
P632
6-40 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650

Action
Display
Step 0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC, select the
LOC: Password L/R setting.

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
********
Step 2 Press the left, right, up and down keys to enter
the valid general password. The display will change as
shown in the column on the right.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The red LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will be illuminated. The current Password
L/R will appear in the third line.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
1423
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done
by pressing the up key followed by the down key.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
*

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line
prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
_
Step 6 Re-enter the new Password L/R.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
*
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 6-41

Action
Display

Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the new Password L/R has
been re-entered correctly, the red LED indicator labeled
EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display
appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
Step 7b If the new Password L/R has been re-entered
incorrectly, the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
remains illuminated and the display shown on the right
hand side appears. The new Password L/R needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change of
the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step
8).
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
_
Step 8 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any
time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is
done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
P632
6-42 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
7 SETTINGS
7.1 Parameters
The P632 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P632 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a cold restart. The P632 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P632_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P632 versions before P632630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named IED Configurator.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator.
Cancelling a Protection or Control Function
The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage
system by including the relevant protection or control functions in the device
configuration and cancelling all others (removing them from the device
configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control
function :
The protection or control function in question must be disabled.
None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled
may be assigned to a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to
a binary output or an LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list
setting.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to
other signals by way of an m out of n parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured
value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT:).
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group Binary Input (INP)
The P632 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are
shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The DataModelExplorer (available

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-1
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
The P632 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs
U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MAI N: Auto-
assi gnment I /O .) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P632
pin-type or ring-type cable socket terminals the symbolic slots A, B and C refer
to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type in the case of auto-
assignment is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B
as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the
DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new
bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active high mode) or absence
(active low mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal .
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group Binary Output (OUTP)
The P632 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The DataModelExplorer (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P632 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
P632
7 Settings
7-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter Technical Data). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B.
(Whether automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MAI N: Auto-
assi gnment I /O .) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P632
pin-type or ring-type cable socket terminals the symbolic slots A and B
correspond to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type in the case of auto-
assignment is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A and B
are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there
will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-
signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators
The P632 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled HEALTHY and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled OUT OF SERVICE and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled ALARM and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the EDIT MODE. Section
Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)
in Chapter Operation describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (open-circuit principle) or normally-energized (NE) mode (closed-circuit
principle) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 H 16) the colors red and green can be
independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-3
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P632. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P632 is
modified.
P632
7 Settings
7-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Default Min Max Unit Logic Diagram
Device
DVICE: Device type
000 000
632 631 762
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: Software version
002 120
Not measured 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
DVICE: Software version 6XX
010 167
Not measured 0 65535
[spacer]
DVICE: Software version 7XX
010 168
[spacer]
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: SW date
002 122
01.01.97 01.01.97 07.11.98 dd.mm.yy
[spacer]
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version communic.
002 103
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version
002 059
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol
per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: Language version
002 123
0.0 0.0 899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer]
DVICE: Text vers.data model
002 121
0 0 255
[spacer]
Using the text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier 0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer]
DVICE: F number
002 124
0 0 9999
[spacer]
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-5
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DVICE: AFS Order No.
001 000
0:
[spacer]
DVICE: PCS Order No.
001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer]
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1
000 003
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 004
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 005
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 006
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 007
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 008
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 009
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 010
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 011
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 012
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 013
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 014
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 015
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 016
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 017
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 018
0 0 999
P632
7 Settings
7-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
000 019
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 020
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 021
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 022
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 023
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 024
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 025
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 026
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 027
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 028
0 0 999
[spacer]
000 029
0 0 999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer]
DVICE: Module var. slot 1
086 050
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 051
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 052
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 053
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 054
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 055
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 056
65535: Not fitted
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-7
Parameter Address
[spacer]
086 057
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 058
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 059
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 060
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 061
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 062
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 063
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 064
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 065
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 066
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 067
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 068
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 069
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 070
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer]
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1
086 193
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 194
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 195
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 196
27: Not fitted
P632
7 Settings
7-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
086 197
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 198
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 199
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 200
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 201
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 202
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 203
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 204
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 205
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 206
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 207
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 208
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 209
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 210
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 211
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 212
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
086 213
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-9
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant of module A
086 047
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Version of module A
086 190
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
[spacer]
DVICE: MAC address module A
104 061
2:
[spacer]
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant of module L
086 048
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Version of module L
086 191
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant of module B
086 049
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Version of module B
086 192
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer]
DVICE: Variant module B (a)
086 046
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer]
DVICE: Version module B (a)
086 189
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer]
DVICE: IP address
111 000
2:
[spacer]
DVICE: Subnet mask
111 001
2:
P632
7 Settings
7-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DVICE: MAC address
111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer]
DVICE: Customer ID data 1
000 040
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 041
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 042
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 043
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 044
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 045
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 046
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
000 047
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer]
DVICE: Location
001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer]
DVICE: Device ID
000 035
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: Substation ID
000 036
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-11
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DVICE: Feeder ID
000 037
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer]
DVICE: Device password 1
000 048
0 0 9999
[spacer]
DVICE: Device password 2
000 049
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version DHMI
002 131
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version DHMI DM
002 132
1.10 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
DVICE: SW vers.Chin.DHMI DM
008 233
2.00 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version OS
002 101
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version OS DM
002 111
1.01 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
DVICE: SW version FPGA
010 169
[spacer]
Internal software version numbers.
Parameter Address
Local control panel
LOC: Local HMI exists
221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
P632
7 Settings
7-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Address
Local control panel
LOC: Language
003 020
2: Reference language
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer]
LOC: Decimal delimiter
003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Password
003 035
1234 0 4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer]
LOC: Password L/R
221 040
1423 0 4444
[spacer]
The password used to change the setting from Remote to Local control can
be defined here. (Switching from Local to Remote control occurs without
checking the password.)
[spacer]
LOC: Display L/R
221 070
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the control site Local or Remote shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Displ. interl. stat.
221 071
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the Locked or Unlocked status shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key
225 208
1: R <-> L Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches
between remote / local control (LR) or between remote+local control / local
control (R&LL).
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. reset key
005 251
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-13
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. read key
080 110
060 000: MAIN: Without function
[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.
Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1
030 238
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2
030 239
[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated
reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel
053 007
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel
053 005
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Fct. Fault Panel
053 003
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer]
LOC: Hold-time for Panels
031 075
5 1 10 s Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-6)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer]
LOC: Autom. return time
003 014
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-6)
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer]
LOC: Return time select.
221 030
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
P632
7 Settings
7-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOC: Return time illumin.
003 023
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-5)
[spacer]
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and any
switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-15
Parameter Address
PC link
PC: Bay address
003 068
1 0 254 Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
PC: Device address
003 069
1 0 255 Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer]
PC: Baud rate
003 081
115.2: 115.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Parity bit
003 181
1: Even Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P632.
[spacer]
PC: Spontan. sig. enable
003 187
0: None Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Select. spontan.sig.
003 189
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
003 084
0: Without Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel.
003 185
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer]
PC: Delta V
003 055
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: Delta I
003 056
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: IP address
111 004
192 0 255
P632
7 Settings
7-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
PC: IP address 1
111 005
168 0 255
[spacer]
PC: IP address 2
111 006
1 0 255
[spacer]
PC: IP address 3
111 007
2 0 255
[spacer]
IP address of the Ethernet interface of the P632's processor module.
This is the Ethernet interface of the processor module and can be used for
special service activities, e.g. for uploading new firmware.
Note: In the operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at PC: IP
address. The devices front panel display only displays the IP address
distributed to these four data model addresses:
PC: IP address,
PC: IP address 1,
PC: IP address 2,
PC: IP address 3.
Note: This interface can only be used if it has been configured (PC: IP
address, PC: Subnet mask, PC: IP address mode) and activated via
PC: IP Enable config..
[spacer]
PC: Subnet mask
111 008
255 0 255
[spacer]
PC: Subnet mask 1
111 009
255 0 255
[spacer]
PC: Subnet mask 2
111 010
255 0 255
[spacer]
PC: Subnet mask 3
111 011
0 0 255
[spacer]
Subnet mask of the Ethernet interface of the processor module.
Note: In the operating program, the complete mask is displayed at
PC: Subnet mask. The devices front panel display only displays the mask
distributed to these four data model addresses:
PC: Subnet mask,
PC: Subnet mask 1,
PC: Subnet mask 2,
PC: Subnet mask 3.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-17
Parameter Address
[spacer]
PC: IP address mode
111 016
1: DHCP
[spacer]
Setting of the method how the IP address of the Ethernet interface of the
processor module shall be defined.
DHCP: The IP address shall be retrieved from a DHCP server.
Fix: The setting of PC: IP address shall be used.
Device address: The setting of PC: IP address shall be used for the
first three number values of the IP address, the fourth number value of the
IP address shall be the value of PC: Device address.
[spacer]
PC: IP Enable config.
111 017
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Activating the Ethernet interface of the processor module.
[spacer]
PC: Delta f
003 057
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 155
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
PC: Delta t
003 058
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer]
PC: Time-out
003 188
1 1 60 min Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P632
7 Settings
7-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 1
COMM1: Function group COMM1
056 026
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer]
COMM1: General enable USER
003 170
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM1: Basic IEC870-5 enabl
003 215
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer]
COMM1: Addit. -101 enable
003 216
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer]
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable
003 217
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer]
COMM1: MODBUS enable
003 220
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer]
COMM1: DNP3 enable
003 231
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer]
COMM1: COURIER enable
103 040
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer]
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
003 167
[spacer]
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-19
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: -103 prot. variant
003 178
1: Private Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant
003 214
1: Compatible Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Line idle state
003 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer]
COMM1: Baud rate
003 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM1: Parity bit
003 171
2: Even Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P632.
P632
7 Settings
7-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Dead time monitoring
003 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The P632 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
COMM1: Mon. time polling
003 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
COMM1: Octet comm. address
003 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
ASDU: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer]
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3
003 240
0 0 255 Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.
The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COMM1: Octet comm. address is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-21
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Pos. acknowledgement
103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the
standard):
Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5
characters
Single character E5: single control character
[spacer]
COMM1: Test monitor on
003 166
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer]
COMM1: Name of manufacturer
003 161
1: SE Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Octet address ASDU
003 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable
003 177
65535: All Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
P632
7 Settings
7-22 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig.
003 179
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via logical communication
interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
003 074
0: Without Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer]
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel.
003 175
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta V
003 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta I
003 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta f
003 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-23
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
003 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta t
003 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
[spacer]
COMM1: Contin. general scan
003 077
Blocked 10 9000 s Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P632 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
[spacer]
COMM1: Comm. address length
003 201
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the communication address length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer]
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr.
003 200
0 0 255 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
[spacer]
COMM1: Cause transm. length
003 192
1: W/o source address Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
P632
7 Settings
7-24 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Address length ASDU
003 193
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
[spacer]
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU
003 194
0 0 255 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
[spacer]
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj.
003 196
2 2 3 Byte Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
[spacer]
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
003 197
0 0 255 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
[spacer]
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type
003 195
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
[spacer]
COMM1: Time tag length
003 198
3 3 7 Byte Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the time tag length.
[spacer]
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
003 190
1: Single signal Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-25
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion
003 191
1: Single signal Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single
signal or double signal.
[spacer]
COMM1: Initializ. signal
003 199
1: Yes Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
[spacer]
COMM1: Balanced operation
003 226
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis
(full duplex operation).
[spacer]
COMM1: Direction bit
003 227
0 0 1 Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Time-out interval
003 228
0.40 0.10 2.55 s Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
[spacer]
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds
003 210
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig.
003 211
[spacer]
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
P632
7 Settings
7-26 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
003 212
[spacer]
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param.
003 213
[spacer]
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS)
003 152
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer]
COMM1: Autom.event confirm.
003 249
0: Without Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order
for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
[spacer]
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay
003 241
0 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
[spacer]
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout
003 242
40 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
[spacer]
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode
003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-27
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout
003 244
0.10 0.05 2.54 s Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
[spacer]
COMM1: Link Max. Retries
003 245
2 1 10 Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
[spacer]
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout
003 246
5.0 0.5 25.4 s Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
[spacer]
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del.
003 247
60 5 254 s Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
[spacer]
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs
003 232
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer]
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs
003 233
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs.
[spacer]
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp.
003 235
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs.
P632
7 Settings
7-28 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp
003 236
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
003 250
16 0 255 Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in
object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3)
003 248
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-18)
[spacer]
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
[spacer]
COMM1: Command selection
103 042
[spacer]
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Signal selection
103 043
[spacer]
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
[spacer]
COMM1: Meas. val. selection
103 044
[spacer]
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Parameter selection
103 045
[spacer]
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer]
COMM1: Delta t (COURIER)
103 046
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-29
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 2
COMM2: Function group COMM2
056 057
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
[spacer]
COMM2: General enable USER
103 170
0: No Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
[spacer]
COMM2: Line idle state
103 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer]
COMM2: Baud rate
103 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM2: Parity bit
103 171
2: Even Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P632.
[spacer]
COMM2: Dead time monitoring
103 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
The P632 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer]
COMM2: Mon. time polling
103 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer]
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault
103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
P632
7 Settings
7-30 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
103 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer]
103 161
1: SE Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer]
103 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer]
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable
103 177
0: None Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer]
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig.
103 179
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer]
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat
103 074
0: Without Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer]
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel.
103 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the
communication interface.
[spacer]
COMM2: Delta V
103 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-31
Parameter Address
[spacer]
COMM2: Delta I
103 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer]
COMM2: Delta f
103 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer]
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel
103 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
[spacer]
COMM2: Delta t
103 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
P632
7 Settings
7-32 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
IEC 61850
Communication
IEC: Function group IEC
056 059
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Important notice: Some of the parameters in function group IEC are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool IED Configurator, they cannot be modified
from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program, and therefore
these parameters are listed separately.
[spacer]
IEC: General enable USER
104 000
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer]
IEC: Switch Config. Bank
104 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer]
IEC: Active Config. Name
104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
[spacer]
IEC: Active Config. Vers.
104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.
[spacer]
IEC: Inact. Config. Name
104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer]
IEC: Inact. Config. Vers.
104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-33
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IEC: IED name
104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and neither a digit
nor the underscore character must be the first character. Note that a non-
standard name causes problems with the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer]
IEC: IP address
104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer]
IEC: Subnet mask
104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer]
IEC: Gateway address
104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer]
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP
104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer]
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP
104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
P632
7 Settings
7-34 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IEC: SigGGIO1 selection
104 064
[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol
IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer]
IEC: Diff. local time
104 206
0 -1440 1440 min
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer]
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time
104 207
60 -1440 1440 min
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
[spacer]
IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time
104 219
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is
wanted.
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start
104 220
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d
104 221
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m
104 222
3: March
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like on the last Sunday in March may be used.
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
104 223
120 0 1440 min
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end
104 225
5: Last
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d
104 226
7: Sunday
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m
104 227
10: October
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-35
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
104 228
180 0 1440 min
[spacer]
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
P632
7 Settings
7-36 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: Function group GOOSE
056 068
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Config.
Bank.
[spacer]
GOOSE: General enable USER
106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
106 011
[spacer]
106 013
[spacer]
106 015
[spacer]
106 017
[spacer]
106 019
[spacer]
106 021
[spacer]
106 023
[spacer]
106 025
[spacer]
106 027
[spacer]
106 029
[spacer]
106 031
[spacer]
106 033
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-37
Parameter Address
[spacer]
106 035
[spacer]
106 037
[spacer]
106 039
[spacer]
106 041
[spacer]
106 043
[spacer]
106 045
[spacer]
106 047
[spacer]
106 049
[spacer]
106 051
[spacer]
106 053
[spacer]
106 055
[spacer]
106 057
[spacer]
106 059
[spacer]
106 061
[spacer]
106 063
[spacer]
106 065
[spacer]
106 067
[spacer]
106 069
[spacer]
106 071
P632
7 Settings
7-38 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
106 073
[spacer]
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE
outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to
GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 in the datasets.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
107 006
[spacer]
107 016
[spacer]
107 026
[spacer]
107 036
[spacer]
107 046
[spacer]
107 056
[spacer]
107 066
[spacer]
107 076
[spacer]
107 086
[spacer]
107 096
[spacer]
107 106
[spacer]
107 116
[spacer]
107 126
[spacer]
107 136
[spacer]
107 146
[spacer]
107 156
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-39
Parameter Address
[spacer]
107 157
[spacer]
107 158
[spacer]
107 159
[spacer]
107 160
[spacer]
107 161
[spacer]
107 162
[spacer]
107 163
[spacer]
107 164
[spacer]
107 165
[spacer]
107 166
[spacer]
107 167
[spacer]
107 168
[spacer]
107 169
[spacer]
107 170
[spacer]
107 171
[spacer]
107 172
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1/Pos1.stVal to
GosGGIO1/Pos32.stVal) to a binary logical state signal on the device so that they
can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. Signals
configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data attributes
configured for GOOSE receipt.
P632
7 Settings
7-40 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
GSSE: Function group GSSE
056 060
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GSSE or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. Parameters included in this function group are
only effective when function group IEC is configured and enabled and when the
parameters in this function group have been activated by setting the parameter
IEC: Switch Config. Bank.
[spacer]
GSSE: General enable USER
104 049
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.
[spacer]
GSSE: Min. cycle
104 052
10 1 60 ms
[spacer]
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle
time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this
formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))
N-1
[ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of
a GSSE bit pair.
[spacer]
GSSE: Max. cycle
104 053
1 1 60 s
[spacer]
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see GSSE: Min. cycle. Should the
calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set
max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
[spacer]
GSSE: Increment
104 054
900 0 999
[spacer]
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see GSSE: Min. cycle.
[spacer]
GSSE: Operating mode
104 055
0: Promiscuous
[spacer]
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address
(network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the
operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have logged-
on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on
successfully, are read and processed.
[spacer]
GSSE: Output 1 bit pair
104 101
0: No selection
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-41
Parameter Address
[spacer]
104 104
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 107
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 110
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 113
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 119
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 122
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 125
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 128
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 134
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 137
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 140
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 143
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 149
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 152
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 155
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 158
0: No selection
P632
7 Settings
7-42 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
104 161
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 164
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 167
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 170
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 173
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 176
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 179
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 182
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 185
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 188
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 191
0: No selection
[spacer]
104 194
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE
outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed
number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED)
during a send operation.
[spacer]
GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
104 102
[spacer]
104 105
[spacer]
104 108
[spacer]
104 111
[spacer]
104 114
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-43
Parameter Address
[spacer]
104 117
[spacer]
104 120
[spacer]
104 123
[spacer]
104 126
[spacer]
104 129
[spacer]
104 132
[spacer]
104 135
[spacer]
104 138
[spacer]
104 141
[spacer]
104 144
[spacer]
104 147
[spacer]
104 150
[spacer]
104 153
[spacer]
104 156
[spacer]
104 159
[spacer]
104 162
[spacer]
104 165
[spacer]
104 168
[spacer]
104 171
P632
7 Settings
7-44 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
104 174
[spacer]
104 177
[spacer]
104 180
[spacer]
104 183
[spacer]
104 186
[spacer]
104 189
[spacer]
104 192
[spacer]
104 195
[spacer]
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE outputs.
The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured
above.
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 1 bit pair
105 001
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 006
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 011
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 016
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 021
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 026
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 031
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 036
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 041
0: No selection
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-45
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 046
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 051
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 056
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 061
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 066
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 071
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 076
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 081
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 086
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 091
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 096
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 101
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 106
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 111
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 116
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 121
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 126
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 131
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 136
0: No selection
P632
7 Settings
7-46 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 141
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 146
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 151
0: No selection
[spacer]
105 156
0: No selection
[spacer]
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is
always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a
maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 1 IED name
105 002
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 007
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 012
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 017
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 022
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 027
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 032
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 037
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 042
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 047
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 052
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 057
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 062
1: Remote IED
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-47
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 067
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 072
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 077
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 082
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 087
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 092
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 097
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 102
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 107
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 112
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 117
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 122
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 127
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 132
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 137
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 142
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 147
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
105 152
1: Remote IED
P632
7 Settings
7-48 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 157
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 1 default
105 003
0: 0
[spacer]
105 008
0: 0
[spacer]
105 013
0: 0
[spacer]
105 018
0: 0
[spacer]
105 023
0: 0
[spacer]
105 028
0: 0
[spacer]
105 033
0: 0
[spacer]
105 038
0: 0
[spacer]
105 043
0: 0
[spacer]
105 048
0: 0
[spacer]
105 053
0: 0
[spacer]
105 058
0: 0
[spacer]
105 063
0: 0
[spacer]
105 068
0: 0
[spacer]
105 073
0: 0
[spacer]
105 078
0: 0
[spacer]
105 083
0: 0
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-49
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 088
0: 0
[spacer]
105 093
0: 0
[spacer]
105 098
0: 0
[spacer]
105 103
0: 0
[spacer]
105 108
0: 0
[spacer]
105 113
0: 0
[spacer]
105 118
0: 0
[spacer]
105 123
0: 0
[spacer]
105 128
0: 0
[spacer]
105 133
0: 0
[spacer]
105 138
0: 0
[spacer]
105 143
0: 0
[spacer]
105 148
0: 0
[spacer]
105 153
0: 0
[spacer]
105 158
0: 0
[spacer]
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE
input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side)
is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig.
105 004
[spacer]
105 009
P632
7 Settings
7-50 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 014
[spacer]
105 019
[spacer]
105 024
[spacer]
105 029
[spacer]
105 034
[spacer]
105 039
[spacer]
105 044
[spacer]
105 049
[spacer]
105 054
[spacer]
105 059
[spacer]
105 064
[spacer]
105 069
[spacer]
105 074
[spacer]
105 079
[spacer]
105 084
[spacer]
105 089
[spacer]
105 094
[spacer]
105 099
[spacer]
105 104
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-51
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 109
[spacer]
105 114
[spacer]
105 119
[spacer]
105 124
[spacer]
105 129
[spacer]
105 134
[spacer]
105 139
[spacer]
105 144
[spacer]
105 149
[spacer]
105 154
[spacer]
105 159
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on
the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection or logic
functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit
pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE.
Parameter Address
IRIGB interface
IRIGB: Function group IRIGB
056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
[spacer]
IRIGB: General enable USER
023 200
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-39)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P632
7 Settings
7-52 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Configurable func
tion keys
F_KEY: Password funct.key 1
003 036
0 0 4444
[spacer]
030 242
0 0 4444
[spacer]
030 243
0 0 4444
[spacer]
030 244
0 0 4444
[spacer]
030 245
0 0 4444
[spacer]
030 246
0 0 4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1
080 112
[spacer]
080 113
[spacer]
080 114
[spacer]
080 115
[spacer]
080 116
[spacer]
080 117
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu
jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 or LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Operating mode F1
080 132
1: Key
[spacer]
080 133
1: Key
[spacer]
080 134
1: Key
[spacer]
080 135
1: Key
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-53
Parameter Address
[spacer]
080 136
1: Key
[spacer]
080 137
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer]
F_KEY: Return time fct.keys
003 037
10 1 60000 s
[spacer]
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
P632
7 Settings
7-54 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Binary input
INP: Filter
010 220
0 0 20 Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-43)
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Oper. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer]
INP: Fct. assignm. U 701
152 109
[spacer]
152 112
[spacer]
152 115
[spacer]
152 118
[spacer]
152 121
[spacer]
152 124
[spacer]
184 002
[spacer]
184 006
[spacer]
184 010
[spacer]
184 014
[spacer]
184 018
[spacer]
184 022
[spacer]
184 026
[spacer]
184 030
[spacer]
184 034
[spacer]
184 038
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-55
Parameter Address
[spacer]
184 042
[spacer]
184 046
[spacer]
184 050
[spacer]
184 054
[spacer]
184 058
[spacer]
184 062
[spacer]
184 066
[spacer]
184 070
[spacer]
184 074
[spacer]
184 078
[spacer]
184 082
[spacer]
184 086
[spacer]
184 090
[spacer]
184 094
[spacer]
152 145
[spacer]
152 148
[spacer]
152 151
[spacer]
152 154
[spacer]
152 163
P632
7 Settings
7-56 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
152 166
[spacer]
152 169
[spacer]
152 172
[spacer]
152 175
[spacer]
152 178
[spacer]
192 002
[spacer]
192 006
[spacer]
192 010
[spacer]
192 014
[spacer]
192 018
[spacer]
192 022
[spacer]
194 002
[spacer]
194 006
[spacer]
194 010
[spacer]
194 014
[spacer]
194 018
[spacer]
194 022
[spacer]
153 087
[spacer]
153 090
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-57
Parameter Address
[spacer]
153 093
[spacer]
153 096
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
[spacer]
INP: Oper. mode U 701
152 110
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 113
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 116
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 119
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 122
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 125
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 027
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 031
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 035
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 039
1: Active "high"
P632
7 Settings
7-58 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
184 043
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 047
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 051
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 055
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 059
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 063
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 067
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 071
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 075
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 079
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 083
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 087
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 091
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
184 095
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 146
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 149
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 152
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 155
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 164
1: Active "high"
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-59
Parameter Address
[spacer]
152 167
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 170
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 173
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 176
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
152 179
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
192 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 003
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 007
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 011
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 015
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 019
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
194 023
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 088
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 091
1: Active "high"
P632
7 Settings
7-60 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
153 094
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
153 097
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-61
Parameter Address
Measured data input
MEASI: Function group MEASI
056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
[spacer]
MEASI: General enable USER
011 100
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-44)
Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer]
MEASI: Enable IDC p.u.
037 190
0.000 0.000 0.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P632 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC< open circuit
037 191
3.0 0.0 10.0 mA Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P632 will issue an open
circuit signal.
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 1
037 150
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 2
037 152
Blocked 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 3
037 154
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 4
037 156
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 5
037 158
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 6
037 160
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 7
037 162
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 8
037 164
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 9
037 166
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 10
037 168
P632
7 Settings
7-62 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 11
037 170
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 12
037 172
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 13
037 174
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 14
037 176
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 15
037 178
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 16
037 180
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 17
037 182
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 18
037 184
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 19
037 186
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC 20
037 188
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 1
037 151
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 2
037 153
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 3
037 155
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 4
037 157
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 5
037 159
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 6
037 161
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 7
037 163
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 8
037 165
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-63
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 9
037 167
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 10
037 169
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 11
037 171
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 12
037 173
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 13
037 175
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 14
037 177
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 15
037 179
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 16
037 181
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 17
037 183
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 18
037 185
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 19
037 187
[spacer]
MEASI: IDC,lin 20
037 189
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer]
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1
037 192
0 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-48)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer]
MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20
037 193
1200 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-48)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
P632
7 Settings
7-64 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Binary and analog
output
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 701
150 145
[spacer]
150 148
[spacer]
150 151
[spacer]
150 154
[spacer]
150 157
[spacer]
150 160
[spacer]
150 163
[spacer]
150 166
[spacer]
150 169
[spacer]
150 172
[spacer]
150 193
[spacer]
150 196
[spacer]
150 199
[spacer]
150 202
[spacer]
150 205
[spacer]
150 208
[spacer]
150 211
[spacer]
150 214
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-65
Parameter Address
[spacer]
150 217
[spacer]
150 220
[spacer]
150 223
[spacer]
150 226
[spacer]
150 229
[spacer]
150 232
[spacer]
171 002
[spacer]
171 006
[spacer]
171 010
[spacer]
171 014
[spacer]
171 018
[spacer]
171 022
[spacer]
171 026
[spacer]
171 030
[spacer]
173 002
[spacer]
173 006
[spacer]
173 010
[spacer]
173 014
[spacer]
173 018
P632
7 Settings
7-66 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
173 022
[spacer]
151 201
[spacer]
151 204
[spacer]
151 207
[spacer]
151 210
[spacer]
151 213
[spacer]
151 216
[spacer]
151 219
[spacer]
151 222
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer]
OUTP: Oper. mode K 701
150 146
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 149
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 152
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 155
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 158
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 161
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 164
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 167
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 170
1: ES updating
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-67
Parameter Address
[spacer]
150 173
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 194
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 197
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 200
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 203
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 206
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 209
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 212
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 215
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 218
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 221
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 224
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 227
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 230
1: ES updating
[spacer]
150 233
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 015
1: ES updating
P632
7 Settings
7-68 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
171 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 027
1: ES updating
[spacer]
171 031
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 003
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 007
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 015
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 019
1: ES updating
[spacer]
173 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 202
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 205
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 208
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 211
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 214
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 217
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 220
1: ES updating
[spacer]
151 223
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-69
Parameter Address
Measured data
output
MEASO: Function group MEASO
056 020
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer]
MEASO: General enable USER
031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer]
MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD
053 002
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
010 010
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD
037 140
0.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
037 141
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
037 142
0 0 399
P632
7 Settings
7-70 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
037 143
399 0 399
[spacer]
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range measured values to be issued the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. BCD ...
Scaled max. val. BCD
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; range: BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
BBCD display values for measured values Mx,min; range: BCD-Out min.
value
BCD display values for measured values Mx,max; range: BCD-Out max.
value
[spacer]
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1
053 000
[spacer]
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2
053 001
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer]
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
010 114
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Hold time output A-2
010 115
0.10 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1
037 104
0.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1
037 105
Blocked 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1
037 106
1.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2
037 110
0.000 0.000 1.000
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-71
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2
037 111
Blocked 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2
037 112
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is
to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range measured values to
be issued is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values in the data model: Scaled min. val. Ax ...
Scaled max. val. Ax
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value in the data model: Scaled knee val. Ax
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1
037 107
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1
037 108
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1
037 109
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2
037 113
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2
037 114
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA
P632
7 Settings
7-72 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2
037 115
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Output current range for measured values in the range measured values to be
issued; designation in the data model: An-Out min. val. Ax ... An-Out max.
val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,min; designation in the data
model: An-Out min. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values Mx,max; designation in the data
model: An-Out max. val. Ax
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: AnOut knee point Ax
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer]
MEASO: Output value 1
037 120
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
037 121
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
037 122
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be
issued.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-73
Parameter Address
LED indicators
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green
085 184
060 001: MAIN: Healthy
[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.
The function MAIN: Healthy is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell.
085 001
004 065: MAIN: Blocked/faulty
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN: Blocked/faulty is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell.
085 004
036 070: SFMON: Warning (LED)
[spacer]
The function SFMON: Warning (LED) is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: Fct.assig. H 4 red
085 007
036 251: MAIN: Gen. trip signal
[spacer]
085 057
[spacer]
085 010
[spacer]
085 060
[spacer]
085 013
[spacer]
085 063
[spacer]
085 016
[spacer]
085 066
[spacer]
085 019
[spacer]
085 069
[spacer]
085 022
[spacer]
085 072
P632
7 Settings
7-74 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LED: Fct.assig. H10 red
085 025
[spacer]
LED: Fct.assig. H10 green
085 075
[spacer]
085 028
[spacer]
085 078
[spacer]
085 031
[spacer]
085 081
[spacer]
085 034
[spacer]
085 084
[spacer]
085 037
[spacer]
085 087
[spacer]
085 040
[spacer]
085 090
[spacer]
085 043
[spacer]
085 093
[spacer]
085 131
[spacer]
085 161
[spacer]
085 134
[spacer]
085 164
[spacer]
085 137
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-75
Parameter Address
[spacer]
085 167
[spacer]
085 140
[spacer]
085 170
[spacer]
085 143
[spacer]
085 173
[spacer]
085 146
[spacer]
085 177
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
[spacer]
085 185
080 111: LOC: Edit mode
[spacer]
The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
LED: Operating mode H 1
085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
085 002
1: ES updating
[spacer]
[spacer]
085 005
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer]
085 008
3: ES reset (fault)
[spacer]
085 011
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 014
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 017
1: ES updating
P632
7 Settings
7-76 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
085 020
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 023
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 026
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 029
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 032
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 035
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 038
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 041
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 044
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 132
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 135
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 138
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 141
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 144
1: ES updating
[spacer]
085 147
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
[spacer]
085 183
1: ES updating
[spacer]
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-77
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2
003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2) Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer]
MAIN: Type of bay
220 000
1 1 9999 Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
Configuration of a bay type.
[spacer]
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
103 210
0: COMM1
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer]
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time sync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Time sync. time-out
103 212
Blocked 1 60 min
[spacer]
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
P632
7 Settings
7-78 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1
035 160
65: Current IA,a
[spacer]
035 161
66: Current IB,a
[spacer]
035 162
67: Current IC,a
[spacer]
035 163
160: Current IY,a
[spacer]
035 164
69: Current IA,b
[spacer]
035 165
70: Current IB,b
[spacer]
035 166
71: Current IC,b
[spacer]
035 167
161: Current IY,b
[spacer]
035 168
232: Voltage V
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter Address
Differential protec
tion
DIFF: Function group DIFF
056 027
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DIFF or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-79
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_1: Function group REF_1
056 037
0: Without
[spacer]
REF_2: Function group REF_2
056 038
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups REF_x or including them in the configuration. If a
function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC1: Function group DTOC1
056 031
0: Without
[spacer]
DTOC2: Function group DTOC2
056 032
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group DTOC1 / DTOC2 or including it in the configuration.
If a function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur
rent protection
IDMT1: Function group IDMT1
056 051
0: Without
[spacer]
IDMT2: Function group IDMT2
056 061
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups IDMT1 and IDMT2 or including them in the
configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P632
7 Settings
7-80 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: Function group THRM1
056 054
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups THRMx or including them in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec
tion
V<>: Function group V<>
056 010
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: Function group f<>
056 033
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: Function group V/f
056 056
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V/f or including it in the configuration. If the function
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-81
Parameter Address
Current transformer
supervision
CTS: Function group CTS
056 077
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CTS or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Note: The new processor board with a DSP coprocessor is an unconditional
hardware requirement for this function group!
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
MCM_1: Function group MCM_1
056 073
0: Without
[spacer]
MCM_2: Function group MCM_2
056 074
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups MCM_x or including them in the configuration. If a
function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_1: Function group CBF_1
056 007
0: Without
[spacer]
CBF_2: Function group CBF_2
056 082
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF_x or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIMIT: Function group LIMIT
056 025
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
P632
7 Settings
7-82 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIM_1: Function group LIM_1
056 042
0: Without
[spacer]
LIM_2: Function group LIM_2
056 043
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups LIM_1 to LIM_3 or including them in the
configuration. If a function group is cancelled, then all associated settings and
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOGIC: Function group LOGIC
056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOG_2: Function group LOG_2
056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (Logic 2) or including it in the configuration.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-83
Parameter Address
External device
DEV01: Function group DEV01
210 047
0: Without
[spacer]
210 097
0: Without
[spacer]
210 147
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the
configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all
associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer]
DEV01: Funct. type, signal
210 034
242 240 254
[spacer]
210 084
242 240 254
[spacer]
210 134
242 240 254
[spacer]
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer]
DEV01: Inform. No., signal
210 035
1 1 254
[spacer]
210 085
3 1 254
[spacer]
210 135
5 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
[spacer]
DEV01: Funct. type, command
210 032
242 240 254
[spacer]
210 082
242 240 254
[spacer]
210 132
242 240 254
[spacer]
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the low
address of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-
C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
P632
7 Settings
7-84 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DEV01: Inform. No., command
210 033
65 1 254
[spacer]
210 083
67 1 254
[spacer]
210 133
69 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic
ILOCK: Function group ILOCK
250 102
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-85
Parameter Address
Single-pole
commands
CMD_1: Function group CMD_1
249 252
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C001 config.
200 004
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-241)
[spacer]
200 009
0: No
[spacer]
200 014
0: No
[spacer]
200 019
0: No
[spacer]
200 024
0: No
[spacer]
200 029
0: No
[spacer]
200 034
0: No
[spacer]
200 039
0: No
[spacer]
200 044
0: No
[spacer]
200 049
0: No
[spacer]
200 054
0: No
[spacer]
200 059
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.
If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
P632
7 Settings
7-86 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals
SIG_1: Function group SIG_1
249 250
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer]
SIG_1: Signal S001 config.
226 007
0: No Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
226 015
0: No
[spacer]
226 023
0: No
[spacer]
226 031
0: No
[spacer]
226 039
0: No
[spacer]
226 047
0: No
[spacer]
226 055
0: No
[spacer]
226 063
0: No
[spacer]
226 071
0: No
[spacer]
226 079
0: No
[spacer]
226 087
0: No
[spacer]
226 095
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration.
If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-87
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
Parameter Address
PC link
PC: Command blocking
003 182
0: No Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC
interface.
[spacer]
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
003 086
0: No Fig. 3-8, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured
data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 1
COMM1: Command block. USER
003 172
1: Yes Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 1.
[spacer]
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
003 076
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
P632
7 Settings
7-88 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 2
COMM2: Command block. USER
103 172
0: No Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 2.
[spacer]
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
103 076
0: No Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog
output
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER
021 014
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-51)
[spacer]
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-89
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Device on-line
003 030
0: No (= off) Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: Test mode USER
003 012
0: No Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer]
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom
010 030
50: 50 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase sequence
010 049
1: A - B - C
[spacer]
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.
(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field's direction, either clockwise
or anticlockwise.)
[spacer]
MAIN: Time tag
221 098
1: 1stEdge,OpMem sorted
[spacer]
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for
the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is
detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data
memory are made in chronological order or not.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end a
019 020
200 1 50000 A Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom C.T.prim.,end b
019 021
200 1 50000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer (phase
currents) of end a or b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end a
019 027
200 1 50000 A
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom C.T.Yprim,end b
019 028
200 1 50000 A
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer at the
neutral-point-to-ground connection.
P632
7 Settings
7-90 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim.
010 002
100.0 0.1 1500.0 kV Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom device, end a
010 024
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
MAIN: Inom device, end b
010 025
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-71)
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal current of the device for the measurement of the phase
currents of ends a or b. This also corresponds to the nominal device current.
[spacer]
MAIN: IY,nom device, end a
010 142
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
MAIN: IY,nom device, end b
010 143
1.0: 1.0 A Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-71)
[spacer]
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec.
010 009
100 50 130 V Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for voltage
measurement.
[spacer]
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a
010 140
1: Standard Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-69)
Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b
010 150
1: Standard Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-71)
[spacer]
Instead of accounting for connection reversal applied to one end in the settings
for DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx, it is possible to account for it in the
settings for connection of the measuring circuits. The connection of the phase
current circuits, ends a and b, is set here as Standard if in accordance with the
connection scheme shown in Chapter Installation and Connection, else as
Opposite.
[spacer]
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,a
010 141
1: Standard Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IY,b
010 151
1: Standard Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-71)
[spacer]
If the connection is as shown in Chapter Installation and Connection, then the
setting must be Standard. If the connection direction is reversed then the
setting must be Opposite.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-91
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP
011 030
0.00 0.00 0.20 Inom Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ineg
011 048
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas.value rel. Ipos
011 058
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for a minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the P632 to
display the negative-sequence (positive-sequence) current as measured
operating data.
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN
011 031
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IY
011 036
0.000 0.000 0.200 IN,nom Fig. 3-50, (p. 3-79)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating value of the current in the neutral-point-to-ground
connection to be displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V
011 032
0.00 0.00 0.20 Vnom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded in order for the
measured operating values of the voltage to be displayed.
[spacer]
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del
010 113
15.0 0.1 60.0 min Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-77)
Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current I
P,max
.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1
005 248
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2
005 249
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER is enabled.
P632
7 Settings
7-92 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1
021 021
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT) is activated.
[spacer]
021 022
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT) is activated.
[spacer]
021 048
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 3
(MAIN: Blocking 3 EXT) is activated.
[spacer]
021 049
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to be blocked together if blocking input 4
(MAIN: Blocking 4 EXT) is activated.
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER
021 012
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
021 001
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
[spacer]
021 002
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 2.
[spacer]
021 046
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 047
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
021 003
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-93
Parameter Address
[spacer]
021 004
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 032
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 033
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1
021 023
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer]
021 024
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 025
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
021 026
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault
021 031
[spacer]
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
[spacer]
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open
021 017
[spacer]
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open
021 061
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to evaluate the CB open
position signal.
[spacer]
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed
021 020
P632
7 Settings
7-94 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed
021 060
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to evaluate the CB closed
position signal.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
221 057
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
[spacer]
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1
221 200
0.02 0.00 2.54 s Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
221 203
0.02 0.00 2.54 s
[spacer]
221 206
0.02 0.00 2.54 s
[spacer]
Setting for the debouncing time.
[spacer]
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1
221 201
0.0 0.0 25.4 s Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
221 204
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
[spacer]
221 207
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
[spacer]
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.
[spacer]
MAIN: Change of state gr.1
221 202
0 0 254 Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
221 205
0 0 254
[spacer]
221 208
0 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
[spacer]
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd.
221 230
20 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
[spacer]
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.
221 231
1 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-95
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact
221 007
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control commands
for switchgear.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
221 008
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
[spacer]
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O
221 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-187, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling of automatic assignment of binary inputs and outputs to
the set bay type.
[spacer]
MAIN: Electrical control
221 061
1: Remote
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control
switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control.
[spacer]
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv.
221 079
3 0 255 s
[spacer]
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal Sw. dev. interm. pos. already present and the status signal continuously
absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective
binary inputs, will be issued. (See also Processing status signals from manually
operated switchgear.)
[spacer]
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin.
221 063
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the control
process of motor driven switchgear.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping
221 010
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external
protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
[spacer]
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped
221 012
0: Without function
[spacer]
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the
CB trip signal.
P632
7 Settings
7-96 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip
221 013
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P632 to signal the CB open position
signal.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext
221 050
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext
221 024
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
221 051
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
221 052
[spacer]
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group
signal).
Parameter Address
Parameter subset
selection
PSS: Control via USER
003 100
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control
panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer]
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER
003 060
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer]
PSS: Keep time
003 063
Blocked 0.000 65.000 s Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-97
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring
SFMON: Fct. assign. warning
021 030
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals Warning
(LED) and Warning (relay) and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
ALARM. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer]
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention
021 018
Blocked 0 240 h
[spacer]
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
P632
7 Settings
7-98 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger
003 085
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer]
FT_RC: Id>
016 018
Blocked 0.01 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the differential current that will
trigger disturbance recording.
[spacer]
FT_RC: IR>
016 019
Blocked 0.01 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the restraining current that will
trigger fault recording.
[spacer]
FT_RC: Pre-fault time
003 078
5 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer]
FT_RC: Post-fault time
003 079
2 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer]
FT_RC: Max. recording time
003 075
50 5 300 Periods Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-99
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end a
016 096
1: Calculated Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
MAIN: Evaluation IN, end b
016 097
1: Calculated Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-74)
[spacer]
This setting specifies which current will be used by the P632 as the residual
current: either the calculated residual current derived from the sum of the phase
currents or the residual current measured at the fourth transformer.
[spacer]
MAIN: Hold time dyn.param.
018 009
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-86)
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time of the dynamic parameters. During this period, the
dynamic thresholds are active in place of the normal thresholds.
P632
7 Settings
7-100 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Differential protec
tion
DIFF: General enable USER
019 080
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the differential protection function.
[spacer]
DIFF: Reference power Sref
019 016
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power.
[spacer]
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,a
019 023
Not measured 0.000 50.000 kA Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632 for end a.
[spacer]
DIFF: Ref. curr. Iref,b
019 024
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632 for end b.
[spacer]
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,a
004 105
Not measured 0.000 50.000 Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for end a.
[spacer]
DIFF: Matching fact. kam,b
004 106
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for end b.
[spacer]
DIFF: Meas. value rel. Id
011 037
0.000 0.000 0.200 Iref Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
[spacer]
DIFF: Meas. value rel. IR
011 038
0.000 0.000 0.200 Iref Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-101
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_1: General enable USER
019 050
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
REF_2: General enable USER
019 150
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the ground fault differential protection.
[spacer]
REF_1: Select. meas. input
019 100
0: End a
[spacer]
REF_2: Select. meas. input
019 101
1: End b
[spacer]
Display of the measuring input that provides the measured values evaluated by
the ground differential protection function.
[spacer]
REF_1: Add.meas.inp. end b
019 120
0: No
[spacer]
In case of protecting an autotransformer, select whether this end shall be
considered by the REF function in addition to the phase currents in end a (T14)
and the the neutral-point current.
[spacer]
REF_1: Reference power Sref
019 031
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
REF_2: Reference power Sref
019 032
38.1 0.1 5000.0 MVA
[spacer]
Setting for the reference power, usually the nominal transformer power for the
relevant transformer end.
[spacer]
REF_1: Ref. curr. Iref
019 034
[spacer]
REF_2: Ref. curr. Iref
019 035
Not measured 0.000 50.000 kA
[spacer]
Display of the reference current calculated by the P632.
[spacer]
REF_1: Match. fact. kam,N,a
004 160
[spacer]
REF_1: Match. fact. kam,N,b
019 123
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632.
[spacer]
REF_1: Matching fact. kam,Y
004 163
P632
7 Settings
7-102 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
REF_2: Matching fact. kam,Y
004 164
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for the neutral-point
current.
[spacer]
REF_1: Meas. value rel. Id
011 039
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-147)
[spacer]
REF_2: Meas. value rel. Id
011 044
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum differential current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the differential currents as measured operating data.
[spacer]
REF_1: Meas. value rel. IR
011 040
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-147)
[spacer]
REF_2: Meas. value rel. IR
011 046
0.00 0.00 0.20 Iref
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum restraining current that must be exceeded in order for
the P632 to display the restraining currents as measured operating data.
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_2: Matching fact. kam,N
004 161
[spacer]
Display of the matching factor calculated by the P632 for the vector sum of the
phase currents.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-103
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC1: General enable USER
031 135
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
DTOC2: General enable USER
031 136
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Select. meas. input
019 103
0: End a Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Select. meas. input
019 104
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured values monitored
by the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT1: General enable USER
031 141
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
IDMT2: General enable USER
031 142
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Select. meas. input
019 106
0: End a Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-158)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Select. meas. input
019 116
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables
monitored by the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
P632
7 Settings
7-104 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: General enable USER
031 144
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer]
THRM1: Select. meas. input
019 109
1: End b Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
Selection of the measuring input that provides the measured variables relevant
for thermal overload protection.
[spacer]
THRM1: Operating mode
039 121
2: Relative replica Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of thermal overload protection. Select between
Absolute replica and Relative replica.
[spacer]
THRM1: O/T f.Iref persist 1
004 152
Not measured -40 300 C
[spacer]
Display of the difference between the settings for the maximum permissible
temperatures of the protected object and the coolant.
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec
tion
V<>: General enable USER
023 030
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-178)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-105
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: General enable USER
023 031
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer]
f<>: Evaluation time
018 201
4 3 6 Periods Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer]
f<>: Undervolt. block. V<
018 200
0.90 0.20 1.00 Vnom Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: General enable USER
019 097
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Overfluxing protection function.
Parameter Address
Current transformer
supervision
CTS: General enable USER
031 085
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the current transformer supervision function.
P632
7 Settings
7-106 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
MCM_1: General enable USER
031 146
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_2: General enable USER
031 147
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
[spacer]
MCM_1: Select. meas. input
031 150
0: End a
[spacer]
MCM_2: Select. meas. input
031 151
1: End b
[spacer]
Assigning measuring-circuit monitoring functions to ends a and b.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-107
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_1: General enable USER
022 080
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
CBF_2: General enable USER
022 214
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Select. meas. input
022 156
0: End a
[spacer]
CBF_2: Select. meas. input
022 157
1: End b
[spacer]
Selection of measuring input the circuit breaker failure protection is controlled
by its current.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Fct.assign. starting
022 202
[spacer]
CBF_2: Fct.assign. starting
022 216
[spacer]
Select which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the CBF
function.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Start with man. trip
022 154
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-206)
[spacer]
CBF_2: Start with man. trip
022 175
0: No
[spacer]
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
022 159
[spacer]
CBF_2: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
022 217
[spacer]
Selection of trip signals assigned to Gen. trip command 1 for which, in
addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts are
evaluated.
[spacer]
CBF_1: I<
022 160
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-206)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-208)
Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_2: I<
022 215
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
P632
7 Settings
7-108 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
CBF_1: IN<
022 180
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
CBF_2: IN<
022 181
1.00 0.05 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting of the comparator threshold for residual current monitoring function.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Evaluation IN
022 184
0: Without Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
CBF_2: Evaluation IN
022 185
0: Without
[spacer]
Select whether the measured or the calculated residual current shall be used for
residual current monitoring function. This choice is only possible when a
measuring input for the residual current is available, otherwise the internally
derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
[spacer]
CBF_1: t1 3p
022 165
0.15 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
CBF_2: t1 3p
022 221
0.15 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
[spacer]
CBF_1: t2
022 166
0.25 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
CBF_2: t2
022 222
0.25 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
022 167
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
022 223
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
022 168
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
022 224
0.25 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Latching trip cmd.t1
022 169
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-109
Parameter Address
[spacer]
022 225
0: No
[spacer]
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
022 170
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
022 226
0: No
[spacer]
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Delay/starting trig.
022 155
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-208)
[spacer]
CBF_2: Delay/starting trig.
022 220
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
The signal CBF_1: Trip signal (or CBF_2: Trip signal, ..., resp.) is
issued when this timer stage's time duration has elapsed.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Delay/fault beh. CB
022 171
0.12 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-208)
[spacer]
CBF_2: Delay/fault beh. CB
022 227
0.12 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from
its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized
through the current criterion (see section Fault behind CB protection).
[spacer]
CBF_1: Delay/CB sync.superv
022 172
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_2: Delay/CB sync.superv
022 218
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
P632
7 Settings
7-110 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIMIT: General enable USER
014 010
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer]
LIMIT: IDC,lin>
014 110
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT: IDC,lin>>
014 111
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>
014 112
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>>
014 113
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT: IDC,lin<
014 114
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT: IDC,lin<<
014 115
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<
014 116
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<<
014 117
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer]
LIMIT: T>
014 100
200 -20 200 C Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-111
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LIMIT: T>>
014 101
200 -20 200 C Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT>
014 103
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT>>
014 104
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer]
LIMIT: T<
014 105
-20 -20 200 C Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer]
LIMIT: T<<
014 106
-20 -20 200 C Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT<
014 107
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT<<
014 108
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
P632
7 Settings
7-112 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIM_1: General enable USER
014 014
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: General enable USER
014 015
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the limit value monitoring function.
[spacer]
LIM_1: Select. meas. input
019 111
0: End a Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-213)
[spacer]
LIM_2: Select. meas. input
019 112
1: End b
[spacer]
Selecting a measuring input for limit value monitoring of the measured values.
[spacer]
LIM_1: I>
015 116
1.20 0.20 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: I>
016 116
1.20 0.20 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I>.
[spacer]
LIM_1: I>>
015 117
Blocked 0.20 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: I>>
016 117
Blocked 0.20 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I>>.
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI>
015 120
5 0 100 s Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI>
016 120
5 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I>.
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI>>
015 121
Blocked 0 100 s Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI>>
016 121
Blocked 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I>>.
[spacer]
LIM_1: I<
015 118
0.10 0.00 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: I<
016 118
0.10 0.00 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I<.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-113
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LIM_1: I<<
015 119
[spacer]
LIM_2: I<<
016 119
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of I<<.
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI<
015 122
5 0 100 s Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI<
016 122
5 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I<.
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI<<
015 123
Blocked 0 100 s Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI<<
016 123
Blocked 0 100 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of I<<.
P632
7 Settings
7-114 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOGIC: General enable USER
031 099
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 1 USER
034 030
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 2 USER
034 031
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 3 USER
034 032
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 4 USER
034 033
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 5 USER
034 034
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 6 USER
034 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 7 USER
034 036
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 8 USER
034 037
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1
030 000
[spacer]
030 004
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
[spacer]
030 008
[spacer]
030 012
[spacer]
030 016
[spacer]
030 020
[spacer]
030 024
[spacer]
030 028
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-115
Parameter Address
[spacer]
030 032
[spacer]
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10
030 036
[spacer]
030 040
[spacer]
030 044
[spacer]
030 048
[spacer]
030 052
[spacer]
030 056
[spacer]
030 060
[spacer]
030 064
[spacer]
030 068
[spacer]
030 072
[spacer]
030 076
[spacer]
030 080
[spacer]
030 084
[spacer]
030 088
[spacer]
030 092
[spacer]
030 096
[spacer]
031 000
[spacer]
031 004
P632
7 Settings
7-116 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
031 008
[spacer]
031 012
[spacer]
031 016
[spacer]
031 020
[spacer]
031 024
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1
030 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
030 005
[spacer]
030 009
[spacer]
030 013
[spacer]
030 017
[spacer]
030 021
[spacer]
030 025
[spacer]
030 029
[spacer]
030 033
[spacer]
030 037
[spacer]
030 041
[spacer]
030 045
[spacer]
030 049
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-117
Parameter Address
[spacer]
030 053
[spacer]
030 057
[spacer]
030 061
[spacer]
030 065
[spacer]
030 069
[spacer]
030 073
[spacer]
030 077
[spacer]
030 081
[spacer]
030 085
[spacer]
030 089
[spacer]
030 093
[spacer]
030 097
[spacer]
031 001
[spacer]
031 005
[spacer]
031 009
[spacer]
031 013
[spacer]
031 017
[spacer]
031 021
P632
7 Settings
7-118 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
031 025
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1
030 002
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
030 006
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 010
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 014
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 018
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 022
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 026
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 030
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 034
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 038
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 042
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 046
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 050
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 054
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 058
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 062
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 066
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-119
Parameter Address
[spacer]
030 070
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 074
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 078
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 082
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 086
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 090
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 094
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 098
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 002
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 006
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 010
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 014
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 018
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 022
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 026
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer]
030 003
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
030 007
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 011
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P632
7 Settings
7-120 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
030 015
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 019
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 023
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 027
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 031
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 035
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 039
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 043
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 047
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 051
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 055
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 059
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 063
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 067
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 071
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 075
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 079
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 083
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 087
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-121
Parameter Address
[spacer]
030 091
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 095
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
030 099
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 003
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 007
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 011
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 015
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 019
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 023
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
031 027
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1
044 000
[spacer]
044 002
[spacer]
044 004
[spacer]
044 006
[spacer]
044 008
[spacer]
044 010
[spacer]
044 012
[spacer]
044 014
P632
7 Settings
7-122 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
044 016
[spacer]
044 018
[spacer]
044 020
[spacer]
044 022
[spacer]
044 024
[spacer]
044 026
[spacer]
044 028
[spacer]
044 030
[spacer]
044 032
[spacer]
044 034
[spacer]
044 036
[spacer]
044 038
[spacer]
044 040
[spacer]
044 042
[spacer]
044 044
[spacer]
044 046
[spacer]
044 048
[spacer]
044 050
[spacer]
044 052
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-123
Parameter Address
[spacer]
044 054
[spacer]
044 056
[spacer]
044 058
[spacer]
044 060
[spacer]
044 062
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
044 001
[spacer]
044 003
[spacer]
044 005
[spacer]
044 007
[spacer]
044 009
[spacer]
044 011
[spacer]
044 013
[spacer]
044 015
[spacer]
044 017
[spacer]
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t)
044 019
[spacer]
044 021
[spacer]
044 023
[spacer]
044 025
P632
7 Settings
7-124 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
044 027
[spacer]
044 029
[spacer]
044 031
[spacer]
044 033
[spacer]
044 035
[spacer]
044 037
[spacer]
044 039
[spacer]
044 041
[spacer]
044 043
[spacer]
044 045
[spacer]
044 047
[spacer]
044 049
[spacer]
044 051
[spacer]
044 053
[spacer]
044 055
[spacer]
044 057
[spacer]
044 059
[spacer]
044 061
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-125
Parameter Address
[spacer]
044 063
[spacer]
logic equation.
P632
7 Settings
7-126 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOG_2: General enable USER
011 137
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer]
LOG_2: Fct.assignm. outp. 1
050 000
[spacer]
050 004
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
[spacer]
050 008
[spacer]
050 012
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer]
LOG_2: Op. mode t output 1
050 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
050 005
[spacer]
050 009
[spacer]
050 013
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer]
LOG_2: Time t1 output 1
050 002
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
050 006
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
050 010
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
050 014
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer]
050 003
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
050 007
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
050 011
0 0 60000 s
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-127
Parameter Address
[spacer]
050 015
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
[spacer]
LOG_2: Sig.assig. outp. 1
064 000
[spacer]
064 002
[spacer]
064 004
[spacer]
064 006
[spacer]
logic equation.
[spacer]
LOG_2: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
064 001
[spacer]
064 003
[spacer]
064 005
[spacer]
064 007
[spacer]
logic equation.
P632
7 Settings
7-128 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Single-pole
commands
CMD_1: Design. command C001
200 000
1: C001
[spacer]
200 005
2: C002
[spacer]
200 010
3: C003
[spacer]
200 015
4: C004
[spacer]
200 020
5: C005
[spacer]
200 025
6: C006
[spacer]
200 030
7: C007
[spacer]
200 035
8: C008
[spacer]
200 040
9: C009
[spacer]
200 045
10: C010
[spacer]
200 050
11: C011
[spacer]
200 055
12: C012
[spacer]
Selection of the command designation.
[spacer]
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001
200 002
3: Persistent command Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-241)
[spacer]
200 007
[spacer]
200 012
[spacer]
200 017
[spacer]
200 022
[spacer]
200 027
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-129
Parameter Address
[spacer]
200 032
[spacer]
200 037
[spacer]
200 042
[spacer]
200 047
[spacer]
200 052
[spacer]
200 057
[spacer]
Selection of the command operating mode.
P632
7 Settings
7-130 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001
226 000
1: S001
[spacer]
226 008
2: S002
[spacer]
226 016
3: S003
[spacer]
226 024
4: S004
[spacer]
226 032
5: S005
[spacer]
226 040
6: S006
[spacer]
226 048
7: S007
[spacer]
226 056
8: S008
[spacer]
226 064
9: S009
[spacer]
226 072
10: S010
[spacer]
226 080
11: S011
[spacer]
226 088
12: S012
[spacer]
Selection of the signal designation.
[spacer]
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001
226 001
1: Start/end signal Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
226 009
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 017
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 025
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 033
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 041
1: Start/end signal
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-131
Parameter Address
[spacer]
226 049
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 057
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 065
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 073
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 081
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
226 089
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
Selection of the signal operating mode.
[spacer]
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001
226 003
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-243)
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
226 011
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 019
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 027
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 035
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 043
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 051
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 059
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 067
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 075
1: Group 1
[spacer]
226 083
1: Group 1
P632
7 Settings
7-132 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
226 091
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
[spacer]
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001
226 002
0 0 254 s Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
226 010
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 018
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 026
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 034
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 042
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 050
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 058
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 066
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 074
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 082
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
226 090
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
The logic 1 signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the Start/end signal mode.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-133
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx
019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end a of the transformer.
[spacer]
MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx
019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066
110.0 0.1 1500.0 kV
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage at end b of the transformer.
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase reversal a PSx
010 200 010 201 010 202 010 203
0: No swap
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase reversal b PSx
010 204 010 205 010 206 010 207
0: No swap
[spacer]
Setting for the phase reversal function (see description for function group MAIN)
for electrical machines in pumped storage power stations.
Phases to be reversed (A-B swapped, A-B swapped or A-B swapped) may be set
separately for each end.
At the same time the display MAIN: Phase reversal activ will be
triggered unless the setting is No swap.
P632
7 Settings
7-134 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Differential protec
tion
DIFF: Enable PSx
072 152 073 152 074 152 075 152
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset (setting group) in which differential
protection is enabled.
[spacer]
DIFF: Vec.gr. ends a-b PSx
019 010 019 040 019 041 019 042
0 0 11 Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
For standard connection of the P632 (see Chapter Installation and
Connection), the vector group ID needs to be entered. For connection reversal
applied to one individual end, this can be taken into account in setting
(MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,a or MAIN: Conn.meas.circ. IP,b).
The following algorithms apply:
Setting = ID + 6
If the addition results in a value > 12 then:
Setting = (ID + 6) 12
If the phase currents of the low and high voltage sides are exchanged and if this
is not accounted for by the settings at MAIN: Conn.meas,circ. IP,z
(where z is end a,b,c or d) and MAIN: Conn.meas,circ. IY,z (where z is
end a,b or c) then the algorithm is:
Setting = 12 ID
If an A-C-B phase sequence (or "anti-clockwise rotating field") is present then
this should be entered as a setting at the P632. In this case, the P632 will
automatically form the complementary value of the set vector group ID to the
number 12 (vector group ID = 12 set ID).
For application of the P632 as machine protection, the setting must be 0 or 6
depending on the current transformer connection.
[spacer]
DIFF: Idiff> PSx
072 142 073 142 074 142 075 142
0.20 0.10 2.50 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Operate value of the differential protection function as referred to the reference
current of the relevant transformer end.
[spacer]
DIFF: Idiff>> PSx
072 143 073 143 074 143 075 143
15.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Threshold value of the differential current for deactivation of the inrush
stabilization function (harmonic restraint) and of the overfluxing restraint.
Note: If the threshold is set too high, it is possible for the P632 not to trip in the
presence of internal faults with transformer saturation.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-135
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DIFF: Idiff>>> PSx
072 144 073 144 074 144 075 144
30.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value for the differential current where the
differential protection is triggered regardless of restraining quantity, inrush
stabilization and saturation discriminator.
Note: If the threshold is set too low, the P632 can trip in the presence of
external faults with transformer saturation.
[spacer]
DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) PSx
080 000 081 000 082 000 083 000
0.20 0.10 30.00 Iref
[spacer]
If the Current Transformer Supervision (CTS) function has detected a CT failure,
then the basic operating threshold DIFF: Idiff> PSx can be raised to a
settable safe value DIFF: Idiff>(CTS) PSx. Please refer to the CTS
function section for more details.
[spacer]
DIFF: m1 PSx
072 145 073 145 074 145 075 145
0.30 0.10 1.50 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the range
0.5I
diff>
< I
R
I
R,m1
.
[spacer]
DIFF: m2 PSx
072 146 073 146 074 146 075 146
0.70 0.10 1.50 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic for the
range I
R
> I
R,m2
.
[spacer]
DIFF: IR,m2 PSx
072 147 073 147 074 147 075 147
4.0 1.5 10.0 Iref Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Knee point where the tripping characteristic continues with the setting for
gradient m2.
[spacer]
DIFF: Op.mode rush rst.PSx
072 148 073 148 074 148 075 148
1: Not phase-selective Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
For application of the P632 as machine protection, harmonic restraint can be
disabled by way of this setting. For application of the P632 as transformer
protection, the user can select whether the harmonic restraint should operate in
cross-blocking mode or selectively for one measuring system.
[spacer]
DIFF: RushI(2f0)/I(f0) PSx
072 159 073 159 074 159 075 159
20 10 50 % Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
Operate value of the inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint) of differential
protection as a ratio of the second harmonic with the fundamental component of
the differential current, in percent.
P632
7 Settings
7-136 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.a en.PSx
072 155 073 155 074 155 075 155
1: Yes Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding a.
[spacer]
DIFF: 0-seq. filt.b en.PSx
072 156 073 156 074 156 075 156
1: Yes Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the zero-sequence filtering of winding b.
[spacer]
DIFF: Overflux.bl. en. PSx
072 158 073 158 074 158 075 158
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the overfluxing restraint.
[spacer]
DIFF: Ov. I(5f0)/I(f0) PSx
072 160 073 160 074 160 075 160
20 10 80 % Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
Operate value of the overfluxing restraint of differential protection as ratio of the
fifth harmonic component to the fundamental wave for the differential current,
in percent.
[spacer]
DIFF: Op.del.,trip sig.PSx
010 162 010 163 010 164 010 165
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
The time-delay of the differential protection trip signal can be set here.
[spacer]
DIFF: Hyst. effective PSx
072 006 073 006 074 006 075 006
1: Yes
[spacer]
The hysteresis of the pick-up characteristics may be disabled or enabled.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-137
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_1: Enable PSx
072 141 073 141 074 141 075 141
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
REF_2: Enable PSx
072 161 073 161 074 161 075 161
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground differential protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
REF_1: Operating mode PSx
072 149 073 149 074 149 075 149
1: Low imped. / sum(IP)
[spacer]
REF_2: Operating mode PSx
072 169 073 169 074 169 075 169
1: Low imped. / sum(IP)
[spacer]
Three operating modes can be selected. The Low imped. / sum(IP) operating
mode is the existing low impedance ground differential protection mode
(already existing since version P632602). The alternative selectable modes are
Low imped. / IP,max and High impedance.
[spacer]
REF_1: Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
080 006 081 006 082 006 083 006
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
REF_2: Bl.f.DIFF trigg. PSx
080 007 081 007 082 007 083 007
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit protection
is blocked in case of a starting of the differential protection.
[spacer]
REF_1: CTS effective PSx
080 003 081 003 082 003 083 003
0: No
[spacer]
REF_2: CTS effective PSx
080 004 081 004 082 004 083 004
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the ground-differential short circuit protection
associated with the corresponding CTS signal, CTS: Alarm end a (or
CTS: Alarm end b etc.), is blocked.
[spacer]
REF_1: Idiff> PSx
072 150 073 150 074 150 075 150
0.20 0.10 1.00 Iref Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
[spacer]
REF_2: Idiff> PSx
072 170 073 170 074 170 075 170
0.20 0.10 1.00 Iref
[spacer]
Operate value of the ground differential protection function as referred to the
reference current of the relevant transformer end.
[spacer]
REF_1: Idiff>>> PSx
072 151 073 151 074 151 075 151
10.0 2.5 30.0 Iref Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
P632
7 Settings
7-138 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
REF_2: Idiff>>> PSx
072 171 073 171 074 171 075 171
10.0 2.5 30.0 Iref
[spacer]
Threshold value of the differential current for tripping by the ground differential
protection function independently of the restraining variable.
[spacer]
REF_1: m1 PSx
072 162 073 162 074 162 075 162
0.20 0.00 1.00 Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
[spacer]
REF_2: m1 PSx
072 172 073 172 074 172 075 172
0.20 0.00 1.00
[spacer]
Gradient of the differential protection tripping characteristic with the operating
mode 'Low imped. / sum(IP)'.
range I
R
< I
R,m1
with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
[spacer]
REF_1: m2 PSx
072 163 073 163 074 163 075 163
1.50 0.15 1.50 Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
[spacer]
REF_2: m2 PSx
072 165 073 165 074 165 075 165
1.50 0.15 1.50
[spacer]
range I
R
> I
R,m2
with the operating modes 'Low imped. / IP,max ' and 'High
impedance'.
[spacer]
REF_1: IR,m2 PSx
072 164 073 164 074 164 075 164
1.00 0.10 1.50 Iref Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
[spacer]
REF_2: IR,m2 PSx
072 166 073 166 074 166 075 166
1.00 0.10 1.50 Iref
[spacer]
Knee point from which the characteristic runs with a set gradient of m
2
(operating mode 'Low imped. / IP,max').
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-139
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC1: Enable PSx
076 050 077 050 078 050 079 050
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Enable PSx
076 070 077 070 078 070 079 070
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for definite-time
overcurrent protection.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block tim.st. IN PSx
076 067 077 067 078 067 079 067
0: Without Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block tim.st. IN PSx
076 087 077 087 078 087 079 087
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines whether blocking of the residual current stages will take
place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current starting.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Gen.starting modePSx
076 066 077 066 078 066 079 066
1: With start. IN/Ineg Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Gen.starting modePSx
076 086 077 086 078 086 079 086
[spacer]
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in
the formation of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tGS PSx
076 065 077 065 078 065 079 065
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tGS PSx
076 085 077 085 078 085 079 085
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of DTOC protection.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
076 063 077 063 078 063 079 063
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Rush restr.enabl PSx
076 083 077 083 078 083 079 083
0: No
[spacer]
Setting as to whether the inrush stabilization function (harmonic restraint) of
differential protection shall be able to block the definite-time overcurrent
[spacer]
DTOC1: I> PSx
076 051 077 051 078 051 079 051
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: I> PSx
076 071 077 071 078 071 079 071
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>.
P632
7 Settings
7-140 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC1: I>> PSx
076 052 077 052 078 052 079 052
4.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: I>> PSx
076 072 077 072 078 072 079 072
4.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: I>>> PSx
076 053 077 053 078 053 079 053
[spacer]
DTOC2: I>>> PSx
076 163 077 163 078 163 079 163
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: I> dynamic PSx
076 151 077 151 078 151 079 151
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: I> dynamic PSx
076 161 077 161 078 161 079 161
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is elapsing.
[spacer]
DTOC1: I>> dynamic PSx
076 152 077 152 078 152 079 152
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: I>> dynamic PSx
076 162 077 162 078 162 079 162
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer]
DTOC1: I>>> dynamic PSx
076 153 077 153 078 153 079 153
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: I>>> dynamic PSx
076 173 077 173 078 173 079 173
1.00 0.10 30.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer]
DTOC1: tI> PSx
076 057 077 057 078 057 079 057
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tI> PSx
076 077 077 077 078 077 079 077
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tI>> PSx
076 058 077 058 078 058 079 058
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-141
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC2: tI>> PSx
076 078 077 078 078 078 079 078
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay I>>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tI>>> PSx
076 059 077 059 078 059 079 059
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tI>>> PSx
076 169 077 169 078 169 079 169
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the I>>> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg> PSx
076 197 077 197 078 197 079 197
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg> PSx
076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg>> PSx
076 198 077 198 078 198 079 198
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg>> PSx
076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg>>> PSx
076 199 077 199 078 199 079 199
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg>>> PSx
076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the Ineg>>> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg> dynamic PSx
076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg> dynamic PSx
076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
This operate value is effective only while the timer stage MAIN: Hold time
dyn.param. is elapsing.
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg>> dynamic PSx
076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
P632
7 Settings
7-142 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg>> dynamic PSx
076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg>> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx
076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
DTOC2: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx
076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ineg>>> dynamic. (Ineg = negative-sequence current)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg> PSx
076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg> PSx
076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg>> PSx
076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg>> PSx
076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg>>> PSx
076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg>>> PSx
076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the Ineg>>> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN> PSx
076 054 077 054 078 054 079 054
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN> PSx
076 164 077 164 078 164 079 164
0.25 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN>> PSx
076 055 077 055 078 055 079 055
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-143
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN>> PSx
076 165 077 165 078 165 079 165
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN>>> PSx
076 056 077 056 078 056 079 056
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN>>> PSx
076 166 077 166 078 166 079 166
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>>.
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN> dynamic PSx
076 154 077 154 078 154 079 154
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN> dynamic PSx
076 174 077 174 078 174 079 174
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN>> dynamic PSx
076 155 077 155 078 155 079 155
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN>> dynamic PSx
076 175 077 175 078 175 079 175
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer]
DTOC1: IN>>> dynamic PSx
076 156 077 156 078 156 079 156
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: IN>>> dynamic PSx
076 176 077 176 078 176 079 176
1.00 0.10 8.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>> in dynamic mode. This operate value is only
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN> PSx
076 060 077 060 078 060 079 060
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN> PSx
076 170 077 170 078 170 079 170
1.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN> stage.
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN>> PSx
076 061 077 061 078 061 079 061
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN>> PSx
076 171 077 171 078 171 079 171
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>> stage.
P632
7 Settings
7-144 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN>>> PSx
076 062 077 062 078 062 079 062
0.50 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN>>> PSx
076 172 077 172 078 172 079 172
0.50 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the IN>>> stage.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-145
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT1: Enable PSx
081 050 082 050 083 050 084 050
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Enable PSx
081 170 082 170 083 170 084 170
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies the parameter subset to be enabled for inverse-time
overcurrent protection.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Block tim.st. IN PSx
081 068 082 068 083 068 084 068
0: Without
[spacer]
IDMT2: Block tim.st. IN PSx
081 188 082 188 083 188 084 188
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting defines whether a blocking of the residual and negative-sequence
current stages should take place for single-pole startings or multi-pole phase
current startings.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Gen.starting modePSx
081 059 082 059 083 059 084 059
1: With start. IN/Ineg Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Gen.starting modePSx
081 179 082 179 083 179 084 179
[spacer]
This setting defines whether starting of the residual current stages will result in
the formation of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
[spacer]
IDMT1: tGS PSx
081 058 082 058 083 058 084 058
0.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
IDMT2: tGS PSx
081 178 082 178 083 178 084 178
0.00 0.00 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the general starting signal of IDMT protection.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Rush restr.enabl PSx
081 060 082 060 083 060 084 060
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Rush restr.enabl PSx
081 180 082 180 083 180 084 180
0: No
[spacer]
Setting as to whether the inrush restraint of differential protection shall be able
to block the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,P PSx
081 051 082 051 083 051 084 051
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,P PSx
081 171 082 171 083 171 084 171
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
P632
7 Settings
7-146 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx
081 052 082 052 083 052 084 052
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,P dynamic PSx
081 172 082 172 083 172 084 172
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (phase current system) in dynamic mode. This
operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx
081 053 082 053 083 053 084 053
0: Definite Time Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx
081 173 082 173 083 173 084 173
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Factor kt,P PSx
081 054 082 054 083 054 084 054
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Factor kt,P PSx
081 174 082 174 083 174 084 174
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Min. trip t. P PSx
081 057 082 057 083 057 084 057
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Min. trip t. P PSx
081 177 082 177 083 177 084 177
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time P PSx
081 055 082 055 083 055 084 055
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time P PSx
081 175 082 175 083 175 084 175
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time for storing the starting time once the starting has
dropped out (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Release P PSx
081 056 082 056 083 056 084 056
1: Without delay Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Release P PSx
081 176 082 176 083 176 084 176
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx
081 111 082 111 083 111 084 111
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-147
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,neg PSx
081 121 082 121 083 121 084 121
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx
081 112 082 112 083 112 084 112
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,neg dynamic PSx
081 122 082 122 083 122 084 122
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
This value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters is
elapsing.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx
081 113 082 113 083 113 084 113
[spacer]
IDMT2: Character. neg. PSx
081 123 082 123 083 123 084 123
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx
081 114 082 114 083 114 084 114
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Factor kt,neg PSx
081 124 082 124 083 124 084 124
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence
current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Min. trip t. neg PSx
081 117 082 117 083 117 084 117
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Min. trip t. neg PSx
081 127 082 127 083 127 084 127
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (negative-sequence current
system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx
081 115 082 115 083 115 084 115
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time neg PSx
081 125 082 125 083 125 084 125
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
dropped out (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Release neg PSx
081 116 082 116 083 116 084 116
P632
7 Settings
7-148 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT2: Release neg PSx
081 126 082 126 083 126 084 126
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,N PSx
081 061 082 061 083 061 084 061
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,N PSx
081 181 082 181 083 181 084 181
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx
081 062 082 062 083 062 084 062
[spacer]
IDMT2: Iref,N dynamic PSx
081 182 082 182 083 182 084 182
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (residual current system) in dynamic mode.
This operate value is only effective while the hold time for dynamic parameters
is elapsing.
[spacer]
IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx
081 063 082 063 083 063 084 063
[spacer]
IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx
081 183 082 183 083 183 084 183
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Factor kt,N PSx
081 064 082 064 083 064 084 064
1.00 0.05 10.00 Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Factor kt,N PSx
081 184 082 184 083 184 084 184
1.00 0.05 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the kt,N factor of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Min. trip t. N PSx
081 067 082 067 083 067 084 067
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Min. trip t. N PSx
081 187 082 187 083 187 084 187
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time N PSx
081 065 082 065 083 065 084 065
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time N PSx
081 185 082 185 083 185 084 185
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
dropped out (residual current system).
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-149
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT1: Release N PSx
081 066 082 066 083 066 084 066
[spacer]
IDMT2: Release N PSx
081 186 082 186 083 186 084 186
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
P632
7 Settings
7-150 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: Enable PSx
081 070 082 070 083 070 084 070
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer]
THRM1: Iref PSx
081 074 082 074 083 074 084 074
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer]
THRM1: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx
081 075 082 075 083 075 084 075
1.15 1.05 1.50 Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Starting factor k must be set in accordance with the maximum permissible
continuous thermal current of the protected object:
k=I
therm,prot.object
/I
nom,prot.object
[spacer]
THRM1: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
081 082 082 082 083 082 084 082
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer]
THRM1: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
081 083 082 083 083 083 084 083
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer]
THRM1: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
081 077 082 077 083 077 084 077
120 0 300 C Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer]
THRM1: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
081 080 082 080 083 080 084 080
40 0 70 C Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
[spacer]
THRM1: Select CTA PSx
081 072 082 072 083 072 084 072
0: Default temp. value Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
Select the mode of the coolant temperature acquisition. Select from:
No data acquisition. A default temperature value is used instead,
data acquisition via the PT 100 input,
data acquisition via the 20 mA input.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-151
Parameter Address
[spacer]
THRM1: Default CTA PSx
081 081 082 081 083 081 084 081
40 -40 70 C Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
there is no data acquisition for the coolant temperature.
[spacer]
THRM1: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx
081 073 082 073 083 073 084 073
1: Yes Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will be
blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
[spacer]
THRM1: Rel. O/T warning PSx
081 079 082 079 083 079 084 079
95 50 200 % Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer]
THRM1: Rel. O/T trip PSx
081 076 082 076 083 076 084 076
100 50 200 % Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here
will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
[spacer]
THRM1: Hysteresis trip PSx
081 078 082 078 083 078 084 078
2 2 30 % Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer]
THRM1: Warning pre-trip PSx
081 085 082 085 083 085 084 085
30.0 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
P632
7 Settings
7-152 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec
tion
V<>: Enable PSx
076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-178)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer]
V<>: V> PSx
076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
1.10 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer]
V<>: V>> PSx
076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
1.10 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV> PSx
076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV>> PSx
076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer]
V<>: V< PSx
076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
0.80 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer]
V<>: V<< PSx
076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
0.80 0.20 1.50 Vnom Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer]
V<>: Vmin> PSx
076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046
0.25 0.00 0.60 Vnom Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Vmin>.
[spacer]
V<>: tV< PSx
076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< PSx
076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer]
V<>: tTransient PSx
076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-153
Parameter Address
[spacer]
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
3 1 10 % Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
P632
7 Settings
7-154 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: Enable PSx
018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
protection is enabled.
[spacer]
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx
018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
1: f Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
1: f
[spacer]
018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
1: f
[spacer]
018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
[spacer]
f<>: f1 PSx
018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: f2 PSx
018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
f<>: f3 PSx
018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
f<>: f4 PSx
018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer]
f<>: tf1 PSx
018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: tf2 PSx
018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
f<>: tf3 PSx
018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-155
Parameter Address
[spacer]
f<>: tf4 PSx
018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer]
f<>: df1/dt PSx
018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: df2/dt PSx
018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
f<>: df3/dt PSx
018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
f<>: df4/dt PSx
018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer]
f<>: Delta f1 PSx
018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Delta f2 PSx
018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
f<>: Delta f3 PSx
018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
f<>: Delta f4 PSx
018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for Delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer]
f<>: Delta t1 PSx
018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
0.30 0.04 3.00 s Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Delta t2 PSx
018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
f<>: Delta t3 PSx
018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
f<>: Delta t4 PSx
018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for Delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
P632
7 Settings
7-156 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: Enable PSx
081 210 082 210 083 210 084 210
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which overfluxing protection is
enabled.
[spacer]
V/f: V/f> (alarm) PSx
081 211 082 211 083 211 084 211
1.05 1.00 1.20 Vnom/
fnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer]
V/f: V/f(t)> PSx
081 212 082 212 083 212 084 212
1.10 1.05 1.50 Vnom/
fnom
Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the time-dependent elements.
[spacer]
V/f: V/f>> PSx
081 213 082 213 083 213 084 213
Blocked 1.05 1.60 Vnom/
fnom
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the time-independent elements.
[spacer]
V/f: tV/f> PSx
081 214 082 214 083 214 084 214
1 0 10000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the warning stage.
[spacer]
V/f: t at V/f=1.05 PSx
081 217 082 217 083 217 084 217
72.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 218 082 218 083 218 084 218
18.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 219 082 219 083 219 084 219
8.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 220 082 220 083 220 084 220
5.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 221 082 221 083 221 084 221
3.7 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 222 082 222 083 222 084 222
2.8 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 223 082 223 083 223 084 223
2.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 224 082 224 083 224 084 224
1.9 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 225 082 225 083 225 084 225
1.7 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-157
Parameter Address
[spacer]
081 226 082 226 083 226 084 226
1.5 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 227 082 227 083 227 084 227
1.4 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
081 228 082 228 083 228 084 228
1.3 1.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
The value pairs set here for overfluxing and trip time define the tripping
characteristic of the inverse-time trip stage for overfluxing protection.
The value set at V/f = 1.60 is also valid for V/f > 1.60.
[spacer]
V/f: Reset time PSx
081 230 082 230 083 230 084 230
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
The value set here for the reset time defines the decreasing rate for the
overfluxing protection memory.
[spacer]
V/f: tV/f>> PSx
081 229 082 229 083 229 084 229
Blocked 0 10000 s Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the definite-time trip stage.
P632
7 Settings
7-158 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Current transformer
supervision
CTS: Enable PSx
001 118 001 119 001 120 001 121
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which current transformer
supervision (CTS) is enabled.
[spacer]
CTS: Ipos> PSx
001 111 001 115 001 116 001 117
0.10 0.05 4.00 Iref Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Ipos> as a quantity normalized to Iref. (Ipos = positive-
sequence current)
[spacer]
CTS: Ineg/Ipos> PSx
001 102 001 103 001 104 001 105
0.05 0.05 1.00 Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
CTS: Ineg/Ipos>> PSx
001 122 001 123 001 124 001 125
0.40 0.05 1.00 Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value for the ratio Ineg/Ipos. (Ineg = negative-sequence
current, Ipos = positive-sequence current)
[spacer]
CTS: t(Alarm) PSx
001 126 001 127 001 128 001 129
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-198)
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay.
[spacer]
CTS: t(Latch) PSx
001 130 001 131 001 132 001 133
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-198)
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
Setting for the latching time-delay.
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-159
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
MCM_1: Enable PSx
081 038 082 038 083 038 084 038
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_2: Enable PSx
081 039 082 039 083 039 084 039
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which measuring-circuit monitoring
is enabled.
[spacer]
MCM_1: Ineg/Ipos> PSx
081 042 082 042 083 042 084 042
0.30 0.20 1.00 Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
MCM_2: Ineg/Ipos> PSx
081 043 082 043 083 043 084 043
0.30 0.20 1.00
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value for the ratio I
neg
/I
pos
.
(I
neg
= negative-sequence current, I
pos
= positive-sequence current)
[spacer]
MCM_1: Operate delay PSx
081 046 082 046 083 046 084 046
5.00 0.10 100.00 s Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
MCM_2: Operate delay PSx
081 047 082 047 083 047 084 047
5.00 0.10 100.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay.
P632
7 Settings
7-160 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
7.1.3.4 Control
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: BI active USER
221 003
1: Yes Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: SI active USER
221 002
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1
221 014
[spacer]
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2
221 022
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
[spacer]
MAIN: Op. delay fct. block
221 029
0 0 60 s Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-87)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap.
221 084
1 1 99
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap.
221 088
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign
221 085
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. oper.
cap..
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign
221 089
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. (or MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap.) with the
value at MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. (or MAIN: CB2 max. oper.
cap., respectively).
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-161
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Cmd.end f.K200 fail.
221 111
1: Yes
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200, this parameter can be
set to Yes or No. If the K200 contacts should not have opened until the end of
the command to the motor when the set monitoring time-delay had expired
(monitoring via binary signal input U 706, signal SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT
as the standard setting) then the direction control contacts are opened if this
parameter is set to Yes.
If this parameter is set to No then respective fault signals (MAIN: K200 fail.
cmd. end, MAIN: K200 fail. cmd.start, MAIN: DEV op.time
exceeded) are issued when the monitoring time-delay has expired and the
direction control contacts will remain closed. (Note: This behavior still bears the
danger of an undefined switch position!)
P632
7 Settings
7-162 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
External device
DEV01: Designat. ext. dev.
210 000
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
210 050
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
210 100
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Setting for the designation of the respective external device. Either one of the
pre-defined designations or the term Device Name User may be selected. In the
latter case any text (max 4 characters) may be entered at DEV01: DEV-
Name User that will be used as the devices' designation. (The same holds for
DEV02 etc.)
[spacer]
DEV01: DEV-Name User
218 101
0:
[spacer]
218 102
0:
[spacer]
218 103
0:
[spacer]
Any text (max. 4 characters) may be entered as the devices name which will
then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. has been set to Device Name User. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at DEV01: Designat.
ext. dev. it will be used and DEV01: DEV-Name User is ignored. A
designation with more than 4 characters is internally truncated. (The same holds
for DEV02 etc.)
[spacer]
DEV01: Op.time switch. dev.
210 004
20 0 254 s Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-237)
[spacer]
210 054
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
210 104
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
[spacer]
DEV01: Latching time
210 005
0.00 0.00 5.00 s Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-237)
Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-237)
[spacer]
210 055
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-163
Parameter Address
[spacer]
210 105
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear
position signal Open or Closed has been received.
[spacer]
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc.
210 011
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-244)
[spacer]
210 061
1: Group 1
[spacer]
210 111
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter
suppression.
[spacer]
DEV01: StartCmdTime superv.
210 007
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
210 057
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
210 107
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
This parameter allows for defining a monitoring timer for the begin of a switch
command.
After sending an Open / Close command, the corresponding timer starts. If the
switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and MAIN: Startcmdtime
exceed. is signaled.
In the default setting blocked this monitoring is switched off. This is
recommended for switchgear units for which it is impossible to detect the
intermediate position.
[spacer]
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr.
210 012
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
210 062
0: No
[spacer]
210 112
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the intermediate position signal will be
suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
P632
7 Settings
7-164 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos.
210 027
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
210 077
0: No
[spacer]
210 127
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the Faulty position signal is issued.
[spacer]
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd.
210 024
3: Time control Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-234)
[spacer]
210 074
3: Time control
[spacer]
210 124
3: Time control
[spacer]
Selecting the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
[spacer]
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
210 014
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
210 064
[spacer]
210 114
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal that is used to signal the position (plugged-in /
unplugged) of the switch truck plug.
[spacer]
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1
210 021
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-233)
[spacer]
210 071
0: No
[spacer]
210 121
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general trip
command 1 of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
circuit breakers. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
[spacer]
210 022
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-233)
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-165
Parameter Address
[spacer]
210 072
0: No
[spacer]
210 122
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general trip
command 2 of the protection function.
[spacer]
DEV01: With close cmd./prot
210 023
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-233)
[spacer]
210 073
0: No
[spacer]
210 123
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the close
command of the protection function.
[spacer]
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
210 019
[spacer]
210 069
[spacer]
210 119
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer]
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
210 020
[spacer]
210 070
[spacer]
210 120
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the Closed position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
P632
7 Settings
7-166 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open
210 015
[spacer]
210 065
[spacer]
210 115
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the Open
command.
[spacer]
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close
210 016
[spacer]
210 066
[spacer]
210 116
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the Close
command.
[spacer]
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl
210 025
0: No Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
210 075
0: No
[spacer]
210 125
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to Open position is permitted without
a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer]
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int.
210 026
0: No Fig. 3-191, (p. 3-232)
[spacer]
210 076
0: No
[spacer]
210 126
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to Closed position is permitted
without a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer]
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open
210 039
[spacer]
210 089
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-167
Parameter Address
[spacer]
210 139
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the Open enable to the interlocking
logic when there is bay interlock with substation interlock.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer]
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
210 040
[spacer]
210 090
[spacer]
210 140
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the Close enable to the interlocking
logic when there is bay interlock with substation interlock.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
[spacer]
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
210 041
[spacer]
210 091
[spacer]
210 141
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the Open enable to the interlocking
logic when there is bay interlock without substation interlock.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
[spacer]
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
210 042
[spacer]
210 092
P632
7 Settings
7-168 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
210 142
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the Close enable to the interlocking
logic when there is bay interlock without substation interlock.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-169
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic
ILOCK: Cycle t interl.check
221 104
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
The interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Therefore it is a
requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as
with software versions that still implement phase 1, only with the request for a
switching operation.
This parameter sets the cycle time, after which a check of the interlock
conditions is carried out.
As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it
must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting
value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without
any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so
short that the P632 will be under too much strain. As the CPU load of the P632 is
dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is
not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
[spacer]
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1
250 000
[spacer]
250 001
[spacer]
250 002
[spacer]
250 003
[spacer]
250 004
[spacer]
250 005
[spacer]
250 006
[spacer]
250 007
[spacer]
250 008
[spacer]
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10
250 009
[spacer]
250 010
[spacer]
250 011
P632
7 Settings
7-170 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
250 012
[spacer]
250 013
[spacer]
250 014
[spacer]
250 015
[spacer]
250 016
[spacer]
250 017
[spacer]
250 018
[spacer]
250 019
[spacer]
250 020
[spacer]
250 021
[spacer]
250 022
[spacer]
250 023
[spacer]
250 024
[spacer]
250 025
[spacer]
250 026
[spacer]
250 027
[spacer]
250 028
[spacer]
250 029
[spacer]
250 030
7 Settings
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 7-171
Parameter Address
[spacer]
250 031
[spacer]
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P632
7 Settings
7-172 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
8 INFORMATION AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
8.1 Operation
The P632 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 608705103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P632_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Parameter Address
Measured data input
MEASI: Current IDC
004 134
Not measured 0.00 24.00 mA Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer]
MEASI: Current IDC p.u.
004 135
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to I
DC,nom
.
[spacer]
MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
004 136
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to I
DC,nom
.
[spacer]
MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin
004 180
Not measured -32000 32000 Fig. 3-31, (p. 3-48)
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer]
MEASI: Temperature
004 133
Not measured -40.0 215.0 C Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature input on the
analog p/c board.
[spacer]
MEASI: Temperature p.u.
004 221
Not measured -0.40 2.15 100C Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature input on the
analog p/c board referred to 100C.
[spacer]
MEASI: Temperature Tmax
004 233
Not measured -40.0 215.0 C Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the PT 100 temperature
input on the analog p/c board.
P632
8 Information and Control Functions
8-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Measured data
output
MEASO: Current A-1
005 100
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Current A-2
005 099
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-3
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Date
003 090
01.01.97 01.01.97 07.11.98 dd.mm.yy Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer]
MAIN: Time of day
003 091
00:00:00 00:00:00 24:00:00 hh:mm:ss Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer]
MAIN: Time switching
003 095
0: Standard time Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
[spacer]
MAIN: Frequency f
004 040
Not measured 40.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a prim.
005 101
Not measured 0 25000 A Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay a
005 162
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum current of end a as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored a
005 161
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end a as a primary
quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b prim.
005 102
Not measured 0 25000 A
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay b
006 162
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum current of end b as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max prim.stored b
006 161
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current of end b as a primary
quantity.
P632
8-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a prim.
005 104
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current of end a as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b prim.
005 105
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current of end b as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IA,a prim.
005 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end a, as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IB,a prim.
006 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IC,a prim.
007 021
[spacer]
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IA,b prim.
005 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current A, end b, as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IB,b prim.
006 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IC,b prim.
007 022
[spacer]
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ineg a prim.
005 125
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ineg b prim.
005 129
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current of the respective end as a primary
quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ipos a prim.
005 127
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-5
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ipos b prim.
005 134
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence current of the respective end as a primary
quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN,a prim.
005 121
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN,b prim.
005 122
[spacer]
Display of the residual current calculated by the P632 from the sum of the phase
currents (of the respective end) as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IY,a prim.
005 131
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IY,b prim.
005 132
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a primary quantity measured by the P632 at the
T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage V prim.
005 018
Not measured 0.0 2500.0 kV Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage measured by the P632, as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,a p.u.
005 111
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-78)
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,max,b p.u.
005 112
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current (of the respective end), referred to I
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay a
005 163
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay b
006 163
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum phase current (of the respective end a)
referred to I
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored a
005 160
[spacer]
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored b
006 160
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current (for the respective end),
referred to I
nom
.
P632
8-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,a p.u.
005 107
[spacer]
MAIN: Curr. IP,min,b p.u.
005 108
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current (for the respective end) as referred to
I
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IA,a p.u.
005 031
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IB,a p.u.
006 031
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IC,a p.u.
007 031
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IA,b p.u.
005 032
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IB,b p.u.
006 032
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IC,b p.u.
007 032
[spacer]
Display of phase current A/B/C for the respective end, referred to In.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ineg a p.u.
005 126
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ineg b p.u.
005 130
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current of the respective end, referred to I
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ipos a p.u.
005 128
[spacer]
MAIN: Current Ipos b p.u.
005 135
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence current (for the respective end), referred to
I
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN,a p.u.
005 141
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IN,b p.u.
005 142
[spacer]
Display of the residual current calculated by the P632 from the sum of the phase
currents of the respective end, referred to I
nom
.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-7
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IY,a p.u.
005 151
[spacer]
MAIN: Current IY,b p.u.
005 152
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to I
nom
measured by the P632
at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers.
[spacer]
MAIN: Voltage V p.u.
005 019
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Vnom Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-80)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage measured by the P632, referred to V
nom
.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end a
005 089
Not measured -180.0 180.0 Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-81)
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end a
006 089
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end a
007 089
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end a.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi AB, end b
005 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between A-B, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi BC, end b
006 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between B-C, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi CA, end b
007 092
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between C-A, end b.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi A, end a-b
005 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase A.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi B, end a-b
006 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase B.
P632
8-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi C, end a-b
007 090
[spacer]
Display of the phase shift between ends a and b for phase C.
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end a
005 077
[spacer]
MAIN: Angle phi NY, end b
005 078
[spacer]
Display of the phase displacement between the residual current calculated by
the P632 from the three phase currents and the current measured at the T14,
T24 or T34 transformer.
Parameter Address
Differential protec
tion
DIFF: Diff. current 1
005 080
Not measured 0.000 40.000 Iref Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Display of differential current, measuring system 1, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
DIFF: Restrain. current 1
005 081
[spacer]
Display of restraining current, measuring system 1, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
006 080
[spacer]
ref
.
[spacer]
006 081
[spacer]
ref
.
[spacer]
007 080
[spacer]
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
007 081
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to I
ref
.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-9
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_1: Diff. current, REF_1
008 080
[spacer]
REF_2: Diff. current, REF_2
008 070
Not measured 0.00 20.00 Iref
[spacer]
Display of the differential current referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
REF_1: Restrain.curr.,REF_1
008 081
[spacer]
REF_2: Restrain.curr.,REF_2
008 071
Not measured 0.00 20.00 Iref
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current referred to I
ref
.
P632
8-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: Status replica, TH1
004 150
Not measured -25000 25000 % Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer]
THRM1: Object temperat.,TH1
004 151
Not measured -40 300 C Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1.
[spacer]
THRM1: Coolant temp. TH1
004 154
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object.
Depending on the setting at THRM1: Select CTA PSx
or THRM2: Select CTA PSx for coolant temperature acquisition, one of the
following values will be displayed:
Setting Default temp. value: Display of the set temperature value.
Setting From PT100: Display of the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer.
Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the
20 mA input.
[spacer]
THRM1: Pre-trip t. left,TH1
004 153
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
THRM1 will reach the tripping threshold.
[spacer]
THRM1: Stat. repl., p.u.TH1
004 204
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1
referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer]
THRM1: Object temp. p.u. 1
004 205
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100C.
[spacer]
THRM1: Coolant temp. p.u. 1
004 206
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object referred to 100C.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-11
Parameter Address
[spacer]
THRM1: Temp. offset repl. 1
004 170
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a
value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if
the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the
current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: Excitation V/f p.u.
004 220
[spacer]
Display of the V/f ratio, as a quantity referred to V
nom
/f
nom
.
[spacer]
V/f: Status replica in %
004 222
Not measured 0 100 % Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content in % of the overfluxing protection function.
[spacer]
V/f: Status replica p.u.
004 223
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content as a quantity referred to 100% of the buffer
content of the overfluxing protection function.
P632
8-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Parameter Address
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: Output 1 state
106 010
0: 0
[spacer]
106 012
0: 0
[spacer]
106 014
0: 0
[spacer]
106 016
0: 0
[spacer]
106 018
0: 0
[spacer]
106 020
0: 0
[spacer]
106 022
0: 0
[spacer]
106 024
0: 0
[spacer]
106 026
0: 0
[spacer]
106 028
0: 0
[spacer]
106 030
0: 0
[spacer]
106 032
0: 0
[spacer]
106 034
0: 0
[spacer]
106 036
0: 0
[spacer]
106 038
0: 0
[spacer]
106 040
0: 0
[spacer]
106 042
0: 0
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-13
Parameter Address
[spacer]
106 044
0: 0
[spacer]
106 046
0: 0
[spacer]
106 048
0: 0
[spacer]
106 050
0: 0
[spacer]
106 052
0: 0
[spacer]
106 054
0: 0
[spacer]
106 056
0: 0
[spacer]
106 058
0: 0
[spacer]
106 060
0: 0
[spacer]
106 062
0: 0
[spacer]
106 064
0: 0
[spacer]
106 066
0: 0
[spacer]
106 068
0: 0
[spacer]
106 070
0: 0
[spacer]
106 072
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Input 1 state
106 200
0: 0
[spacer]
106 201
0: 0
[spacer]
106 202
0: 0
P632
8-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
106 203
0: 0
[spacer]
106 204
0: 0
[spacer]
106 205
0: 0
[spacer]
106 206
0: 0
[spacer]
106 207
0: 0
[spacer]
106 208
0: 0
[spacer]
106 209
0: 0
[spacer]
106 210
0: 0
[spacer]
106 211
0: 0
[spacer]
106 212
0: 0
[spacer]
106 213
0: 0
[spacer]
106 214
0: 0
[spacer]
106 215
0: 0
[spacer]
106 216
0: 0
[spacer]
106 217
0: 0
[spacer]
106 218
0: 0
[spacer]
106 219
0: 0
[spacer]
106 220
0: 0
[spacer]
106 221
0: 0
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-15
Parameter Address
[spacer]
106 222
0: 0
[spacer]
106 223
0: 0
[spacer]
106 224
0: 0
[spacer]
106 225
0: 0
[spacer]
106 226
0: 0
[spacer]
106 227
0: 0
[spacer]
106 228
0: 0
[spacer]
106 229
0: 0
[spacer]
106 230
0: 0
[spacer]
106 231
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
P632
8-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
GSSE: Output 1 state
104 100
0: 0
[spacer]
104 103
0: 0
[spacer]
104 106
0: 0
[spacer]
104 109
0: 0
[spacer]
104 112
0: 0
[spacer]
104 115
0: 0
[spacer]
104 118
0: 0
[spacer]
104 121
0: 0
[spacer]
104 124
0: 0
[spacer]
104 127
0: 0
[spacer]
104 130
0: 0
[spacer]
104 133
0: 0
[spacer]
104 136
0: 0
[spacer]
104 139
0: 0
[spacer]
104 142
0: 0
[spacer]
104 145
0: 0
[spacer]
104 148
0: 0
[spacer]
104 151
0: 0
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-17
Parameter Address
[spacer]
104 154
0: 0
[spacer]
104 157
0: 0
[spacer]
104 160
0: 0
[spacer]
104 163
0: 0
[spacer]
104 166
0: 0
[spacer]
104 169
0: 0
[spacer]
104 172
0: 0
[spacer]
104 175
0: 0
[spacer]
104 178
0: 0
[spacer]
104 181
0: 0
[spacer]
104 184
0: 0
[spacer]
104 187
0: 0
[spacer]
104 190
0: 0
[spacer]
104 193
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 1 state
105 000
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 2 state
105 005
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 3 state
105 010
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 4 state
105 015
0: 0
P632
8-18 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 5 state
105 020
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 6 state
105 025
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 7 state
105 030
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 8 state
105 035
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 9 state
105 040
0: 0
[spacer]
GSSE: Input 10 state
105 045
0: 0
[spacer]
105 050
0: 0
[spacer]
105 055
0: 0
[spacer]
105 060
0: 0
[spacer]
105 065
0: 0
[spacer]
105 070
0: 0
[spacer]
105 075
0: 0
[spacer]
105 080
0: 0
[spacer]
105 085
0: 0
[spacer]
105 090
0: 0
[spacer]
105 095
0: 0
[spacer]
105 100
0: 0
[spacer]
105 105
0: 0
[spacer]
105 110
0: 0
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-19
Parameter Address
[spacer]
105 115
0: 0
[spacer]
105 120
0: 0
[spacer]
105 125
0: 0
[spacer]
105 130
0: 0
[spacer]
105 135
0: 0
[spacer]
105 140
0: 0
[spacer]
105 145
0: 0
[spacer]
105 150
0: 0
[spacer]
105 155
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
P632
8-20 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Configurable func
tion keys
F_KEY: State F1
080 122
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: State F2
080 123
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: State F3
080 124
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: State F4
080 125
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: State F5
080 126
0: "Off"
[spacer]
F_KEY: State F6
080 127
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
"Off": The function key is in the Off position.
"On": The function key is in the On position.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-21
Parameter Address
Binary input
INP: State U 701
152 108
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 702
152 111
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 703
152 114
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 704
152 117
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 705
152 120
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 706
152 123
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 801
184 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 802
184 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 803
184 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 804
184 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 805
184 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 806
184 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 807
184 025
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 808
184 029
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 809
184 033
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 810
184 037
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 811
184 041
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 812
184 045
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 813
184 049
0: "Low"
P632
8-22 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
INP: State U 814
184 053
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 815
184 057
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 816
184 061
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 817
184 065
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 818
184 069
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 819
184 073
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 820
184 077
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 821
184 081
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 822
184 085
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 823
184 089
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 824
184 093
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 901
152 144
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 902
152 147
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 903
152 150
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 904
152 153
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1001
152 162
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1002
152 165
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1003
152 168
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1004
152 171
0: "Low"
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-23
Parameter Address
[spacer]
INP: State U 1005
152 174
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1006
152 177
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1601
192 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1602
192 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1603
192 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1604
192 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1605
192 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1606
192 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1801
194 001
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1802
194 005
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1803
194 009
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1804
194 013
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1805
194 017
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 1806
194 021
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2001
153 086
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2002
153 089
0: "Low"
[spacer]
INP: State U 2003
153 092
0: "Low"
P632
8-24 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
INP: State U 2004
153 095
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
"Low": Not energized.
"High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-25
Parameter Address
Binary and analog
output
OUTP: State K 701
150 144
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 702
150 147
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 703
150 150
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 704
150 153
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 705
150 156
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 706
150 159
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 707
150 162
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 708
150 165
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 801
150 168
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 802
150 171
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 901
150 192
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 902
150 195
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 903
150 198
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 904
150 201
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 905
150 204
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 906
150 207
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 907
150 210
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 908
150 213
0: Inactive
P632
8-26 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1001
150 216
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1002
150 219
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1003
150 222
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1004
150 225
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1005
150 228
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1006
150 231
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1601
171 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1602
171 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1603
171 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1604
171 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1605
171 017
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1606
171 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1607
171 025
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1608
171 029
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1801
173 001
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1802
173 005
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1803
173 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1804
173 013
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1805
173 017
0: Inactive
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-27
Parameter Address
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 1806
173 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2001
151 200
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2002
151 203
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2003
151 206
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2004
151 209
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2005
151 212
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2006
151 215
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2007
151 218
0: Inactive
[spacer]
OUTP: State K 2008
151 221
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
P632
8-28 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
LED indicators
LED: State H 1 green
085 180
1: Active
[spacer]
LED: State H 2 yell.
085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 3 yell.
085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 4 red
085 006
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 5 red
085 009
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 6 red
085 012
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 7 red
085 015
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 8 red
085 018
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H 9 red
085 021
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H10 red
085 024
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H11 red
085 027
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H12 red
085 030
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H13 red
085 033
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H14 red
085 036
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H15 red
085 039
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H16 red
085 042
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H17 red.
085 181
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H18 red
085 130
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H19 red
085 133
0: Inactive
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-29
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LED: State H20 red
085 136
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H21 red
085 139
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H22 red
085 142
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H23 red
085 145
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 056
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 059
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 062
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 065
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 068
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 071
0: Inactive
[spacer]
LED: State H10 green
085 074
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 077
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 080
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 083
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 086
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 089
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 092
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 160
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 163
0: Inactive
P632
8-30 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
085 166
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 169
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 172
0: Inactive
[spacer]
085 176
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
Active: The LED indicator is energized.
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals
Parameter Address
Local control panel
LOC: Edit mode
080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.assig. H17 red.
[spacer]
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT
030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1.)
[spacer]
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT
030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2.)
[spacer]
LOC: Illumination on EXT
037 101
1: Yes
[spacer]
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
[spacer]
LOC: Loc.acc.block.active
221 005
0: No Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
LOC: Rem.acc.block.active
221 004
0: No Fig. 3-7, (p. 3-9)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-31
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 1
COMM1: Command block. EXT
003 173
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT
037 074
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: Command blocking
003 174
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-13)
[spacer]
COMM1: Buffer overrun
221 100
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.
037 075
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-15)
Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-16)
[spacer]
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103
003 219
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101
003 218
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS
003 221
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: MODBUS
003 223
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: DNP3
003 230
0: No
[spacer]
COMM1: COURIER
103 041
0: No
Parameter Address
IEC 61850
Communication
IEC: Comm. link faulty
105 180
0: No
[spacer]
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
[spacer]
IEC: Control reservation
221 082
0: No
[spacer]
Display when a client has made a reservation to control an external device
(select for control by control mode select before operate).
P632
8-32 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position
109 000
0: Intermediate pos.
[spacer]
109 005
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 010
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 015
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 020
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 025
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 030
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 035
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 040
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 045
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 050
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 055
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 060
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 065
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 070
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 075
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 100
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 105
0: Interm. pos.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-33
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 110
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 115
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 120
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 125
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 130
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 135
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 140
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 145
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 150
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 155
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 160
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 165
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 170
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
109 175
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open
109 001
0: No
[spacer]
109 006
0: No
[spacer]
109 011
0: No
[spacer]
109 016
0: No
P632
8-34 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 021
0: No
[spacer]
109 026
0: No
[spacer]
109 031
0: No
[spacer]
109 036
0: No
[spacer]
109 041
0: No
[spacer]
109 046
0: No
[spacer]
109 051
0: No
[spacer]
109 056
0: No
[spacer]
109 061
0: No
[spacer]
109 066
0: No
[spacer]
109 071
0: No
[spacer]
109 076
0: No
[spacer]
109 101
0: No
[spacer]
109 106
0: No
[spacer]
109 111
0: No
[spacer]
109 116
0: No
[spacer]
109 121
0: No
[spacer]
109 126
0: No
[spacer]
109 131
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-35
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 136
0: No
[spacer]
109 141
0: No
[spacer]
109 146
0: No
[spacer]
109 151
0: No
[spacer]
109 156
0: No
[spacer]
109 161
0: No
[spacer]
109 166
0: No
[spacer]
109 171
0: No
[spacer]
109 176
0: No
[spacer]
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed
109 002
0: No
[spacer]
109 007
0: No
[spacer]
109 012
0: No
[spacer]
109 017
0: No
[spacer]
109 022
0: No
[spacer]
109 027
0: No
[spacer]
109 032
0: No
[spacer]
109 037
0: No
[spacer]
109 042
0: No
P632
8-36 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 047
0: No
[spacer]
109 052
0: No
[spacer]
109 057
0: No
[spacer]
109 062
0: No
[spacer]
109 067
0: No
[spacer]
109 072
0: No
[spacer]
109 077
0: No
[spacer]
109 102
0: No
[spacer]
109 107
0: No
[spacer]
109 112
0: No
[spacer]
109 117
0: No
[spacer]
109 122
0: No
[spacer]
109 127
0: No
[spacer]
109 132
0: No
[spacer]
109 137
0: No
[spacer]
109 142
0: No
[spacer]
109 147
0: No
[spacer]
109 152
0: No
[spacer]
109 157
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-37
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 162
0: No
[spacer]
109 167
0: No
[spacer]
109 172
0: No
[spacer]
109 177
0: No
[spacer]
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state
of an external device.
[spacer]
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos
109 003
0: No
[spacer]
109 008
0: No
[spacer]
109 013
0: No
[spacer]
109 018
0: No
[spacer]
109 023
0: No
[spacer]
109 028
0: No
[spacer]
109 033
0: No
[spacer]
109 038
0: No
[spacer]
109 043
0: No
[spacer]
109 048
0: No
[spacer]
109 053
0: No
[spacer]
109 058
0: No
[spacer]
109 063
0: No
[spacer]
109 068
0: No
P632
8-38 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
109 073
0: No
[spacer]
109 078
0: No
[spacer]
109 103
0: No
[spacer]
109 108
0: No
[spacer]
109 113
0: No
[spacer]
109 118
0: No
[spacer]
109 123
0: No
[spacer]
109 128
0: No
[spacer]
109 133
0: No
[spacer]
109 138
0: No
[spacer]
109 143
0: No
[spacer]
109 148
0: No
[spacer]
109 153
0: No
[spacer]
109 158
0: No
[spacer]
109 163
0: No
[spacer]
109 168
0: No
[spacer]
109 173
0: No
[spacer]
109 178
0: No
[spacer]
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-39
Parameter Address
[spacer]
GOOSE: IED01 link faulty
107 180
0: No
[spacer]
107 181
0: No
[spacer]
107 182
0: No
[spacer]
107 183
0: No
[spacer]
107 184
0: No
[spacer]
107 185
0: No
[spacer]
107 186
0: No
[spacer]
107 187
0: No
[spacer]
107 188
0: No
[spacer]
107 189
0: No
[spacer]
107 190
0: No
[spacer]
107 191
0: No
[spacer]
107 192
0: No
[spacer]
107 193
0: No
[spacer]
107 194
0: No
[spacer]
107 195
0: No
[spacer]
107 200
0: No
[spacer]
107 201
0: No
[spacer]
107 202
0: No
P632
8-40 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
107 203
0: No
[spacer]
107 204
0: No
[spacer]
107 205
0: No
[spacer]
107 206
0: No
[spacer]
107 207
0: No
[spacer]
107 208
0: No
[spacer]
107 209
0: No
[spacer]
107 210
0: No
[spacer]
107 211
0: No
[spacer]
107 212
0: No
[spacer]
107 213
0: No
[spacer]
107 214
0: No
[spacer]
107 215
0: No
[spacer]
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the protection and control unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
[spacer]
GOOSE: ExtDev01 link faulty
107 216
0: No
[spacer]
107 217
0: No
[spacer]
107 218
0: No
[spacer]
107 219
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-41
Parameter Address
[spacer]
107 220
0: No
[spacer]
107 221
0: No
[spacer]
107 222
0: No
[spacer]
107 223
0: No
[spacer]
107 224
0: No
[spacer]
107 225
0: No
[spacer]
107 226
0: No
[spacer]
107 227
0: No
[spacer]
107 228
0: No
[spacer]
107 229
0: No
[spacer]
107 230
0: No
[spacer]
107 231
0: No
[spacer]
107 232
0: No
[spacer]
107 233
0: No
[spacer]
107 234
0: No
[spacer]
107 235
0: No
[spacer]
107 236
0: No
[spacer]
107 237
0: No
[spacer]
107 238
0: No
P632
8-42 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
107 239
0: No
[spacer]
107 240
0: No
[spacer]
107 241
0: No
[spacer]
107 242
0: No
[spacer]
107 243
0: No
[spacer]
107 244
0: No
[spacer]
107 245
0: No
[spacer]
107 246
0: No
[spacer]
107 247
0: No
[spacer]
Display when GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at which the next state
signal must be received.
[spacer]
GOOSE: IED link faulty
107 250
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-43
Parameter Address
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
GSSE: IED link faulty
105 181
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
Parameter Address
IRIGB interface
IRIGB: Enabled
023 201
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-39)
[spacer]
IRIGB: Synchron. ready
023 202
0: No Fig. 3-24, (p. 3-39)
Parameter Address
Measured data input
MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT
006 076
0: No
[spacer]
MEASI: Enabled
035 008
0: No Fig. 3-27, (p. 3-44)
Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-53)
[spacer]
MEASI: PT100 faulty
040 190
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
MEASI: Overload 20mA input
040 191
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.
040 192
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
P632
8-44 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Binary and analog
output
OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT
040 014
0: No
[spacer]
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
040 015
0: No
[spacer]
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked
021 015
1: Yes Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-51)
[spacer]
OUTP: Latching reset
040 088
0: No Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-51)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-45
Parameter Address
Measured data
output
MEASO: Enabled
037 102
0: No
[spacer]
MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT
036 085
1: Yes
[spacer]
MEASO: Reset output EXT
036 087
0: No
[spacer]
MEASO: Output reset
037 117
0: No Fig. 3-37, (p. 3-54)
[spacer]
MEASO: Valid BCD value
037 050
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
037 051
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 052
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 053
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 054
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 055
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 056
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 057
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
037 058
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
037 059
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
037 060
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
MEASO: Value A-1 valid
069 014
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Value A-1 output
037 118
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
MEASO: Value A-2 valid
069 015
0: No
P632
8-46 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MEASO: Value A-2 output
037 119
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-47
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: Healthy
060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green.
[spacer]
MAIN: Enable protect. EXT
003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT
003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: Time switching EXT
003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer]
MAIN: Time synchronized
009 109
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT
040 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: K200 fail. cmd. end
221 108
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not reopened after the set monitoring time-delay has
elapsed.
[spacer]
MAIN: K200 fail. cmd.start
221 109
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not closed after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer]
MAIN: DEV op.time exceeded
221 110
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this fault signal is issued
(as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after it has been issued a close command and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer]
040 061
0: No
[spacer]
040 116
0: No
[spacer]
040 117
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
040 138
0: No
P632
8-48 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT
036 045
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT
004 061
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT
036 033
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT
037 018
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT
031 028
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 open 3p EXT
031 046
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT
036 051
0: No Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-90)
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 closed 3p EXT
036 230
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Test mode EXT
037 070
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT
065 001
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT
005 209
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: Group reset 2 EXT
005 252
2: Not configured
[spacer]
MAIN: General reset EXT
005 255
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
005 210
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
005 211
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT
060 060
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT
221 086
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT
221 090
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled
003 028
0: No Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-49
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled
038 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-85)
[spacer]
MAIN: Protect. not ready
004 060
1: Yes Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
MAIN: Test mode
037 071
0: No Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
MAIN: Blocked/faulty
004 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-89)
[spacer]
MAIN: Meas. circ.I faulty
036 155
0: No Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-92)
Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked
021 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset
040 139
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
MAIN: Manual trip signal
034 017
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
MAIN: Gen. trip signal
036 251
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1
036 005
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
[spacer]
036 023
0: No
[spacer]
036 108
0: No
[spacer]
036 109
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Enable control
221 058
1: Yes Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1
036 071
0: No Fig. 3-67, (p. 3-94)
Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
036 022
0: No
[spacer]
036 113
0: No
[spacer]
036 114
0: No
P632
8-50 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: General starting
036 000
0: No Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-92)
[spacer]
MAIN: Trip sig.REF1 & REF2
036 174
0: No
[spacer]
036 175
0: No
[spacer]
036 176
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Dynam. param. active
040 090
0: No Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-86)
[spacer]
MAIN: Phase reversal activ
036 220
0: No Fig. 3-46, (p. 3-73)
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 open 3p
031 040
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 open 3p
031 086
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 closed 3p
031 042
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 closed 3p
031 089
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 pos.sig. implaus
031 041
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 pos.sig. implaus
031 049
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: CB failure
036 017
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
MAIN: Bay interlock. act.
221 001
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
MAIN: Subst. interl. act.
221 000
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active
221 015
0: No Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-87)
[spacer]
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active
221 023
0: No Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-87)
[spacer]
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol.
221 018
0: No Fig. 3-186, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
MAIN: CB tripped
221 016
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-51
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active
221 017
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored
221 054
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active
221 053
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored
221 055
0: No Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-91)
[spacer]
MAIN: Communication error
221 019
1: Yes Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
MAIN: Startcmdtime exceed.
221 112
0: No
[spacer]
If the monitoring, set by DEV01: StartCmdTime superv. (or
DEV02: StartCmdTime superv. etc.), is active then an exceeded timer is
flagged by this logic state signal.
[spacer]
MAIN: Device selection key
006 001
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
MAIN: Device OPEN key
006 002
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
MAIN: Device CLOSE key
006 003
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
MAIN: Local/Remote key
006 004
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf
221 101
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
MAIN: Command from HMI
221 102
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
221 103
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Without function
060 000
0: No
[spacer]
MAIN: Without function
061 000
0: No
P632
8-52 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Parameter subset
selection
PSS: Control via user EXT
036 101
0: No
[spacer]
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT
065 002
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 003
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 004
2: Not configured
[spacer]
065 005
2: Not configured
[spacer]
PSS: Control via user
036 102
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset
003 061
0: No param. subset sel Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: PS 1 activated ext.
036 094
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
036 095
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
036 096
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
036 097
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: Actual param. subset
003 062
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: PS 1 active
036 090
1: Yes Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: PS 2 active
036 091
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: PS 3 active
036 092
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
[spacer]
PSS: PS 4 active
036 093
0: No Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-104)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-53
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring
SFMON: Warning (LED)
036 070
0: No Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-105)
[spacer]
SFMON: Warning (relay)
036 100
0: No Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-105)
[spacer]
SFMON: Warm restart exec.
041 202
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold restart exec.
041 201
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold restart
093 024
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update
093 025
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure
090 019
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
041 200
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
093 040
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Battery failure
090 010
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
096 121
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: +15V supply faulty
093 081
0: No
[spacer]
093 082
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
093 080
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1
096 100
0: No
[spacer]
096 101
0: No
[spacer]
096 102
0: No
[spacer]
096 103
0: No
[spacer]
096 104
0: No
P632
8-54 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
096 105
0: No
[spacer]
096 106
0: No
[spacer]
096 107
0: No
[spacer]
096 108
0: No
[spacer]
096 109
0: No
[spacer]
096 110
0: No
[spacer]
096 111
0: No
[spacer]
096 112
0: No
[spacer]
096 113
0: No
[spacer]
096 114
0: No
[spacer]
096 115
0: No
[spacer]
096 116
0: No
[spacer]
096 117
0: No
[spacer]
096 118
0: No
[spacer]
096 119
0: No
[spacer]
096 120
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Dig.Bus
096 123
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module HMI
096 124
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Comm
096 125
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-55
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Ana.Bus
096 126
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1
097 000
0: No
[spacer]
097 001
0: No
[spacer]
097 002
0: No
[spacer]
097 003
0: No
[spacer]
097 004
0: No
[spacer]
097 005
0: No
[spacer]
097 006
0: No
[spacer]
097 007
0: No
[spacer]
097 008
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Defect.module slot10
097 009
0: No
[spacer]
097 010
0: No
[spacer]
097 011
0: No
[spacer]
097 012
0: No
[spacer]
097 013
0: No
[spacer]
097 014
0: No
[spacer]
097 015
0: No
[spacer]
097 016
0: No
[spacer]
097 017
0: No
P632
8-56 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
097 018
0: No
[spacer]
097 019
0: No
[spacer]
097 020
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
093 070
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
093 071
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty
093 110
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
093 111
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 701
097 078
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 702
097 079
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 703
097 080
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 704
097 081
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 705
097 082
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 706
097 083
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 707
097 084
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 708
097 085
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 801
097 086
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 802
097 087
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 901
097 094
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 902
097 095
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-57
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 903
097 096
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 904
097 097
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 905
097 098
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 906
097 099
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 907
097 100
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 908
097 101
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1001
097 102
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1002
097 103
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1003
097 104
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1004
097 105
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1005
097 106
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1006
097 107
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1601
097 150
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1602
097 151
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1603
097 152
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1604
097 153
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1605
097 154
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1606
097 155
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1607
097 156
0: No
P632
8-58 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1608
097 157
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1801
097 166
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1802
097 167
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1803
097 168
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1804
097 169
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1805
097 170
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1806
097 171
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2001
097 182
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2002
097 183
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2003
097 184
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2004
097 185
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2005
097 186
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2006
097 187
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2007
097 188
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2008
097 189
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Undef. operat. code
093 010
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Abnormal termination
093 030
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Bad arg. system call
093 031
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Mutex deadlock
093 032
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-59
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid memory ref.
093 033
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Unexpected exception
093 034
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op.
093 011
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
093 012
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
093 013
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Protection failure
090 021
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Checksum error param
090 003
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Clock sync. error
093 041
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
093 026
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
090 012
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
093 015
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm.
093 075
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Inval. Config. IEC
093 079
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y
093 113
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Time-out module Y
093 112
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
098 000
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
091 018
0: No Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-92)
Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a
091 026
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200)
P632
8-60 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b
091 027
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid charact. V/f
091 011
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI
093 145
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD
093 124
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1
093 114
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-63)
[spacer]
093 115
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
093 116
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
098 024
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-49)
[spacer]
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input
098 025
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
098 026
0: No Fig. 3-30, (p. 3-47)
[spacer]
SFMON: Setting error f<>
098 028
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
SFMON: Iref, a inval. range
091 007
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range
091 008
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
SFMON: Matching fail. end a
091 000
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
SFMON: Matching fail. end b
091 001
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
SFMON: Ratio mtch.fact.inv.
091 004
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv.
091 006
0: No Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
SFMON: Inv.range Iref REF_1
091 105
0: No Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
091 115
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-61
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Match.f. kam,N REF_1
091 101
0: No Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
SFMON: Match.f. kam,Y REF_1
091 102
0: No Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
091 111
0: No
[spacer]
091 112
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Rat.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
091 103
0: No
[spacer]
091 113
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Min.mtch.f.inv.REF_1
091 104
0: No Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
091 114
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: CTA error THRM1
098 036
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
SFMON: Setting error THRM1
098 038
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
093 120
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 30
098 053
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 30 (t)
098 054
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 31
098 055
0: No
[spacer]
098 056
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 32
098 057
0: No
[spacer]
098 058
0: No
[spacer]
SFMON: CB1 pos.sig. implaus
098 124
0: No
[spacer]
098 125
0: No
P632
8-62 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: CB1 faulty EXT
098 072
0: No
[spacer]
098 129
0: No
Parameter Address
Operating data
recording
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 213
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-99)
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal
recording
MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 240
0: No
Parameter Address
Overload recording
OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 241
0: No
[spacer]
OL_RC: Record. in progress
035 003
0: No Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow
035 007
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-113)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-63
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
005 243
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigger EXT
036 089
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Trigger
037 076
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
FT_RC: Id> triggered
035 018
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: IR> triggered
035 019
0: No
[spacer]
FT_RC: Record. in progress
035 000
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
FT_RC: System disturb. runn
035 004
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow
035 001
0: No Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-122)
[spacer]
FT_RC: Faulty time tag
035 002
0: No
P632
8-64 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Differential protec
tion
DIFF: Enabled
041 210
0: No Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
DIFF: Starting
041 106
0: No
[spacer]
DIFF: Meas.system 1 trigg.
041 124
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
041 125
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
041 126
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
DIFF: Id>> triggered
041 221
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
DIFF: Id>>> triggered
041 222
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
DIFF: Harm.block 1 trigg.
041 118
0: No Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
041 119
0: No Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
041 120
0: No Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
DIFF: Overflux.bl.1 trigg.
041 121
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
041 122
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
041 123
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-137)
[spacer]
DIFF: Sat.discr. 1 trigg.
041 115
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
041 116
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
041 117
0: No Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-136)
[spacer]
DIFF: Trip signal
041 075
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
DIFF: Trip signal 1
041 002
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-65
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DIFF: Trip signal 2
041 003
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
[spacer]
DIFF: Trip signal 3
041 004
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-134)
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_1: Blocking EXT
019 051
0: No
[spacer]
REF_1: Enabled
041 132
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
REF_1: Ready
019 054
0: No Fig. 3-104, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
REF_1: Trip signal
041 005
0: No Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-146)
Parameter Address
Ground differential
protection
REF_2: Blocking EXT
019 052
0: No
[spacer]
REF_2: Enabled
041 133
0: No
[spacer]
REF_2: Ready
019 055
0: No
[spacer]
REF_2: Trip signal
041 016
0: No
P632
8-66 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC1: Block. tI> EXT
035 120
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tI>> EXT
035 121
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tI>>> EXT
035 122
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIneg> EXT
036 141
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>> EXT
036 142
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIneg>>> EXT
036 143
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIN> EXT
035 123
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIN>> EXT
035 124
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Block. tIN>>> EXT
035 125
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC1: Enabled
035 102
0: No Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
DTOC1: General starting
035 128
0: No Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tGS elapsed
035 129
0: No Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting A
035 104
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting B
035 105
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting C
035 106
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting N
035 107
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting I>
035 108
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting I>>
035 109
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-67
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting I>>>
035 110
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>
035 114
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>
035 115
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tI>>>
035 116
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting Ineg
036 144
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>
036 145
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>
036 146
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting Ineg>>>
036 147
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg> elapsed
036 148
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg>> elapsed
036 149
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIneg>>> elapsed
036 150
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>
036 151
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>
036 152
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIneg>>>
036 153
0: No Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting IN>
035 111
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting IN>>
035 112
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Starting IN>>>
035 113
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN> elapsed
035 117
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN>> elapsed
035 118
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
P632
8-68 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC1: tIN>>> elapsed
035 119
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>
035 126
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>
035 130
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
[spacer]
DTOC1: Trip signal tIN>>>
035 131
0: No Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-156)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-69
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC2: Block. tI> EXT
035 150
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tI>> EXT
035 151
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tI>>> EXT
035 229
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIneg> EXT
036 161
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIneg>> EXT
036 162
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIneg>>> EXT
036 163
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIN> EXT
035 230
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIN>> EXT
035 231
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Block. tIN>>> EXT
035 232
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Enabled
035 132
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: General starting
035 234
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tGS elapsed
035 245
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting A
035 134
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting B
035 135
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting C
035 141
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting N
035 146
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting I>
035 138
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting I>>
035 139
0: No
P632
8-70 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting I>>>
035 149
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>
035 144
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>
035 145
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tI>>>
035 158
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting Ineg
036 164
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting Ineg>
036 165
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting Ineg>>
036 166
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting Ineg>>>
036 167
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg> elapsed
036 168
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg>> elapsed
036 169
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIneg>>> elapsed
036 170
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>
036 171
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>
036 172
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIneg>>>
036 173
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting IN>
035 152
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting IN>>
035 153
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Starting IN>>>
035 154
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN> elapsed
035 159
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN>> elapsed
035 225
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-71
Parameter Address
[spacer]
DTOC2: tIN>>> elapsed
035 226
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>
035 233
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>
035 246
0: No
[spacer]
DTOC2: Trip signal tIN>>>
035 247
0: No
P632
8-72 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT
038 114
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT1: Block.tIref,neg> EXT
038 178
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT
038 124
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT1: Enabled
038 125
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-159)
[spacer]
IDMT1: General starting
038 115
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
IDMT1: tGS elapsed
038 116
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-171)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,P>
038 110
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,A>
038 117
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,B>
038 118
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,C>
038 119
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed
038 111
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time P running
038 112
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Memory P clear
038 113
1: Yes Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-165)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg>
038 173
0: No Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed
038 174
0: No Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg>
038 177
0: No Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time neg runn.
038 175
0: No Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Memory ' neg' clear
038 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-167)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-73
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N>
038 120
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed
038 121
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N>
038 126
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Hold time N running
038 122
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
[spacer]
IDMT1: Memory N clear
038 123
1: Yes Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-169)
P632
8-74 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT2: Block. tIref,P> EXT
038 134
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Block.tIref,neg> EXT
038 188
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT
038 144
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Enabled
038 145
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: General starting
038 135
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: tGS elapsed
038 136
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,P>
038 130
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,A>
038 137
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,B>
038 138
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,C>
038 139
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: tIref,P> elapsed
038 131
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time P running
038 132
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Memory P clear
038 133
1: Yes
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,neg>
038 183
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: tIref,neg> elapsed
038 184
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Trip sig. tIref,neg>
038 187
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time neg runn.
038 185
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Memory ' neg' clear
038 186
1: Yes
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-75
Parameter Address
[spacer]
IDMT2: Starting Iref,N>
038 140
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: tIref,N> elapsed
038 141
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,N>
038 146
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Hold time N running
038 142
0: No
[spacer]
IDMT2: Memory N clear
038 143
1: Yes
P632
8-76 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: Replica block EXT
039 150
0: No
[spacer]
THRM1: CTA error EXT
039 152
0: No
[spacer]
THRM1: Reset replica EXT
039 122
0: No
[spacer]
THRM1: Enabled
039 129
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
THRM1: Not ready
039 154
1: Yes Fig. 3-132, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
THRM1: Reset replica
039 125
0: No Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-177)
[spacer]
THRM1: Buffer empty
039 128
1: Yes
[spacer]
THRM1: CTA error
039 127
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-175)
[spacer]
THRM1: Starting k*Iref>
039 151
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
THRM1: Within pre-trip time
039 153
1: Yes Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
THRM1: Warning
039 124
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
THRM1: Trip signal
039 123
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
THRM1: Setting error,block.
039 126
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-176)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-77
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec
tion
V<>: Blocking tV> EXT
041 068
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT
041 069
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT
041 070
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT
041 071
0: No
[spacer]
V<>: Enabled
040 066
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-178)
[spacer]
V<>: Ready
042 003
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-178)
[spacer]
V<>: Not ready
042 004
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-178)
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V>
041 030
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V>>
041 096
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
V<>: tV> elapsed
041 034
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
V<>: tV>> elapsed
041 035
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-179)
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V<
041 037
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: Starting V<<
041 099
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV< elapsed
041 041
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV< elapsed & Vmin>
041 026
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV< elaps. transient
042 023
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: Fault V<
041 110
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< elapsed
041 042
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
P632
8-78 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< elapsed & Vmin>
041 066
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans.
042 025
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: Fault V<<
041 112
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
[spacer]
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans.
042 007
0: No Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-180)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-79
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
006 075
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Blocking f1 EXT
042 103
0: No
[spacer]
042 104
0: No
[spacer]
042 105
0: No
[spacer]
042 106
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Enabled
042 100
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
f<>: Ready
042 101
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
f<>: Not ready
042 140
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-181)
[spacer]
f<>: Blocked by V<
042 102
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
f<>: Starting f1
042 107
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Starting f1/df1
042 108
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Delta f1 triggered
042 109
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed
042 110
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Trip signal f1
042 111
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
f<>: Starting f2
042 115
0: No
[spacer]
042 116
0: No
[spacer]
042 117
0: No
[spacer]
042 118
0: No
P632
8-80 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
f<>: Trip signal f2
042 119
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Starting f3
042 123
0: No
[spacer]
042 124
0: No
[spacer]
042 125
0: No
[spacer]
042 126
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Trip signal f3
042 127
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Starting f4
042 131
0: No
[spacer]
042 132
0: No
[spacer]
042 133
0: No
[spacer]
042 134
0: No
[spacer]
f<>: Trip signal f4
042 135
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-81
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: Block. tV/f> EXT
035 196
0: No
[spacer]
V/f: Block. replica EXT
035 197
0: No
[spacer]
V/f: Block. tV/f>> EXT
035 199
0: No
[spacer]
V/f: Reset replica EXT
035 182
0: No
[spacer]
V/f: Enabled
041 229
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
V/f: Reset replica
035 184
0: No Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
V/f: Starting V/f>
041 230
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-188)
[spacer]
V/f: tV/f> elapsed
041 231
0: No Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-188)
[spacer]
V/f: Starting V/f(t)
041 232
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
V/f: Trip signal tV/f(t)
041 233
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
[spacer]
V/f: Starting V/f>>
041 234
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
V/f: tV/f>> elapsed
041 235
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
V/f: Buffer empty
041 236
1: Yes Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-192)
P632
8-82 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Current transformer
supervision
CTS: Blocking EXT
036 160
0: No
[spacer]
CTS: Reset latch. EXT
036 158
0: No
[spacer]
CTS: Enabled
036 080
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
CTS: Reset latching
036 159
0: No
[spacer]
CTS: Operated (updating)
036 099
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Operated (latched)
036 202
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Idiff>(CTS)active
036 203
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end a (updat.)
036 081
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end a (latch.)
036 204
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end a
036 205
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-198)
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end b (updat.)
036 082
0: No
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end b (latch.)
036 206
0: No
[spacer]
CTS: Alarm end b
036 207
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-83
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
MCM_1: Blocking EXT
036 213
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_1: Enabled
036 194
0: No Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-199)
[spacer]
MCM_1: Meas. circ. I faulty
036 198
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
MCM_1: Starting
036 212
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-200)
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
MCM_2: Blocking EXT
036 215
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_2: Enabled
036 195
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_2: Meas. circ. I faulty
036 199
0: No
[spacer]
MCM_2: Starting
036 214
0: No
P632
8-84 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_1: Enable EXT
038 041
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF_1: Disable EXT
038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF_1: Blocking EXT
038 058
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_1: CB faulty EXT
038 234
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_1: Start enable EXT
038 209
1: Yes
[spacer]
CBF_1: Start 3p EXT
038 205
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_1: Starting trig. EXT
038 016
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_1: Ext./user enabled
038 040
1: Yes Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Enabled
040 055
0: No Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Ready
038 009
0: No Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Not ready
040 025
1: Yes Fig. 3-163, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Startup 3p
038 211
0: No Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-206)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Trip signal t1
038 215
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
038 219
0: No Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Trip command t1
038 220
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
038 224
0: No Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-207)
[spacer]
CBF_1: CB failure
043 181
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_1: Starting
038 021
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-208)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-85
Parameter Address
[spacer]
CBF_1: Trip signal
040 026
0: No Fig. 3-169, (p. 3-208)
[spacer]
CBF_1: CB pos. implausible
038 210
0: No Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-205)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Fault behind CB
038 225
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-208)
[spacer]
CBF_1: CBsync.superv A open
038 227
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_1: CBsync.superv B open
038 228
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_1: CBsync.superv C open
038 229
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_1: TripSig CBsync.super
038 226
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-209)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Current flow A
038 230
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Current flow B
038 231
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Current flow C
038 232
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Current flow Phx
038 233
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
CBF_1: Current flow N
038 235
0: No Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-204)
[spacer]
Signal that the residual current is greater than the set value CBF_1: IN<.
P632
8-86 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_2: Enable EXT
043 070
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF_2: Disable EXT
043 071
2: Not configured
[spacer]
CBF_2: Blocking EXT
043 072
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CB faulty EXT
043 177
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Start enable EXT
043 085
1: Yes
[spacer]
CBF_2: Start 3p EXT
043 084
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Starting trig. EXT
043 083
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Ext./user enabled
043 073
1: Yes
[spacer]
CBF_2: Enabled
043 074
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Ready
043 076
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Not ready
043 077
1: Yes
[spacer]
CBF_2: Startup 3p
043 087
0: No
[spacer]
043 088
0: No
[spacer]
043 089
0: No
[spacer]
043 090
0: No
[spacer]
043 091
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CB failure
043 182
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Starting
043 042
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-87
Parameter Address
[spacer]
CBF_2: Trip signal
043 046
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CB pos. implausible
043 086
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Fault behind CB
043 092
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CBsync.superv A open
043 094
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CBsync.superv B open
043 095
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: CBsync.superv C open
043 096
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: TripSig CBsync.super
043 093
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Current flow A
043 164
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Current flow B
043 165
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Current flow C
043 166
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Current flow Phx
043 167
0: No
[spacer]
CBF_2: Current flow N
043 185
0: No
P632
8-88 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIMIT: Enabled
040 074
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>
040 180
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>>
040 181
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed
040 182
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed
040 183
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<
040 184
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<<
040 185
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed
040 186
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed
040 187
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-211)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting T>
040 170
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting T>>
040 171
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT> elapsed
040 172
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed
040 173
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting T<
040 174
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: Starting T<<
040 175
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT< elapsed
040 176
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
[spacer]
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed
040 177
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-212)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-89
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIM_1: Enabled
040 123
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI> elapsed
040 122
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI>> elapsed
037 201
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI< elapsed
037 202
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
[spacer]
LIM_1: tI<< elapsed
037 203
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-214)
Parameter Address
Limit value
monitoring
LIM_2: Enabled
040 125
0: No
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI> elapsed
040 124
0: No
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI>> elapsed
038 201
0: No
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI< elapsed
038 202
0: No
[spacer]
LIM_2: tI<< elapsed
038 203
0: No
P632
8-90 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOGIC: Input 1 EXT
034 000
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 2 EXT
034 001
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 3 EXT
034 002
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
034 003
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 5 EXT
034 004
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 6 EXT
034 005
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 7 EXT
034 006
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 8 EXT
034 007
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 9 EXT
034 008
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 10 EXT
034 009
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 11 EXT
034 010
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 12 EXT
034 011
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 13 EXT
034 012
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 14 EXT
034 013
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 15 EXT
034 014
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT
034 015
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 17 EXT
034 086
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 18 EXT
034 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 19 EXT
034 088
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-91
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 20 EXT
034 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 21 EXT
034 090
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 22 EXT
034 091
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 23 EXT
034 092
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 24 EXT
034 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 25 EXT
034 094
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 26 EXT
034 095
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 27 EXT
034 096
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 28 EXT
034 097
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 29 EXT
034 098
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 30 EXT
034 099
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 31 EXT
034 100
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 32 EXT
034 101
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 33 EXT
034 102
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 34 EXT
034 103
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 35 EXT
034 104
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 36 EXT
034 105
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 37 EXT
034 106
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 38 EXT
034 107
0: No
P632
8-92 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 39 EXT
034 108
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Input 40 EXT
034 109
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 1 EXT
034 051
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT
034 052
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 3 EXT
034 053
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 4 EXT
034 054
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 5 EXT
034 055
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 6 EXT
034 056
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 7 EXT
034 057
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Set 8 EXT
034 058
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT
034 059
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT
034 060
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 3 EXT
034 061
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 4 EXT
034 062
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 5 EXT
034 063
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 6 EXT
034 064
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 7 EXT
034 065
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: Reset 8 EXT
034 066
2: Not configured
[spacer]
LOGIC: 1 has been set
034 067
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-216)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-93
Parameter Address
[spacer]
034 068
0: No
[spacer]
034 069
0: No
[spacer]
034 070
0: No
[spacer]
034 071
0: No
[spacer]
034 072
0: No
[spacer]
034 073
0: No
[spacer]
034 074
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: 1 set externally
034 075
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-216)
[spacer]
034 076
0: No
[spacer]
034 077
0: No
[spacer]
034 078
0: No
[spacer]
034 079
0: No
[spacer]
034 080
0: No
[spacer]
034 081
0: No
[spacer]
034 082
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Enabled
034 046
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1
042 032
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
042 033
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-217)
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2
042 034
0: No
P632
8-94 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 2 (t)
042 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 3
042 036
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 3 (t)
042 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4
042 038
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 4 (t)
042 039
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 5
042 040
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 5 (t)
042 041
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6
042 042
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 6 (t)
042 043
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 7
042 044
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 7 (t)
042 045
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8
042 046
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 8 (t)
042 047
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9
042 048
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 9 (t)
042 049
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 10
042 050
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 10 (t)
042 051
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 11
042 052
0: No
[spacer]
042 053
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-95
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 12
042 054
0: No
[spacer]
042 055
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 13
042 056
0: No
[spacer]
042 057
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 14
042 058
0: No
[spacer]
042 059
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 15
042 060
0: No
[spacer]
042 061
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 16
042 062
0: No
[spacer]
042 063
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 17
042 064
0: No
[spacer]
042 065
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 18
042 066
0: No
[spacer]
042 067
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 19
042 068
0: No
[spacer]
042 069
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 20
042 070
0: No
[spacer]
042 071
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 21
042 072
0: No
P632
8-96 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
042 073
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 22
042 074
0: No
[spacer]
042 075
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 23
042 076
0: No
[spacer]
042 077
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 24
042 078
0: No
[spacer]
042 079
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 25
042 080
0: No
[spacer]
042 081
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 26
042 082
0: No
[spacer]
042 083
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 27
042 084
0: No
[spacer]
042 085
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 28
042 086
0: No
[spacer]
042 087
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 29
042 088
0: No
[spacer]
042 089
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 30
042 090
0: No
[spacer]
042 091
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-97
Parameter Address
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 31
042 092
0: No
[spacer]
042 093
0: No
[spacer]
LOGIC: Output 32
042 094
0: No
[spacer]
042 095
0: No
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOG_2: Enabled
011 138
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 1
052 032
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 1 (t)
052 033
0: No Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 2
052 034
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 2 (t)
052 035
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 3
052 036
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 3 (t)
052 037
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 4
052 038
0: No
[spacer]
LOG_2: Output 4 (t)
052 039
0: No
P632
8-98 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
External device
DEV01: Open signal EXT
210 030
0: No
[spacer]
DEV01: Closed signal EXT
210 031
0: No
[spacer]
DEV01: Control state
210 018
0: Interm. pos. Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
DEV01: Switch. device open
210 036
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
DEV01: Switch.device closed
210 037
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
DEV01: Dev. interm./flt.pos
210 038
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-236)
[spacer]
DEV01: Open command
210 028
0: No Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-234)
[spacer]
DEV01: Close command
210 029
0: No Fig. 3-193, (p. 3-234)
[spacer]
DEV01: Open cmd. received
218 000
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
DEV01: Close cmd. received
218 001
0: No Fig. 3-189, (p. 3-230)
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-99
Parameter Address
External device
210 080
0: No
[spacer]
210 081
0: No
[spacer]
210 068
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
210 086
0: No
[spacer]
210 087
0: No
[spacer]
210 088
0: No
[spacer]
DEV02: Open command
210 078
0: No
[spacer]
210 079
0: No
[spacer]
218 002
0: No
[spacer]
218 003
0: No
P632
8-100 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
External device
210 130
0: No
[spacer]
210 131
0: No
[spacer]
210 118
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
210 136
0: No
[spacer]
210 137
0: No
[spacer]
210 138
0: No
[spacer]
DEV03: Open command
210 128
0: No
[spacer]
210 129
0: No
[spacer]
218 004
0: No
[spacer]
218 005
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-101
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic
ILOCK: Output 1
250 032
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-240)
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 2
250 033
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 3
250 034
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 4
250 035
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 5
250 036
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 6
250 037
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 7
250 038
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 8
250 039
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 9
250 040
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 10
250 041
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 11
250 042
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 12
250 043
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 13
250 044
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 14
250 045
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 15
250 046
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 16
250 047
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 17
250 048
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 18
250 049
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 19
250 050
0: No
P632
8-102 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 20
250 051
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 21
250 052
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 22
250 053
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 23
250 054
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 24
250 055
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 25
250 056
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 26
250 057
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 27
250 058
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 28
250 059
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 29
250 060
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 30
250 061
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 31
250 062
0: No
[spacer]
ILOCK: Output 32
250 063
0: No
[spacer]
Output of the respective equation of the interlocking logic.
These logic state signals are transmitted with the request for a switching
operation, and cyclically (according to the setting ILOCK: Cycle t
interl.check).
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-103
Parameter Address
Single-pole
commands
CMD_1: Command C001
200 001
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-241)
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C002
200 006
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C003
200 011
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C004
200 016
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C005
200 021
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C006
200 026
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C007
200 031
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C008
200 036
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C009
200 041
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C010
200 046
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C011
200 051
0: No
[spacer]
CMD_1: Command C012
200 056
0: No
P632
8-104 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals
SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT
226 004
0: No
[spacer]
SIG_1: Logic signal S001
226 005
0: No Fig. 3-199, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
226 012
0: No
[spacer]
226 013
0: No
[spacer]
226 020
0: No
[spacer]
226 021
0: No
[spacer]
226 028
0: No
[spacer]
226 029
0: No
[spacer]
226 036
0: No
[spacer]
226 037
0: No
[spacer]
226 044
0: No
[spacer]
226 045
0: No
[spacer]
226 052
0: No
[spacer]
226 053
0: No
[spacer]
226 060
0: No
[spacer]
226 061
0: No
[spacer]
226 068
0: No
[spacer]
226 069
0: No
[spacer]
226 076
0: No
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-105
Parameter Address
[spacer]
226 077
0: No
[spacer]
226 084
0: No
[spacer]
226 085
0: No
[spacer]
226 092
0: No
[spacer]
226 093
0: No
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Parameter Address
Local control panel
LOC: Param. change enabl.
003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
P632
8-106 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 1
COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test
003 180
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer]
COMM1: Test spont.sig.start
003 184
0: don't execute Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as starting.
[spacer]
COMM1: Test spont.sig. end
003 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as ending.
[spacer]
COMM1: Sel. pos. dev.test
221 105
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Select a device DEVxx for testing the transmission of switchgear device position
in monitoring direction.
[spacer]
COMM1: Test position dev.
221 106
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carry out a test to check the transmission of switchgear device position in
monitoring direction for the device selected at COMM1: Sel. pos.
dev.test.
Parameter Address
Logical
communication
interface 2
COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test
103 180
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer]
COMM2: Test spont.sig.start
103 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer]
COMM2: Test spont.sig. end
103 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-107
Parameter Address
IEC 61850
Communication
IEC: Sel.spontan.sig.test
104 245
[spacer]
IEC: Test spont.sig.start
104 246
0: don't execute
[spacer]
IEC: Test spont.sig. end
104 247
0: don't execute
[spacer]
IEC: Sel. pos. DEV test
104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
IEC: Test position DEV
104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Generic Object
Orientated
Substation Events
GOOSE: IED01-16 linked
107 251
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: IED17-32 linked
107 252
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: ExtDev01-16 linked
107 253
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: ExtDev17-32 linked
107 254
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: OrdRun01-16 linked
107 248
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: OrdRun17-32 linked
107 249
2:
[spacer]
GOOSE: Uniqueness 1-16
007 217
[spacer]
GOOSE: Uniqueness 17-32
007 218
P632
8-108 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
IEC Generic
Substation Status
Events
GSSE: Reset statistics
105 171
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
[spacer]
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L
105 160
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
[spacer]
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H
105 161
[spacer]
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending
device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32).
[spacer]
GSSE: Tx message counter
105 162
[spacer]
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by
GSSE: Reset statistics.
[spacer]
GSSE: Rx message counter
105 163
[spacer]
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by
[spacer]
GSSE: No. bin.state chang.
105 164
[spacer]
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by
[spacer]
GSSE: Tx last sequence
105 165
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
GSSE: Tx last message
105 166
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
GSSE: No. reject. messages
105 167
[spacer]
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible
message content. This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset statistics.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-109
Parameter Address
[spacer]
GSSE: IED view selection
105 170
1: Remote IED
[spacer]
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to
be displayed.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED receiv. messages
105 172
[spacer]
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED Rx last sequence
105 173
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with
each GSSE.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED Rx last message
105 174
[spacer]
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each
GSSE.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED missed messages
105 175
[spacer]
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset statistics.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED missed changes
105 176
[spacer]
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence
numbering). This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset statistics.
[spacer]
GSSE: IED time-outs
105 177
[spacer]
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed.
This counter is reset by GSSE: Reset statistics.
Parameter Address
Measured data input
MEASI: Reset Tmax USER
003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to
updated measured values.
P632
8-110 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Binary and analog
output
OUTP: Reset latch. USER
021 009
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer]
OUTP: Relay assign. f.test
003 042
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer]
OUTP: Relay test
003 043
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: Hold-
time for test.
[spacer]
OUTP: Hold-time for test
003 044
1 1 10 s Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-52)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
Parameter Address
Measured data
output
MEASO: Reset output USER
037 116
[spacer]
Resetting the measured data output function.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-111
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: General reset USER
003 002
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER
021 010
[spacer]
Reset of the following displays:
LED indicators
Fault data
[spacer]
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER
021 005
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
003 007
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer]
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER
003 033
[spacer]
The values for the delayed stored maximum phase current are reset (for all
ends).
[spacer]
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER
005 253
[spacer]
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER
005 254
[spacer]
Group of resetting commands.
[spacer]
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER
003 040
[spacer]
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel.
Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
P632
8-112 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MAIN: Soft Warm restart
003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart of the software is carried out. The device functions as it does
when the power supply is turned on, except that no hardware tests are carried
out.
[spacer]
MAIN: Warm restart
010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer]
MAIN: Soft Cold restart
000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart of the software is carried out. This means that all settings and
recordings are cleared, but no tests of the hardware are carried out during the
restart. Parameter values used by the P632 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P632 is blocked after a cold restart.
[spacer]
MAIN: Cold restart
009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P632 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P632 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
Operating data
recording
OP_RC: Reset record. USER
100 001
[spacer]
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal
recording
MT_RC: Reset record. USER
003 008
[spacer]
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-113
Parameter Address
Overload recording
OL_RC: Reset record. USER
100 003
[spacer]
Reset of the overload memory.
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: Trigger USER
003 041
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer]
FT_RC: Reset record. USER
003 006
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Parameter Address
Thermal overload
protection
THRM1: Reset replica USER
039 120
[spacer]
Reset of the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection 1.
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
003 080
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: Max. frequ. for
f> and f<>: Min. frequ. for f<.
P632
8-114 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Overfluxing protec
tion
V/f: Reset replica USER
035 183
Parameter Address
Current transformer
supervision
CTS: Reset latch. USER
036 157
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_1: Enable USER
003 016
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer]
CBF_1: Disable USER
003 015
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker
failure protection
CBF_2: Enable USER
003 124
0: don't execute
[spacer]
CBF_2: Disable USER
003 123
0: don't execute
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-115
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic
LOGIC: Trigger 1
034 038
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 2
034 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 3
034 040
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 4
034 041
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 5
034 042
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 6
034 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 7
034 044
0: don't execute
[spacer]
LOGIC: Trigger 8
034 045
[spacer]
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Parameter Address
Operating data
recording
OP_RC: Operat. data record.
003 024
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-108)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal
recording
MT_RC: Mon. signal record.
003 001
0 0 30 Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
P632
8-116 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Parameter Address
Main function
MAIN: No. general start.
004 000
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer]
MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap.
221 087
1 1 99
[spacer]
MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap.
221 091
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer]
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1
004 006
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 1.
[spacer]
009 050
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 056
[spacer]
[spacer]
009 057
[spacer]
Parameter Address
Operating data
recording
OP_RC: No. oper. data sig.
100 002
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-108)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-117
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal
recording
MT_RC: No. monit. signals
004 019
0 0 30 Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
Overload recording
OL_RC: No. overload
004 101
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
Number of overload events.
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: No. of faults
004 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer]
FT_RC: No. system disturb.
004 010
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Number of system disturbances.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC1: No. general start.
009 150
[spacer]
Parameter Address
Definite-time over
current protection
DTOC2: No. general start.
009 160
0: don't execute
[spacer]
P632
8-118 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT1: No. general start.
009 151
[spacer]
Parameter Address
rent protection
IDMT2: No. general start.
009 161
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Parameter Address
External device
DEV01: Operation counter
210 043
0 0 65535
[spacer]
210 093
0 0 65535
[spacer]
210 143
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of switching operations made. It is also possible to manually set this
counter to any value from 0 to 65535.
[spacer]
DEV01: Dev. op. capability
210 003
1 1 99
[spacer]
210 053
1 1 99
[spacer]
210 103
1 1 99
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations. It is also possible to manually set
this counter to any value from 1 to 99.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-119
8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Parameter Address
Over-/
underfrequency pro
tection
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
005 002
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer]
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
005 001
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
P632
8-120 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Fault data
acquisition
FT_DA: Fault duration
008 010
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-114)
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Running time
004 021
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault determ. with
004 198
0: No fault Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-116)
[spacer]
This display indicates when the fault data were stored.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Run time to meas.
004 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault data acquisition time from the onset of the fault.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,a p.u.
025 086
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IP,b p.u.
026 086
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current of the respective end at the data
acquisition time, referred to I
nom
.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,a p.u.
025 087
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IN,b p.u.
026 087
[spacer]
Display of the residual current of the respective end, calculated by the P632 at
the data acquisition time, referred to I
nom
.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,a p.u.
025 088
[spacer]
FT_DA: Fault curr.IY,b p.u.
026 088
[spacer]
Display of the current value as a quantity referred to I
nom
measured by the P632
at the T14, T24 or T34 transformers and at the time at which acquisition of fault
data takes place.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Diff. current 1
005 082
[spacer]
ref
.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-121
Parameter Address
[spacer]
FT_DA: Diff.current 1(2*f0)
005 084
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, measuring system 2, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
005 085
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, measuring system 3, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Restrain. current 1
005 083
[spacer]
ref
.
[spacer]
006 082
[spacer]
ref
.
[spacer]
006 084
[spacer]
Display of second harmonic in differential current, measuring system 2, referred
to I
ref
.
[spacer]
006 085
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current, measuring
system 1, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
006 083
[spacer]
ref
.
[spacer]
007 082
[spacer]
Display of the differential current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
007 084
[spacer]
Display of the second harmonic component of the differential current for
measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
007 085
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic component of the differential current for measuring
system 1, 2 or 3, respectively, referred to I
ref
.
P632
8-122 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
007 083
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current for measuring system 1, 2 or 3, respectively,
referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Diff. current REF_1
025 082
[spacer]
FT_DA: Diff. current REF_2
026 082
[spacer]
Display of the differential current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to I
ref
.
[spacer]
FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_1
025 083
[spacer]
FT_DA: Restrain.curr. REF_2
026 083
[spacer]
Display of the restraining current, determined by the ground differential
protection function (REF_1, REF_2 or REF_3, respectively), referred to I
ref
.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-123
Parameter Address
Overload data
acquisition
OL_DA: Overload duration
004 102
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Status THRM1 replica
004 155
Not measured 0 250 % Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function THRM1
or THRM2, respectively.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Load current THRM1
004 159
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Object temp. THRM1
004 156
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object as determined by function
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM1
004 157
[spacer]
OL_DA: Coolant temp.THRM2
004 187
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature of the protected object. Depending on the
setting at THRM1: Select CTA PSx or THRM2: Select CTA PSx for
coolant temperature acquisition, one of the following values will be displayed:
Setting Default temp. value : Display of the set temperature value.
Setting From PT100: Display of the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer.
Setting From 20 mA input: Display of the temperature measured via the
20 mA input.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM1
004 158
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, will reach the tripping threshold.
P632
8-124 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
OL_DA: Offset THRM1 replica
004 191
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into
account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to a
value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other words, if
the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the
current only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Status THRM2 replica
004 185
Not measured 0 250 %
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function, THRM1
or THRM2.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Load current THRM2
004 189
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function,
THRM1 or THRM2, respectively, to calculate the tripping time.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Object temp. THRM2
004 186
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer]
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHRM2
004 188
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min
[spacer]
will reach the trip threshold.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-125
8.2.3 Event Recording
Parameter Address
Overload recording
OL_RC: Overload recording 1
033 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-113)
[spacer]
033 021
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 022
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 023
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 024
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 025
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 026
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 027
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the overload log.
P632
8-126 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
Fault recording
FT_RC: Fault recording 1
003 000
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 001
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 002
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 003
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 004
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 005
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 006
0 0 9999
[spacer]
033 007
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the fault log.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 8-127
P632
8-128 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9 IEC 61850 SETTINGS VIA IED CONFIGURATOR
This chapter lists all IEC 61850-specific settings, that are carried out with the
configuration tool IED Configurator.
The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree of the IED Configurator.
However, only those setting parameters are described that are mandatory for
establishing the IEC 61850 communication.
Further setting parameters are listed in the Settings chapter under the function
groups IEC, GOOSE, GSSE. A list of all available Logical Nodes can be found in a
separate document.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-1
9.1 Manage IED
The menu item Manage IED allows for establishing a connection between the
IED Configurator and the device.
The P632 features two memory banks one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via IED Configurator or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via IED Configurator
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the Switch Banks
button.
Parameter

Active Bank SCL File ID

Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item Manage IED).

SCL File Version

Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item Manage IED).

Parameter

Inactive Bank SCL File ID

Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item Manage IED).

SCL File Version

Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item Manage IED).

P632
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator
9-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.2 IED Details
The category IED Details contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
Parameter Default Value

SCL Details SCL File ID PX 632

Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.

SCL File Version 240

Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.

Parameter Default Value Address

IED Details Name TEMPLATE
104 057

Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.

Parameter

Template Details ICD Template

SCL Schema Version

Description

Type

Configuration Revision

Supported Models

The values listed in the column Template Details only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-3
9.3 Communications
The category Communications contains the general network-related settings.

Connected Sub-
Network
Connected Sub-Network NONE

Optional name available to identify the Ethernet network.

Access Point AP1

Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.

Parameter Default Value Address

Address
Configuration
IP Address 0.0.0.0
104 001

Assigned IP address of the P632 for the server function in the system.

SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0
104 005

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.

Gateway Address 0.0.0.0
104 011

This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.


General
Configuration
Media FOC

Network hardware provided as fiber optics (FOC) or twisted pair copper wires
(10BaseT).

TCP Keepalive

Communication monitoring at TCP level.

Database Lock Timeout 120

Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)

P632
9-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.4 SNTP
The category SNTP contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1 General Config
Parameter

Client Operation Poll Rate (seconds)

Polling interval for clock synchronization.

Accepted Stratum Level

Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,
cannot be modified.

9.4.2 External Server 1
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
Parameter Address

External Server
Parameters
IP Address
104 202

IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
Clicking the Use Anycast button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.

9.4.3 External Server 2
Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the Use Anycast button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
Parameter Address

External Server
Parameters
IP Address
104 210

IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
Clicking the Use Anycast button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-5
9.5 Dataset Definitions
Parameter

Dataset Definitions Name

Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.

Location

Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.

Contents

Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.
The GOOSE Capacity display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is
irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P139 if the
Dataset sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is
recommended to limit the Dataset size(s) to max. 120% of the GOOSE
capacity.

P632
9-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.6 GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1 System/LLN0
Parameter

Network Parameters Multicast MAC Address

Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.

Application ID (hex)

Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned ID-number of the GOOSE.

VLAN Identifier (hex)

ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.

VLAN Priority

Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.

Parameter

Repeat Message
Transmission
Parameters
Minimum Cycle Time

First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.

Maximum Cycle Time

Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.

Increment

Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-7

Message Data
Parameters
GOOSE Identifier
TEMPLATESystem/LLN0$GO
$gcb01
[...]
TEMPLATESystem/LLN0$GO
$gcb08

GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.

Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.

1
[...]
1

Revision status of the configuration.

P632
9-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.7 GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs
Parameter

Source Network
Parameters
Multicast MAC Address

Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.


ID-number of the GOOSE.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-9
Parameter

GOOSE Source
Parameters
Source Path

Information data attribute in the transmitting device.

GOOSE Identifier

ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.


Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

Data Obj Index

Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

Data Obj Type

Structure of the data object; possible settings:
Unknown
Boolean (logical value)
Int8 (Integer, with 8 digits)
UInt8 (Positive integer, with 8 digits)
Float (Floating-point number)
BStr2 (Binary state, with 2 digits)
SPS (Single-pole signal)
DPS (Two-pole signal)

Quality Obj Index

Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.

P632
9-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter

Destination
Parameters
Evaluation Expression

Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set
integer value; the parameter is not supported in the device.
Equal to (Compared to: equal)
Not equal to (Compared to: unequal)
Greater than (Compared to: greater)
Less than (Compared to: less)
Pass through (Do not compare)

Default Input Value

Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
False not set
True set
Last Known Value retain last value received
Double Point: intermediate (00) switching device in intermediate position
Double Point: Off (01) switching device open
Double Point: On (10) switching device closed
Double Point: Bad state (11) switching device in intermediate position

Invalidity Quality bits

Quality criterion, which is to be tested.
Invalid / Questionable: Invalid / questionable
Source: Information source is faulty
Relay test: Sending device is set to test mode
OperatorBlocked: Blocked by operator
and
Overflow: Measured value has exceeded its capacity
OutofRange: Measured value has exceeded its range
BadReference: Referenced value is faulty
Oscillatory: Value is volatile
Failure: Faulty
OldData: Information is out-of-date
Inconsistent: Information is unreliable
Inaccurate: Information is inaccurate

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-11
9.8 Report Control Blocks
9.8.1 System/LLN0
Parameter

Report Parameters Report Type

Report type:
Unbuffered (updating)
Buffered (saving)

Report ID

Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.

Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the report.


Revision status of the configuration.

P632
9-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.9 Controls
9.9.1 Control Objects
Parameter

Control Object
Parameters
ctlModel

To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:
Status only (manually operated switching device)
Direct control with enhanced security (direct command issue with
extended monitoring of command effecting)
SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security (switching device
selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting)

sboTimeout

Return time period after selection without issuing a command.

9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control
Parameter

Source Network
Parameters
Multicast MAC Address

Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.


ID-number of the GOOSE.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-13
Parameter

GOOSE Source
Parameters
Source Path

Information data attribute in the transmitting device.

GOOSE Identifier

ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.

Dataset Reference

Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.


Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.

Data Obj Index

Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.

Default Input Value

Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
False not set
True set
Last Known Value retain last value received
Double Point: intermediate (00) switching device in intermediate position
Double Point: Off (01) switching device open
Double Point: On (10) switching device closed
Double Point: Bad state (11) switching device in intermediate position

P632
9-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
9.10 Measurements
Parameter

Scaling Unit Multiplier

Multiplication factor; not supported.

Parameter

Scaled Measurement
Range
Min

Max

Lower / Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.

Parameter

Deadband
Configuration
Deadband

Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 9-15
9.11 Configurable Data Attributes
9.11.1 System/LLN0
Parameter

Mod.measCyc Value

Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead
band evaluations.

Parameter

Mod.enCyc Value

Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.

Parameter

Mod.comtrade Value

Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.

Parameter

Mod.distExtr Value

Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.

P632
9-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
10 COMMISSIONING
10.1 Safety Instructions
Danger!
Danger!
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter Installation and Connection (Chapter 5, (p. 5-1)) must
be observed.
Danger!
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately
marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded
in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of
the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A
minimum cross section of 2.5 mm (US:AWG12 or thicker) is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal connection
diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section
of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable national standards.
A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm (US:AWG14 or thicker) is required.
Danger!
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is
connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.
Danger!
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit
current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
Danger!
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
Danger!
When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the P632
must always be installed outside of this hazardous area.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 10-1
Warning!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
Warning!
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the
female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected
to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when
connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the socket
contacts.
Warning!
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance
with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see Technical
Data, Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)).
Warning!
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant
protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the
requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the
time performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a
fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P632
10 Commissioning
10-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 Preparation
After the P632 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter
Installation and Connection, the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.14, (p. 3-105)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P632 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type P632 and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up. If a bay type has already been selected this bay
will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.12.3, (p. 6-
23)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.12.4, (p. 6-26).
First the type of bay wanted is to be set at MAI N: Type of bay , Par/Conf menu
branch. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at MAI N: Auto-
assi gnment I / O then selecting the type of bay will automatically configure binary
signal inputs and output relays according to the definitions corresponding to the
bay type (see Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1), Vol. 2, Chapter A6, (p. A6-1)).
After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter MAI N: Type of
bay the signal Bay initialization is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of 20 s.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is not possible
during this time period.
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P632 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:
DVI CE: Devi ce password 1
DVI CE: Devi ce password 2
10 Commissioning
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 10-3
Par/Conf menu branch:
PC: Bay address
PC: Devi ce address
PC: Baud rate
PC: Pari ty bi t
COMM1: Functi on group COMM1
COMM1: General enabl e USER
COMM1: Li ne i dl e state
COMM1: Baud rate
COMM1: Pari ty bi t
COMM1: Communi cat. protocol
COMM2: Functi on group COMM2
COMM2: General enabl e USER
COMM2: Li ne i dl e state
COMM2: Baud rate
COMM2: Pari ty bi t
Par/Func/Glob menu branch:
PC: Command bl ocki ng
PC: Si g. /meas. val . bl ock.
COMM1: Command bl ock. USER
COMM1: Si g. /meas. bl ock. USER
COMM2: Command bl ock. USER
COMM2: Si g. /meas. bl ock. USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters Settings and Information
and Control Functions.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter Settings for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
P632
10 Commissioning
10-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Is the correct bay type configured?
Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly
configured?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob menu branch):
MAI N: Devi ce on-l i ne = Yes (= on)
10.2.2 Testing
By using the signals and displays generated by the P632, it is possible to
determine whether the P632 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Tri p cmd. bl ock. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for
100 ms through MAI N: Man. tri p cmd. USER (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command
from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see
Section 6.12.8, (p. 6-34)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P632 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to
activate the test mode via MAI N: Test mode USER (Par/Func/Glob menu
branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are
then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
10.2.3 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch), it is
possible to determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized
correctly by the device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
"Low": Not energized.
"High": Energized.
Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
10.2.4 Checking the Output Relays
It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test
purposes (time setting at OUTP: Hol d-ti me for test in Oper/CtrlTest menu
branch). First select the output relay to be tested (OUTP: Rel ay assi gn.
f. test, Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Test triggering then occurs via OUTP: Rel ay test (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
10 Commissioning
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 10-5
It is password-protected (see Section 6.12.8, (p. 6-34)).
10.2.5 Checking the Protection Function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P632, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter
subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at PSS: Actual
param. subset (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
10.2.5.1 Checking Differential Protection
For single-side feed, the fault current characteristic crosses the first knee of the
tripping characteristic of the P632 so that the basic threshold value is always
checked.
The current I to which the P632 responds for single-side feed is calculated as
follows:
I =
I
diff >
I
nom,z
k
am,z
z: transformer end (a, b)
I
diff>
: set operate value
I
nom,z
: nominal current of the P632 for transformer end a, b
k
am,z
: amplitude-matching factor of transformer end a, b
For single-side one-phase or two-phase feed, a vector group-matching factor in
accordance with the set vector group ID needs to be taken into account in
addition to the amplitude-matching factor. The vector group-matching factors are
given in the tables below and the threshold current is calculated as follows:
I
I
diff >
I
nom,z
k
am,z
k
s, y,z
I
diff>
: set operate value
I
nom,z
: nominal current of the P632 for transformer end a, b
k
am,z
k
s,y,z
: vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P632 are displayed as
measured operating data. They aid in assessing whether the connection of the
P632 to the system current transformers and the setting of the vector group ID
are correct. The tables below give the factors ks which serve to calculate the
differential current for single-side feed. The display of differential and restraining
currents is prevented, however, if they fall below minimum thresholds that can
be set by the user.
I
d,y
= k
am,z
k
s,y,z
I
test,x
x: phase A, B or C
measuring system 1, 2 or 3
I
d,y
: differential current as displayed
k
am,z
k
s,y,z
: vector group-matching factor (see tables below)
I
test,x
: test current phase A, B or C
In evaluating the test results, one should be aware that the P632 will trip as
follows, if a value of I
diff>>
or I
diff>>>
is exceeded.
P632
10 Commissioning
10-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
I
diff>>
exceeded: Trip regardless of the inrush and overfluxing restraint;
I
diff>>>
exceeded: Trip regardless of the restraining current and regardless
of all other restraints.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID

0=1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DI FF: Di ff. current 1 0.67 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58 0.67 0.58 0.33 0.00 0.33 0.58
Tab. 10-1: Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, zero sequence-filtered.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID

0=1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Tab. 10-2: Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, zero sequence-
filtered.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID

0=12 2 4 6 8 10
DI FF: Di ff. current 1 1.00 1.00 0.00 0.00 1.00 0.00 0.00
Tab. 10-3: Factors for single-side, one-phase feed in phase A, not zero sequence-filtered.
Transformer end a b
Vector group ID

0=12 2 4 6 8 10
Tab. 10-4: Factors for single-side, two-phase, phase-opposition feed in phases B to C, not zero
sequence-filtered.
The connection of the phase currents can be checked using the phase angles
provided as measured operating data by the P632.
10 Commissioning
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 10-7
If the phase currents are connected correctly and there is an ideal balanced load
on the transformer, the phase angles between the phase currents of any one
transformer end are displayed as follows:
Phase sequence ABC

AB,z
=
BC,z
=
CA,z
= 120
Phase sequence ACB

AB,z
=
BC,z
=
CA,z
= 120
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase
sequence.
The phase angle between the phase currents of two transformer ends for a
particular phase is a function of the vector group of the transformer. This phase
angle should be displayed as follows:
Vector group

0 = 12
x,Az
= 180
1
x,Az
= 150
2
x,Az
= 120
3
x,Az
= 90
4
x,Az
= 60
5
x,Az
= 30
6
x,Az
= 0
7
x,Az
= 30
8
x,Az
= 60
9
x,Az
= 90
10
x,Az
= 120
11
x,Az
= 150
This is not influenced by the set value of the function parameter for the phase
sequence. Changing the setting for the connection scheme of an involved series
transformer, on the other hand, will change the measured operating data value
by 180.
10.2.5.2 Checking Ground Differential Protection
The current I to which the P632 responds for single-side feed, neutral-point side,
is calculated as follows:
I
I
diff >
I
nom
k
am,z
P632
10 Commissioning
10-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
I
diff>
: set operate value
I
nom
: nominal current of the P632
k
am,z
There will be no trip for single-side, single-pole, phase-side feed.
The differential and restraining currents formed by the P632 are displayed. The
display of differential and restraining currents is prevented, however, if they fall
below minimum thresholds that can be set by the user.
10.2.6 Checking Control Functions
If the P632 has been ordered with control functions it should be noted for checks
that the local control panel on the P632 does not feature specific keys for
switching functions. If at this point mention of e.g. a selection key is made,
then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned
in this example MAI N: Devi ce sel ecti on key (see Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-14)).
10.2.6.1 Local/Remote Selection
Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control
panel, remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The control site Local or Remote is selected
by the L/R key on the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The L/R key has no effect when a binary signal input has been
configured. Using the L/R key on the local control panel to switch from Remote
to Local is only possible after the Password L/R was entered (see
Chapter Local Control Panel for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.
10.2.6.2 Local Control
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on
the local control panel, and pressing the Open or Close key will generate a
switching request. When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the
respective binary signal input is to be triggered.
10.2.6.3 Remote Control
Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication
interface or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
10.2.6.4 Switchgear Unit Cannot Be Controlled
Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the
following reasons:
General enable for switch commands has not been set.
(Configuration at MAI N: I np. asg. ctrl . enabl ., Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
Interlocking has operated.
(Check at MAI N: I nterl ock equ. vi ol ., Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:
10 Commissioning
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 10-9
Bay interlock (BI): MAI N: Bay i nterl ock. act. , Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
Substation interlock (SI): MAI N: Subst. i nterl . act. , Oper/Cycl/Log
menu branch
With control set to Local:
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately
(Configuration at MAI N: I np. asg. i nterl . deact, Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists from the
communication interface to the substation control level. If the communication link
is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay interlock (BI) without
substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a communication error is present can be
checked at MAI N: Communi cati on error (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any switchgear unit
and in any control direction Open or Close. (Check e.g. for DEV01 at
DEV01: Open w/ o stat. i nterl or DEV01: Cl ose w/ o stat. i nt. (Par/Func/
Cont menu branch).
10.2.7 Completing Commissioning
Before the P632 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset.
(Reset at MAI N: General reset USER (password-protected) and
MT_RC: Reset record. USER , both in Oper/CtrlTest menu branch.)
Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(OUTP: Outp. rel . bl ock USER , Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(MAI N: Tri p cmd. bl ock. USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
The device is on-line.
(MAI N: Devi ce on-l i ne , Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting Yes (= on).)
The correct control point Local or Remote has been activated.
The required interlock equations have been activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling
HEALTHY (H1) should be on.
P632
10 Commissioning
10-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P632 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-2) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Warning!
Warning!
Before checking further, disconnect the P632 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
Warning!
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
Problem
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection

points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.

The P632 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
The P632 issues an Alarm signal on LED H 3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal

memory (see Section 6.12.6.2, (p. 6-31)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. assi gn. warni ng), the faulty area,
the P632's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
Warning and Blocked/faulty.
Key
: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring
SFMON: Fct. assign. warning
021 030
[spacer]
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention
021 018

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-1
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring
SFMON: Warning (LED)
036 070
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer]
SFMON: Warning (relay)
036 100
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer]
SFMON: Warm restart exec.
041 202
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold restart exec.
041 201
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold restart
093 024
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
[spacer]
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update
093 025
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
[spacer]
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure
090 019
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay:
[spacer]
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty
041 200
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Hardware clock fail.
093 040
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
Device reaction:
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Battery failure
090 010
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded
096 121
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
[spacer]
093 081
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
093 082
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
SFMON: -15V supply faulty
093 080
[spacer]
The 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
096 100
[spacer]
096 101
[spacer]
096 102
[spacer]
096 103
[spacer]
096 104
[spacer]
096 105
[spacer]
096 106
[spacer]
096 107
[spacer]
096 108
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-3
Parameter Address
[spacer]
096 109
[spacer]
096 110
[spacer]
096 111
[spacer]
096 112
[spacer]
096 113
[spacer]
096 114
[spacer]
096 115
[spacer]
096 116
[spacer]
096 117
[spacer]
096 118
[spacer]
096 119
[spacer]
096 120
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Dig.Bus
096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module HMI
096 124
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Comm
096 125
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer]
SFMON: Wrong module Ana.Bus
096 126
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer]
097 000
[spacer]
097 001
[spacer]
097 002
[spacer]
097 003
[spacer]
097 004
[spacer]
097 005
[spacer]
097 006
[spacer]
097 007
[spacer]
097 008
[spacer]
097 009
[spacer]
097 010
[spacer]
097 011
[spacer]
097 012
[spacer]
097 013
[spacer]
097 014
[spacer]
097 015
[spacer]
097 016
[spacer]
097 017
[spacer]
097 018
[spacer]
097 019
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-5
Parameter Address
[spacer]
097 020
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty
093 070
[spacer]
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected
during device startup.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty
093 071
[spacer]
RAM fault on communication module A.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty
093 110
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty
093 111
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 701
097 078
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 702
097 079
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 703
097 080
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 704
097 081
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 705
097 082
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 706
097 083
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 707
097 084
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 708
097 085
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 801
097 086
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 802
097 087
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 901
097 094
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 902
097 095
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 903
097 096
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 904
097 097
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 905
097 098
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 906
097 099
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 907
097 100
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 908
097 101
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1001
097 102
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1002
097 103
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1003
097 104
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1004
097 105
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1005
097 106
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1006
097 107
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1601
097 150
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1602
097 151
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1603
097 152
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1604
097 153
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1605
097 154
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1606
097 155
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1607
097 156
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1608
097 157
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1801
097 166
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1802
097 167
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1803
097 168
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1804
097 169
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1805
097 170
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 1806
097 171
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2001
097 182
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2002
097 183
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2003
097 184
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2004
097 185
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2005
097 186
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2006
097 187
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2007
097 188
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-7
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Error K 2008
097 189
[spacer]
Output relay K xxx defective.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Undef. operat. code
093 010
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
[spacer]
SFMON: Abnormal termination
093 030
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer]
SFMON: Bad arg. system call
093 031
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
[spacer]
SFMON: Mutex deadlock
093 032
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid memory ref.
093 033
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a
(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer]
SFMON: Unexpected exception
093 034
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this
error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op.
093 011
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
[spacer]
SFMON: Undefined interrupt
093 012
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
[spacer]
SFMON: Exception oper.syst.
093 013
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
[spacer]
SFMON: Protection failure
090 021
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected
an error.
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-9
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Checksum error param
090 003
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
[spacer]
SFMON: Clock sync. error
093 041
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the
time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM
093 026
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
[spacer]
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC
090 012
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block.
093 015
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.comm.
093 075
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
Device reaction:
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-10 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Inval. Config. IEC
093 079
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y
093 113
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Time-out module Y
093 112
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V
098 000
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty
091 018
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-
measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON and CTS, measuringcircuit monitoring
multiple signal.)
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, a
091 026
[spacer]
SFMON: Meas. c. I faulty, b
091 027
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function, associated with the respective end,
has detected a fault in the current-measuring circuits. (See functions MCMON
and CTS, monitoring of measuring circuits.)
Device reaction:
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-11
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid charact. V/f
091 011
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the overfluxing protection.
Device reaction: Protection is blocked.
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI
093 145
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display
(DHMI).
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD
093 124
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
[spacer]
093 114
[spacer]
093 115
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
[spacer]
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC
093 116
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
[spacer]
SFMON: PT100 open circuit
098 024
[spacer]
The P632 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer PT100 to the analog I/O module Y.
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-12 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input
098 025
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
[spacer]
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp.
098 026
[spacer]
The P632 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
[spacer]
SFMON: Setting error f<>
098 028
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for 'overfrequency'
monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function
[spacer]
SFMON: Iref, a inval. range
091 007
[spacer]
SFMON: Iref, b inval. range
091 008
[spacer]
The reference current determined by the P632 for differential protection is not
within the permissible range.
[spacer]
SFMON: Matching fail. end a
091 000
[spacer]
SFMON: Matching fail. end b
091 001
[spacer]
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function
is above the permissible range.
[spacer]
SFMON: Ratio mtch.fact.inv.
091 004
[spacer]
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors for differential protection is not
within the permissible range.
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-13
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: 2nd match.fact. inv.
091 006
[spacer]
The second highest amplitude matching factor for differential protection is
smaller than permitted.
[spacer]
091 105
[spacer]
091 115
[spacer]
The reference current determined by the P632 for ground differential protection
is not within the permissible range.
[spacer]
091 101
[spacer]
091 102
[spacer]
091 111
[spacer]
091 112
[spacer]
The calculated amplitude matching factor of the ground differential protection
function is above the permissible range.
[spacer]
091 103
[spacer]
091 113
[spacer]
The ratio of the amplitude matching factors of the differential protection function
is not within the permissible range.
[spacer]
091 104
[spacer]
091 114
[spacer]
The lowest amplitude matching factor of the differential protection function is
lower than permitted.
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-14 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Parameter Address
[spacer]
SFMON: CTA error THRM1
098 036
[spacer]
Faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
[spacer]
SFMON: Setting error THRM1
098 038
[spacer]
The maximum permissible object temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value. This setting is not valid.
[spacer]
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync
093 120
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
Device reaction:
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 30
098 053
[spacer]
098 054
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 31
098 055
[spacer]
098 056
[spacer]
SFMON: Output 32
098 057
[spacer]
098 058
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at SFMON: Fct. assign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
[spacer]
098 124
[spacer]
098 125
[spacer]
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's
(CB) status signals.
[spacer]
098 072
[spacer]
098 129
[spacer]
The external input CBF_1: CB faulty EXT has become active.
Device reaction:
11 Troubleshooting
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 11-15
P632
11 Troubleshooting
11-16 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12 MAINTENANCE
Warning!
The P632 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 12-1
12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area
Replacement of the power supply module must be carried out by trained
personnel, and the power supply voltage must be turned off while the work is
being performed.
Danger!
Always turn off the power supply voltage before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed.
Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
Warning!
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
Notice
The replaced power supply module must be disposed of in compliance with
applicable national regulations.
In general, the electronic components of the MiCOM P30 family of devices are
designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend
preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P632 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
If the P632 is continuously connected to the auxiliary power supply, then
there is no discharging of the battery, and the battery will thus not be
depleted during its service life.
Should the P632 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-3) must be carried out.
P632
12 Maintenance
12-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12.2 Routine Functional Testing
The P632 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection
tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out
approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be
performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years 4 years at the maximum.
The P632 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing
basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the
self-monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The
respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such
cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device
from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
12 Maintenance
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 12-3
12.3 Analog Input Circuits
The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the
devices general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is
still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the
analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the
primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement
function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A small measured value (such
as the nominal current in the current path) and a large measured value (such
as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the
measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire
dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1%. An important factor in
evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison
with previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This
can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a
two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current
should be such that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the
device's terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing
instrument that correctly replicates the two-phase ungrounded fault should be
used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of
a few less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical
expectation is that only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be
outside the tolerance range.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the
starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information
processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current
and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type
testing.
P632
12 Maintenance
12-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a
testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each
input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch). This check should be
performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
12 Maintenance
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 12-5
12.5 Binary Outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Warning!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
P632
12 Maintenance
12-6 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
12.6 Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12 Maintenance
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 12-7
P632
12 Maintenance
12-8 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
13 STORAGE
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25C to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled Technical Data). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P632 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 13-1
P632
13 Storage
13-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
14 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS
The P632 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators
that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips
supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-
resistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.
Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Resistor 200 255.002.696
84 TE frame 88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 14-1
P632
14 Accessories and Spare Parts
14-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
15 ORDER INFORMATION
Module configuration variants
Order Information MiCOM P632
Two Winding Transformer
Differential Protection
P 6 3 2 - 0 1 -310 -4xx -650 -46x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -409
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -410
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:
Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted,with detachable HMI 9
Processor extension and Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T11...T14 / T21...24)
2)
9
Voltage transformer:
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (1-pole) 1
Additional binary I/O options:
Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) 5
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:
VA,nom = 24 60 VDC E
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC F
VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC and 6 output relays G
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays H
VA,nom = 24 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts L
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts M
Further add. options:
Without 0
With analog module 2
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4

P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 15-1
Further options
Order Information MiCOM P632
Two Winding Transformer
Differential Protection
P 6 3 2 - 0 1 -310 -4xx -650 -46x -9x x -8xx
Switching threshold on binary inputs:
>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension No.
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V)
8)
-461
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V)
8)
-462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8)
-463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
8)
-464
With communication / information interface:
Without Without order extension No.
Protocol can be switched between:
18)
-92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC 61850, single connection
18)
-94
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
Protocol IEC 61850, redundant connection
21)
-98
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, SHP 1
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, RSTP 2
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST, dual homing 3
Language:
English (German)
4)
Without order extension No.
German (English)
4)
-801
French (English)
4)
-802
Spanish (English)
4)
Not yet available - on request -803
Polish (English)
4)
Russian (English)
4) 7)
Key
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
4) Second included language in brackets.
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West
European characters.
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly
required by the application.
18) Communication option required for control function.
21) IEC 61850 redundant connection with power supply options E to M only.
P632
15 Order Information
15-2 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Information about Ordering Options
Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension
number (805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option
supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference
menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western
European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported.
Consequently, selecting the Russian / English ordering option means that it will
not be possible to download Western European data models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in
most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also Technical Data
chapter) are provided for applications where a higher switching threshold is
expressly required.
P632
P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650 15-3
P632
15-4 P632/EN M/R-11-C // P632-310-650
Schneider Electric
35 rue J oseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publication: P632/EN M/R-11-C Volume 1
Publishing: Schneider Electric
07/2014

2
0
1
4

S
c
h
n
e
i
d
e
r

E
l
e
c
t
r
i
c
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.

P632 EN M R-11-C 310 650 Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P632 EN M R-11-C 310 650 Volume 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P632 EN M R-11-C 310 650 Volume 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the device being described in the technical manual?

What is the device being described in the technical manual?

What safety warnings are mentioned?

What safety warnings are mentioned?

MiCOM P632

Transformer Differential Protection Device

IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)

IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection

IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection

IP 50 for the case

optical fiber connection BFOC-ST

is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)

M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm (US:

optical fiber connection BFOC-ST

connector 2.5 per IEC 6087410 (for

is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)

SC connector per IEC 60874144 (for glass fibers)

RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.

Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V.

0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,

4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4.

7500 W resistive or 30 A at 250 V DC,

2500 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 V DC,

0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,

4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4.

Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m

Multipoint connection: max. 100 m

Optical output: min. 18.85 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm

Optical input: max. 12 dBm

Optical output: min. 15 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 32.5 dBm

Optical input: max. 12 dBm

Optical output: min. 23.5 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm

Optical input: max. 14 dBm

Optical output: min. 20 dBm

Optical sensitivity: min. 31 dBm

Optical input: max. 14 dBm

16 ms without inrush stabilization or I

32 ms with inrush stabilization

40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W

84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W

DEV01 ... DEV03

PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an

MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview

ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of

Status of the thermal replica

Time remaining before tripping

Offset of the thermal replica

LOGI C: Ti me t1 output 1 and LOGI C: Ti me t2 output 1 : settable

LOG_2: Ti me t1 output 1 and LOG_2: Ti me t2 output 1 :

T(4J 1V) 009650311 A ff * Transformer module 4 x J, 1 x V (pin

V(4I 8O) 009651534 B ff Power supply module 24 ... 60 V DC, standard

In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8

In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8

In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8

Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection

Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.